Gribetz International J513165060-2B

Operations and General Maintenance

Paragon® M Series Chain Stitch Quilters

© Copyright 2002, 2003, Gribetz International. All rights reserved.

Paragon, the stylized “G” logo, Global Systems Group, and the stylized “GSG” logo are registered trademarks of Gribetz
International.

Leggett & Platt and the stylized “Leggett & Platt” logo are registered trademarks of Leggett & Platt, Inc.

Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

CompactFlash is a registered trademark of Sandisk Corporation, Santa Clara, California.

NYLATRON is a registered trademark of Polymer Corporation, Reading, Pennsylvania.

All other product names in this manual are trademarked or copyrighted by their respective owners in the U.S and other
countries. All rights reserved.

U.S Patents: 5,154,130; 5, 505,150; 5,544,599; 6,026,756; 6,105,520; 6,170,414

Gribetz International
A Leggett & Platt Company
13800 N.W. 4th Street
Sunrise, Florida 33325

http://www.globalsystemsgroup.com

This manual may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or converted to any electronic or
machine readable form without prior written consent of Gribetz International.

Details herein are subject to change without notice.

Printed in the United States of America.

Part Number J513165060 Release 2B

 Table of Contents
Chapter 1
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Prerequisites to Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Additional Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
How this Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Pictures Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Symbols Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Special Text Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CD-ROM Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
How to Get Additional Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Pattern Development and Styling Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
On-site Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
On-line Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
How to Give Your Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 2
Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
What are Safety Features? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Warning and Caution Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Red Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Other Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safety Reminders About Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electrical Disconnect Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pneumatic Disconnect Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Security Isolation and Lockout System (Lockout/Tagout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Securing the Safety Features of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Securing Guard Doors and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Securing the Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Testing the Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Disabling the Pneumatic Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Enabling the Pneumatic Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

i Quilting Machine
 Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
What is Personal Safety? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Personal Conduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using Personal Safety Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Securing Your Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Preparing Your Machine for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Preparing Your Machine for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Handling Needles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 4
Machine Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
What are Paragon M Series Quilting Machines? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
What is Point & Sew? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Front of the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Near Side of the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Operator Console and Main Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Machine Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Back (Rear) of the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Far Side of the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Main Electrical Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Main Power Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Pneumatic Air Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Pneumatic Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Control Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Start Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Normal Stop and E-Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Thread Sensor System (Electronic Thread Detectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Active Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Display Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fault Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
CompactFlash Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Back Canopy with Motorized Wind-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Catwalk with Material Handling Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Pattern Link Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Autoschedule Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Paragon M ii
 Table of Contents
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Chapter 5
Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Quick Start for Experienced Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
How Does a Multi-Needle Quilting Machine Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Single Product Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Breaking-In the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Making a Safety Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Turning On Power and Activating the Paragon M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Stopping the Paragon M Using a Normal Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Stopping the Paragon M in an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Operating the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Verifying Machine Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operating the Paragon M in Single Product Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operating the Paragon M in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Turning Off the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 6
Working with Patterns and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
What is a Pattern? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
What is a Product? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Loading Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Creating a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Searching for a Completed Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Editing a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cloning a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Deleting a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sewing in Single Product Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Working with Pattern Link Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Modifying a Pattern Link Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Practice Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Practice Exercise #1: Creating a Continuous Product (Slumber Swan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Practice Exercise #2: Creating a Tack & Jump Product (Starry Night) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Practice Exercise #3: Searching for a Product (Slumber Swan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Practice Exercise #4: Editing a Product (Slumber Swan and Starry Night) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Practice Exercise #5: Cloning a Product (Starry Night TS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

iii Quilting Machine

 Table of Contents
Practice Exercise #6: Deleting a Product (Slumber Swan, Starry Night, and Starry Night TS) . . . . . . . 125
Practice Exercise #7: Modifying a Pattern Link Product (1BOX4CIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Chapter 7
Working with Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
What is Batch Mode Quilting? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
What is a Job Schedule? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Determining Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Entering Splice Station and Panel Cutter Distance Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Entering a Crop-Out Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Creating a Job Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adding a Product to the Job Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Moving a Job Within the Job Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Deleting a Product from the Job Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Sewing in Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Monitoring the Job Schedule During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Observing the Current Job During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Observing Job and Machine Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Observing and Changing Job Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Monitoring Material and Needle Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Observing Jobs in Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Deleting Jobs from the Look Ahead Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Changing Panel Size, Quantity, and Mode from the Look Ahead Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Modifying Panels in Queue for the Panel Cutter from the Look Ahead Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Practice Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Practice Exercise #8: Determining and Entering the Panel Cutter Cross-Cut Blade Measurement . . . . 170
Practice Exercise #9: Creating a Job Schedule (Slumber Swan, Starry Night, and Starry Night TS) . . 173
Practice Exercise #10: Moving a Job in the Job Schedule (Starry Night TS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Practice Exercise #11: Deleting a Job from the Job Schedule (Starry Night) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Menus and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Tools Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Turning the Thread Detectors On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Priming the Auto-Lubrication Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Setting the Time Interval for the Auto-Lubrication Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adjusting the Presser Foot Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Paragon M iv
 Table of Contents
Setting System Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Using a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Resetting the Counter for Machine Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Viewing the Quilter Control Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Torque Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Viewing the Panel Cutter Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Copying Information from a CompactFlash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Copying Information to a CompactFlash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
User Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Setting Panel Cutter and Top, Bottom, and Fill Material Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting Crop-out Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting Stop Codes and Machine Speed Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Setting the Stop Code Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Setting the Minimum and Maximum Speed Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Adding a Stop Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Editing a Stop Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Deleting a Stop Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Setting Needle and Carriage Axis Positions with Easy Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting the Needle Axis Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting the Carriage Axis Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Setting Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Setting Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Setting System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Locking Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Chapter 9
Loading Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Types of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Types of Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Testing for Twisted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Loading Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Replenishing Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Replenishing Top Material (Ticking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Using the Bag Closing Attachment to Splice Top Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Replenishing Fill Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Replenishing Bottom Material (Backing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Loading Material through the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Lacing the Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Lacing the Top Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Lacing the Bottom Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

v Quilting Machine
 Table of Contents
Chapter 10
Sewing Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
What is a Chain Stitch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
What is the Needle Setting Code System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
What is the Pyramid Needle Setting System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
What is Loop Take Time? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
What are Loopers, Retainers, and Trimmers? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Checking Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Adjusting Needles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Mounting Needles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Threading Needles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Adjusting Loopers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Mounting Loopers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Threading Loopers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Using the Looper Thread Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Setting Loop Take Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Positioning the Main Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Setting Loop Take Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Setting Pre-Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Setting the Needle Guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Setting Retainers and Trimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Adjusting Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Adjusting Thread Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Adjusting Floater Bar Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Adjusting Top Material Tension Using the Magic Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Adjusting Bow Bar Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Adjusting Precompression Roller Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Adjusting Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Further Adjustments to Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Chapter 11
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Safety Procedures for Cleaning and Maintaining the Paragon M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Lockout Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Protective Material and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Proper Lockout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Preparing the Paragon M for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Inspecting the Paragon M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Daily Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Weekly Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Monthly Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Annual Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Maintaining the Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Paragon M vi
 Table of Contents
Main Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Upper Rocker Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Maintaining the Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Automated Adjustable Presser Foot Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Needle Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Riser Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Nylatron Window Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Nyliner Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Maintaining the Eccentrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Needle Drive Eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Looper Drive Eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Rear Butterfly Eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Maintaining the Mechanical Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Needle Drive Connecting Link (Dog Bone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Presser Foot Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Upper Butterfly Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Upper Butterfly Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Front Retainer Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Retainer Bar Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Looper Drive Link Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Cleaning the Paragon M and Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cleaning the Paragon M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cleaning the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Cleaning Precompression and Outfeed Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Cleaning the Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Maintaining the Automatic Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Replacing Fluorescent and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Replacing Fluorescent Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Replacing Main Power Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Replacing Control Power Button Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Replacing Thread Detector Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Maintaining the Isolator Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Chapter 12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Asking Questions to Solve Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Electrical and Control System Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Touch Screen Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Mechanical Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Sewing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

vii Quilting Machine

 Table of Contents
Appendix A
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Appendix B
Glossary of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Appendix C
Glossary of Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Appendix D
Safety and Maintenance Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Appendix E
Answers to Review Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Chapter 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Chapter 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Paragon M viii
 List of Figures
Figure 1.1 Example of a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Figure 1.2 Example of a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Figure 1.3 Example of a Warning Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 1.4 Example of an Icon You Can Touch to Make Something Happen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 1.5 Pattern Development and Styling Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Figure 2.1 Location of Typical Safety Features for Multi-Needle Quilting Machines (Top View) . . . . 12
Figure 2.2 Example of a Warning Decal (High Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 2.3 Example of a Warning Decal (Pinch Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Figure 2.4 Example of a Decal with Caution Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 2.5 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 2.6 Location of E-Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 2.7 Electrical Disconnect Device - Main Electrical Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 2.8 Location of Main Electrical Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 2.9 Pneumatic Regulator and Disconnect Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 2.10 Location of Pneumatic Regulator and Disconnect Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 2.11 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 2.12 Materials to Use for Lockout/Tagout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Figure 2.13 Location of Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 2.14 Location of Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 2.15 Correct Setting of Pneumatic Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 3.1 Personal Safety Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 3.2 Needle Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 4.1 The Paragon M Series Chain Stitch Quilting Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 4.2 Machine Orientation (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 4.3 Paragon M (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 4.4 Paragon M (Near Side - Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 4.5 Paragon M (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 4.6 Paragon M (Far Side View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 4.7 Main Electrical Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 4.8 Main Power Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 4.9 Pneumatic Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 4.10 Control Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 4.11 Start Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 4.12 Normal Stop Button and E-Stop Button (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 4.13 Normal Stop Button, Start Button, and E-Stop Button (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 4.14 E-Stop Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 4.15 Electronic Thread Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 4.16 Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 4.17 Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 5.1 Main Power Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 5.2 Splash Screen with No Errors Present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 5.3 Applying Control Power to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 5.4 Stopping the Quilting Machine Using a Normal Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

ix Quilting Machine
 List of Figures
Figure 5.5 Stopping the Quilting Machine in an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 6.1 Standard Class Pattern and Railroad Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 6.2 Types of Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 6.3 Identifying Pattern Link Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 6.4 Modifying a Pattern Link Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 6.5 Modifying Pattern Link Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 6.6 Practice Exercise #1 - Completed Slumber Swan Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 6.7 Practice Exercise #2 - Completed Starry Night Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 6.8 Practice Exercise #4 - Edited Slumber Swan Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 6.9 Practice Exercise #4 - Saving Edited Starry Night Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 6.10 Practice Exercise #4 - Edited Starry Night Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 6.11 Practice Exercise #5 - Cloned Starry Night Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 7.1 Accumulator Bar at Bottom of Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 7.2 Marking the Panel Cutter Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 7.3 Marking the Ticking Splice Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 7.6 Marking the Ticking Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 7.7 Marking the Fill Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 7.8 Marking the Backing Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 7.4 Marking the Fill Splice Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 7.5 Marking the Backing Splice Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 7.9 Marking the Location of the Middle Needle Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 7.10 Measuring Panel Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 7.11 Measuring Material Stations from the Middle Needle Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 7.12 Measuring Ticking Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 7.13 Measuring Fill Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 7.14 Measuring Backing Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 7.15 Observing Job and Machine Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 7.16 Changing Job Speed from the Speed Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 7.17 Monitoring Material in Batch Mode - No Material Changes Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 7.18 Monitoring Material in Batch Mode - Scheduled Material Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 7.19 Monitoring Material in Batch Mode - Requesting a Material Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 7.20 Panel Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 7.21 Look Ahead Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 8.1 Tools Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Figure 8.2 Turning Thread Detectors On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 8.3 Priming the Auto-Lubrication Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 8.4 Setting the Time Interval for the Auto-Lubrication Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 8.5 Adjusting Presser Foot Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 8.6 Setting System Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 8.7 Viewing the Quilter Control Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 8.8 Viewing the Panel Cutter Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 8.9 Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 8.10 Inserting the CompactFlash Card into the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Paragon M x
 List of Figures
Figure 8.11 User Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 8.12 User Configuration Screen Revision Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 8.13 Request for Stop Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 8.14 Setting the Minimum and Maximum Speed Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 8.15 Lock Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 8.16 Help Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 8.17 Help Text Screen (a future feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Figure 8.18 Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 9.1 Proper Loop Formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 9.2 Path of Ticking Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 9.3 Path of Fill Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 9.4 Clamping Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 9.5 Material Trough with Top Material and Magic Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 9.6 Bag Closing Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 9.7 Grip Roller and Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 9.8 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 9.9 Material Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 9.10 Lacing Top Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 9.11 Lacing the Thread Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 9.12 Lacing Top Thread Through Guide Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 9.13 Lacing Bottom Thread Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 9.14 Lacing the Tension Disc (Bottom Thread) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 9.15 Lacing Bottom Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 9.16 Lacing the Double Guide Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 10.1 Stitch Formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 10.2 Needle Bar Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 10.3 Needle Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 10.4 Determining Needle Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 10.5 Typical Needle Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 10.6 Pyramid Needle Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 10.7 Looper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 10.8 Trimmer and Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 10.9 Parts of a Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Figure 10.10 Threading the Needle Using the Threading Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 10.11 Looper Assembly (J518191605) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 10.12 Looper Base (J5P30462) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 10.13 Looper Angle Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 10.14 Threading the Looper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 10.15 Using the Looper Thread Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 10.16 Loop Take Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 10.17 Setting Pre-Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Figure 10.18 Testing Pre-Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 10.19 Needle Guard Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

xi Quilting Machine
 List of Figures
Figure 10.20 Retainer Examination Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 10.21 Pattern Compensation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 11.1 Example of a Lockout Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Figure 11.2 Front Sewing Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 11.3 Adjustable Presser Foot Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 11.4 Needle Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 11.5 Riser Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 11.6 Needle Drive Eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 11.7 Needle Drive Eccentric (Detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 11.8 Looper Drive Eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 11.9 Rear Butterfly Eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 11.10 Needle Drive Connecting Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 11.11 Presser Foot Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 11.12 Upper Butterfly Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 11.13 Upper Butterfly Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 11.14 Front Retainer Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 11.15 Retainer Bar Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 11.16 Computer Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 11.17 Grease Reservoir and Paddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Paragon M xii
 List of Tables
Table 2.1 Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 4.1 Evolution of Gribetz Chain Stitch Series Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 4.2 Paragon M Series Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 6.1 Product Information - Creating a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Table 6.2 Pattern Link Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 7.1 Job Scheduling System - Key System Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Table 7.2 Example of Distance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 8.1 Stop Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Table 8.2 Lock Screen Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Table 10.1 Tools List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Table 11.1 Typical Properties of Shell Alvania EP00 Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Table 11.2 Typical Properties of Shell Alvania EP-1 Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Table 11.3 Lubrication Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Table 11.4 Typical Properties of Mobil DTE Light Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Table 11.5 Typical Properties of Almagard 3751 Vari-Purpose Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Table 12.1 Electrical and Control System Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Table 12.2 Touch Screen Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Table 12.3 Mechanical Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Table 12.4 Sewing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Table 12.5 Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Table B.1 Glossary of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Table C.1 Glossary of Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

xiii Quilting Machine

 List of Tables

Paragon M xiv
 Prerequisites to Using this Manual About this Manual

About this Manual

1
This manual provides detailed information on how to operate and perform Paragon M A multi-
needle chain stitch quilting
general maintenance on the Gribetz International Paragon® M series chain stitch
machine introduced in
quilting machines. It is designed to be used as a tutorial and as a reference in your 2002.
everyday work. This manual will not teach you how to install the Paragon® M
Quilting The surface
quilting machines. Gribetz International service technicians will install your treatment in which the
machine. However, you will need to prepare your site prior to their arrival. For cover, foam and/or other
fibers are sewn together,
pre-installation instructions, see Machine Orientation Manual (part number using various stitch
J5MECQ9600). patterns on quilting
machinery, including
NOTE: Installation and maintenance should be performed only by scroll or panel quilters
qualified service personnel. (single needle) and multi-
needle quilters.

Prerequisites to Using this Manual

This manual is intended for operators, maintenance technicians, and supervisory
personnel who are familiar with bedding industry machinery. Basic computer
skills, although helpful, are not necessary. Please review this manual periodically
after attending training classes.

Additional Materials
Your machine arrives with the following documentation and tools:
• Machine Orientation Manual (part number J5MECQ9600)
• Gribetz Parts Center Manual (part number J513165002)
• Paragon M Chain Stitch Quilters Operations and General Maintenance Manual
(part number J513165060) and CD-ROM (part number J513165064)
• Chain Stitch Parts Manual (part number J513199086)
• Multi-needle Pattern Design Manual (part number J513169045)
• Tack & Jump® Chain Stitch Quilting Video - Minimizing Tails (part number
J513179062)
• General Safety Procedures Video (part number J513179060)
• General Safety Procedures Pamphlet (part number J513165030)
• Schematic diagrams

1 Quilting Machine
 About this Manual How this Manual is Organized

• Tool kit for adjustment and timing procedures. See Table 10.1, “Tools List”
on page 255.
There are no additional materials for this machine. If you need further
information, consult the Gribetz International Helpline at 1-954-846-0300.

How this Manual is Organized

The manual contains six main sections:

Section Purpose
About this Manual - Chapter 1 Describes this manual and how to use it.

Safety Information - Chapters 2 and 3 Describes how to operate the Paragon M

series quilting machines safely and highlights
the safety features of the machine.

Machine Overview and Operation - Teaches step-by-step instructions on how to

Chapters 4, 5, 6, and 7 operate the Paragon M series quilting
machines and introduces you to the concept
of “Batch Mode.”

Adjustments and Maintenance - This section contains steps for solving some
Chapters 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 common operator problems, as well as
maintenance procedures.

Appendices Contain more information about terms used

in this manual and icons and screens
displayed on the Paragon M control screens,
This section also provides answers to the
review questions found at the end of each
chapter.

Index Contains a list of words that you can use to

locate information you need.

Chapter 1, “About this Manual” presents an overview of the manual and how to
use it.
Components An Chapter 2, “Safety Features” details important safety devices specific to the
essential group of parts of
Paragon M quilting machine.
a larger piece of
equipment. Chapter 3, “Personal Safety” discusses safe operating procedures.
Batch Mode A condition Chapter 4, “Machine Overview” introduces you to the basic components of the
in which the quilting
machine is scheduled to Paragon M quilting machine.
produce a group or series
of products in a specific Chapter 5, “Operating Procedures” teaches step-by-step instructions on how to
order. operate the Paragon M quilting machine.
Parameter A constant Chapter 6, “Working with Patterns and Products” discusses basic concepts of
element or factor,
planning and creating products.
especially serving as a
limit or boundary.

Paragon M 2
 Pictures Used in this Manual About this Manual

Chapter 7, “Working with Batches” introduces you to the concept of “Batch

Mode”, how to create jobs, and how to schedule jobs.
Chapter 8, “Utilities” outlines specific utilities, such as setting system parameters
and using a modem.
Chapter 9, “Loading Material” teaches how to replenish material and thread.
Chapter 10, “Sewing Adjustments” discusses how to fine-tune the Paragon M
series quilting machines and how to correct pattern distortion.
Chapter 11, “General Maintenance” discusses routine care and maintenance of
the Paragon M series quilting machines.
Chapter 12, “Troubleshooting” describes some common problems, the causes of
the problems, and how to solve them.
Appendix A, “Glossary of Terms” contains meanings of words and phrases used
in this manual.
Appendix B, “Glossary of Screens” describes each of the Paragon M screens, their
function, how to access them, and a list of associated icons.
Appendix C, “Glossary of Icons” describes the small pictures that appear on the
Paragon M control screen.
Appendix D, “Safety and Maintenance Checklist” contains a list of actions you
can take to make your workplace clean and safe.
Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions” contains the answers to review
questions that appear at the end of each chapter.
An Index contains a list of words that will further assist you in finding
information within the manual.

Pictures Used in this Manual

This manual might contain photographs, drawings, tables, and pictures of screens
to provide more information about a topic. Pictures (Figures), if present, always
follow the paragraphs that discuss the information that they illustrate.

3 Quilting Machine
 About this Manual Pictures Used in this Manual

Screens
Touch Screen A display Pictures of screens give you an idea of what you can expect to see on the touch
screen on which the user
screen display when you are following step-by-step instructions. Figure 1.1 shows
selects options (as from a
menu) by touching an icon an example of a screen.
on the screen.

Menu Screen display that

prompts you to select
options and enter
specifications.

Figure 1.1 Example of a Screen

Tables
A table contains a list of details that are related. A table can help to organize a lot
of information in a format that is easy to read. Figure 1.2 shows an example of a
table.

Part No. Part

J513090990 Beeswax

J513168030 Driver, nut 7/16”

Figure 1.2 Example of a Table

Icons
An icon is a small picture that portrays a certain idea. Some icons appear as
buttons that you can touch; other icons are not displayed until something
happens, such as an error. For example, a warning icon appears if the air supply is
below minimum requirements or is disconnected.

Paragon M 4
 Pictures Used in this Manual About this Manual

Figure 1.3 Example of a Warning Icon

Another example of an icon is the Set Loop Take Time icon. You can touch this
icon to position the machine for the Loop Take Time procedure.

Figure 1.4 Example of an Icon You Can Touch to Make Something Happen

To see the complete list of icons, refer to Appendix C, “Glossary of Icons” starting
on page 369.

Special Symbols Used in this Manual

Take special care to read any information that appears with the following
symbols:
Warnings describe conditions that can cause physical harm.

WARNING: Pneumatic pressure is still present even when main power is

disconnected.

A caution reminds you to be aware of safety risks and to follow good safety
procedures.

CAUTION: The computer components are very sensitive. Do not

vacuum near or on the components.

A note explains additional or helpful information.

NOTE: For Tack & Jump patterns, use pneumatic-actuated tension

discs.

5 Quilting Machine
 About this Manual CD-ROM Navigation

Special Text Used in this Manual

Book titles are printed in italic type, for example Gribetz Parts Center Manual.
References to Chapter headings, figures, and tables are printed with quotations.
For example, see Figure 2.5, “Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Button” on page 16.
This manual uses bold lettering to show which icon to touch when the icon is on
the touch screen keypad. For example, “Touch 2, then touch Enter to continue.”
Terms or words that may be unfamiliar to you or may be specific to the quilting
industry are located in the sidebar next to the paragraph where they first appear.
These terms are also helpful when translating the manual into other languages.
See Chapter A, “Glossary of Terms” starting on page 341 for a complete list of
terms and their definitions.

CD-ROM Navigation
This full color manual is available on CD-ROM in PDF (Portable Document
Format) and can be viewed or printed from Adobe® Acrobat® Reader. All
versions of Acrobat Reader are included on the CD-ROM.

NOTE: For additional information about Adobe Acrobat Reader or

to download a free version of Adobe Acrobat Reader, please
visit www.adobe.com on the internet.

This interactive manual allows you to click on a Table of Contents or Index entry
from the Bookmarks tab in the Navigation Pane, or from the actual manual, and
go directly to that page. Cross-references such as, See “Adjusting Needles” on
page 256, and web sites are also linked. You will need internet access to link to
web pages. Future books will allow you to view video clips of operational and
maintenance sequences.

NOTE: Our electronic manuals are easily e-mailed. Your server will
require space of 20Mb or more.

How to Get Additional Help

We recognize that there may be times when you need additional help. Gribetz
International is always ready to provide on-line and on-site assistance through
our customer service department and the internet.

Training
Only fully trained and authorized employees should operate the Paragon M
series quilting machines. Our Technical Training Center, located in Sunrise,
Florida, provides instructions for proper operations of all Gribetz International

Paragon M 6
 How to Get Additional Help About this Manual

products as well as guidance for maintenance on these products. Our

personalized training program is designed to meet your needs.
It is very important to attend a training class before you operate the Paragon M
quilting machine. The class tells you about the features of the machine, but most
importantly, the class teaches you how to work safely. To schedule a training
class, contact the Technical Training Center at 1-954-846-0300 or visit the Gribetz
International web site at www.globalsystemsgroup.com.
To achieve the greatest safety and productivity, allow only fully-trained
employees to operate the quilting machine.

Pattern Development and Styling Studio

The Paragon M quilting machine uses pattern development software. The Gribetz
International Pattern Development and Styling Studio is available to assist you
with any questions you may have about a specific pattern, pattern development,
or custom design. For more information, call 1-954-846-0300.

Figure 1.5 Pattern Development and Styling Studio

Customer Service
When you need more information or answers to questions, the Customer Service
Department Helpline is available Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.,
Eastern Time:
Gribetz International Domestic and International Helpline
1-954 846-0300 or 1-800-326-4742

7 Quilting Machine
 About this Manual How to Give Your Feedback

Our skilled personnel are able to help you with mechanical, electrical, electronic,
and computer questions. You will likely get answers to your questions more
quickly if you do the following:
• Try to find the answer in this manual.
• Ask a supervisor the question.
• Look up your Customer ID number.
• Make a note of the machine’s serial number. The model number and serial
number of the quilting machine are located on the back of the near side leg.
• Locate a phone that is close to the machine so you can tell the technical staff
what is happening.

On-site Assistance
There may be times when your specific problem might require more attention
than our staff can deliver through telephone support. In this situation, our
technical staff will assess your problem and, if necessary, travel to your site.
Please be aware that certain fees apply. Contact the Gribetz International
Domestic and International Helpline at 1-954-846-0300 or 1-800-326-4742 for
specific information on fees and services.

On-line Assistance
On-line assistance is available if you are connected to, or are served by, a
computer network, such as the Internet. You can receive a current training
schedule or register for classes on the Internet. Visit our web site at
www.globalsystemsgroup.com. You can report problems on the same web site
by submitting our on-line Request for Assistance form under the Service & Support
section.

How to Give Your Feedback

Your ideas are important! Please let us know what you like in this manual, as well
as what you don’t like. Tell us what you would like to see more or less of, or what
you would like to see presented in a different way. We look forward to hearing
from you soon.
Please address all comments to:
Gribetz International
Technical Documentation/Engineering
Sawgrass International Corporate Park
13800 North West 4th Street
Sunrise, Florida 33325
or via the internet at: www.globalsystemsgroup.com

Paragon M 8
 Review About this Manual

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced Appendix Plural
“appendices.”
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
Supplementary material
starting on page 395. usually attached at the end
of a book.
1 True or False. This manual is intended for operators, maintenance
technicians, and supervisory personnel who are familiar with industrial
sewing machines and basic sewing principles.
2 True or False. This manual is organized into chapters.
3 What type of information is identified by a triangle?
4 True or False. This manual is organized into six major sections.
5 True or False. Book titles are printed in italic type.
6 A ______ reminds you to be aware of safety risks and to follow good safety
procedures.
7 Choose all of the ways to get answers to questions about the machine:
a. Training at the Technical Training Center
b. Telephone the Gribetz International Helpline
c. Read the manual
d. All of the above
8 Before calling Gribetz International for help, choose which information you
must have:
a. Customer identification number
b. Model and serial number of the machine
c. A working telephone located near the machine
d. A big lunch

9 Quilting Machine
 About this Manual Review

Paragon M 10
 What are Safety Features? Safety Features

Safety Features
2
Because your personal safety is so important to us, the Paragon M quilting
machines are designed with a full protection package. This package includes:
warning and caution decals, guards, emergency stop (E-Stop) buttons, and Pneumatic Refers to
pneumatic and electrical disconnect devices. pneumatic power, which
provides energy for the
This chapter discusses safety features specific to the Paragon M quilting machine’s parts using
compressed air.
machines. Before you start the machine, we recommend that you read this chapter
and Chapter 3, “Personal Safety.” Upon completing this chapter, you should be
able to identify each of the safety features.

NOTE: Read and understand this entire manual before you begin
operating the Paragon M quilting machine. These
instructions contain important safety and operation
information.

You will learn:

• What safety features are part of the Paragon M quilting machine.
• How do you use and secure the safety devices of the Paragon M quilting
machine.
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1 What are a safety features?
2 Why are safety features important?
3 What is an interlock switch?

What are Safety Features?

Safety features are specific visual and acoustic guarding and warning devices
which are attached to, or are part of, a machine. These features are required on
machinery that may be hazardous to operate and are designed to protect you, and
others near the machine, from injury. A number of safety features are included in
the Paragon M quilting machine; when the operator uses them correctly, they can
help protect against accidents. It is important to identify and fully understand
each of the safety features. To locate these features, see Figure 2.1, “Location of
Typical Safety Features for Multi-Needle Quilting Machines (Top View).”

11 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features

Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting

Machine Safety Features
A number of safety features are incorporated in the manufacturing of the
Paragon M quilting machine, providing the operator with protection against
accidents.
The Paragon M series quilting machines have the following safety features:
• Warning and Caution Decals
• Guards
• Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons
• Electrical Disconnect Devices
• Interlock System
• Pneumatic Disconnect Devices
• Security Isolation and Lockout System
Figure 2.1 shows the location of each safety feature. For more information about
the machine’s various components, see Chapter 4, “Machine Overview.”

Figure 2.1 Location of Typical Safety Features for Multi-Needle Quilting

Machines (Top View)

Paragon M 12
 Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features Safety Features

Warning and Caution Decals

The Paragon M series quilting machine and optional attachments are clearly
marked with red and yellow decals as a reminder to observe safe operating
procedures. Always replace worn or missing decals.

NOTE: Decals area available in languages other than English on

request. Please order decals from the Gribetz International
Parts Department at 1-954-846-0300 or 1-800-326-4742.

Red Decals
Red decals indicate immediate danger. Special precautions are necessary.
Failure to observe decal instructions can result in serious physical injury to
workers or damage to property. Always replace worn or missing decals.
A warning decal, shown in Figure 2.2, identifies a hazardous voltage area. This Multi-Tap Transformer
decal is located on the main cabinet door and on the access cover to the multi- A device that converts
power from one circuit to
tap transformer. Only professional service and maintenance personnel who are another at the same
trained in electrical and electronics are authorized to access these areas. frequency, but at a
Additional warning decals are located at pinch points, shown in Figure 2.3. Stay changed voltage and
clear of these areas when the machine is in motion. current.

Figure 2.2 Example of a Warning Figure 2.3 Example of a Warning

Decal (High Voltage) Decal (Pinch Point)

Other Decals
Other decals help you to be aware of safety risks and good safety procedures.
The decals warn against possible hazards, and caution against unsafe practices.
Read the instructions on these decals and become familiar with them. Failure to

13 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features

observe decal instructions can result in serious injury to workers or damage to

property. Figure 2.4 shows an example of a yellow decal.

Figure 2.4 Example of a Decal with Caution Instructions

Guards
Near Side/Far Side The Safety guards are barriers that prevent entry to dangerous mechanical parts. The
“Near Side” is the area of
guards typically found on Paragon M quilting machines are:
the machine that is nearest
the main cabinet and
Table 2.1 Guards
typically where the

Guard Description
operator stands. The “Far
Side” is the area of the
machine that is farthest
from the main cabinet, and panel guard This panel protects the multi-tap transformer. It is located on the
usually the farthest from lower side of the near side end guard, towards the electrical
the operator. enclosure. This fixed guard is secured by screws and is not
interlocked.

hinged panel Hinged panels guards are located on the front and back of the near
guard - far side and far side enclosures allowing you access to mechanical and
electrical components. These guards are secured by screws and the
interlock system.

Paragon M 14
 Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features Safety Features

Table 2.1 Guards

Guard Description
main cabinet The main cabinet door protects the wiring and operating system of
door the Paragon M quilting machine. This is a high voltage area and is
secured by the interlock system and a key. Only authorized service
and maintenance personnel can access this area.

infeed and Clear impact-resistant guards located on the front of the sewing Sewing Box Central
enclosure box prevent your fingers from getting caught in moving parts in section of machine where
guards the front sewing box area. The front in-feed and enclosure guards all sewing activity takes
can be opened or closed and are interlocked. place. It is visible from the
front or back.

NOTE: On Paragon M2 machines, the front in-feed guard is Retainer A device that
permanently attached to the top of the sewing box. holds and spreads the
thread into a triangle as
part of stitch formation.
sliding door Clear impact-resistant panels and sliding doors are located on the
Trimmer Functions like
guards back (rear) of the sewing box. Two panels are fixed guards.
the retainer, but also cuts
Through the sliding doors you gain access to the lower sewing box
the thread after the “tack”
area to adjust retainers, trimmers, loopers and perform general
and during the “jump” for
maintenance. The sliding doors are interlocked.
Tack & Jump® (patented)
products.

Looper A stitch forming

device. Assists with
making loops as part of
stitch formation.
Safety Reminders About Guards
The following list describes what you should and should not do to guards
when operating the Paragon M series quilting machines.
• Inspect guard doors and panels daily to ensure all hardware is present and
securely fastened.
• Do not attempt to remove or defeat guards while the quilting machine is in
operation.
• Do not operate the quilting machine without guards and panels properly
installed, or with any guard or panel opened or removed.

WARNING: Only authorized service and maintenance personnel should

access the electrical or control panel areas.

15 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features

Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons

Actuator Power Red emergency stop (E-Stop) buttons are safety devices which, allow the operator
Electricity supplied to a
to stop the machine in an emergency. At any time during operation, press an E-
mechanical device for
moving or controlling Stop button to disconnect actuator power and stop the machine. Figure 2.5 shows
equipment. a picture of an emergency stop button.

NOTE: After pressing an E-Stop button, the system shuts down,

Main Electrical however fluorescent lights remain on. To disconnect all
Disconnect This device,
either a switch or a lever, is power to the machine, turn the main electrical power switch,
located on the main or lever, to the OFF position.
cabinet. See “Electrical
Disconnect Devices” on
page 17 and “Main
Electrical Power Switch”
on page 44.

Figure 2.5 Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Button

There are five E-Stop buttons on the Paragon M quilting machine, as shown in
Figure 2.6.
• One is located on the front of the main cabinet below the computer monitor.
• The remaining four are located on the near and far sides in the front and
back of the sewing box area.

Figure 2.6 Location of E-Stop Buttons

Paragon M 16
 Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features Safety Features

Electrical Disconnect Devices

Electrical disconnects are mechanical devices that start or stop the flow of Control Switch A device
or mechanism that
electrical power immediately. They can be either switches or levers. The
regulates or guides the
Paragon M quilting machines have a main electrical power switch located on the operation of the machine.
rear of the main cabinet. This device connects electrical power from the switch to
the machine. Turning this control device clockwise (ON) allows electrical current
to flow into the machine, but does not cause any parts to move. Turning the
switch counter-clockwise (OFF) disconnects main power from the machine.

NOTE: The international symbol I indicates ON; 0 indicates OFF.

Figure 2.7 Electrical Disconnect Device - Main Electrical Power Switch

The Paragon M quilting machine uses 220VAC + 5%, alternating current, three-
phase, 30 amps. It is very important that the operator turn off the main electrical
power switch before performing any service or maintenance on the machine.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform service to the electrical system.

Figure 2.8 Location of Main Electrical Power Switch

17 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features

Pneumatic Disconnect Devices

PSI Pounds per square One air line supplies pneumatic power to the entire quilting machine. A
inch; a measure of air
pneumatic disconnect device is a control switch that starts or stops the flow of air
pressure.
pressure immediately. The red pneumatic disconnect on the Paragon M quilting
Bars A metric unit of machines is located on the pneumatic regulator. This regulator is located on the
pressure equal to one
million dynes (a unit of back of the machine, on the leg, under the near side end guard. To stop the flow of
force) per square air to the machine, press the red disconnect switch down.
centimeter.
The Paragon M quilting machine uses an air pressure of 60 to 80 PSI (4.1 to 5.5
BARS). Frequently check the pressure gauge on the regulator throughout the day.
Turn the knob at the top of the regulator to increase or decrease air pressure.
When servicing the quilting machine, ensure proper isolation and lockout of the
pneumatic disconnect device.

Figure 2.9 Pneumatic Regulator and Disconnect Device

Figure 2.10 Location of Pneumatic Regulator and Disconnect Device

Paragon M 18
 Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features Safety Features

Interlock System
The interlock system is designed to stop the machine during operation should Activate To supply
control power; to apply the
anyone try to enter dangerous mechanical or electrical areas. This safety device
voltage which allows
consists of electrical interlock switches and is typically located on doors, hinged movement of the various
panels, and gates. The main cabinet door, clear sliding doors, clear front in-feed electro-mechanical
components.
enclosure guard, and hinged panels on the Paragon M are secured by the
interlock system. Permanently attached panels such as the lower near side end
guard are not interlocked.
Interlock switches activate only when a connection is made. If the connection is
broken (doors, gates, or panels are opened) the interlock switch no longer has
contact with its electrical connection and the machine will not operate.
Maintain all interlocks in operable condition at all times. Do not defeat these
safety interlocks.

NOTE: During operation, the interlock activates; the clear sliding

doors and the clear front in-feed enclosure remain locked
under air pressure. You must stop the quilting machine
before you can open these doors.

Before starting the quilting machine, always close and secure all guards.
See also, Figure 2.14, “Location of Interlock System” on page 22.

Figure 2.11 Interlock System

19 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machine Safety Features

Security Isolation and Lockout System (Lockout/

Tagout)
Permit to work system Always use a “permit to work system” before servicing the quilting machine.
Also known as “lockout
Follow this procedure to stop the operation of the quilting machine and to make it
and tagout.” Refers to
special safety procedures safe for a service technician to work on the machine.
that the operator uses to
secure the parts of a Isolation and lockout typically includes fastening devices such as locks, tags, and
machine before beginning cards to parts of the machine. The lockout/tagout procedure includes the
service or maintenance.
following:
• Isolation
• Lockout
• Tagout
Isolation means that you shut off all the switches that control the moving parts of
the machine.
Lockout means that you make sure none of the machine parts can move.
Tagout means that the person who places the tag on the machine part is the only
person who can remove the tag.
OSHA Occupational The isolation and lockout procedure is necessary to ensure safe disconnection of
Safety and Health
power and air while someone works on the machine. This procedure prevents
Administration, a U.S.
government agency. unexpected start-up or movement of the machine parts, which could cause injury.
For further information, see OSHA standard 29 CFR (Code of Federal Regulation)
1910.147 or refer to national safety regulations for your country.

Figure 2.12 Materials to Use for Lockout/Tagout

Paragon M 20
 Securing the Safety Features of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines Safety Features

Securing the Safety Features of the

Paragon M Series Quilting Machines
The following instructions tell you how to properly secure the guards and
interlock system, and how to test and reset the E-Stop buttons and pneumatic
disconnect devices.

Securing Guard Doors and Panels

Guards are designed to protect the operator from contact with mechanical or
electrical equipment. Do not operate the machine unless all doors and panels are
in place, closed, and secured.
Hinged and panel guards are secured by screws. Some hinged guards are secured
by the interlock system, such as the clear sliding door guards and the front in-feed
enclosure. The main cabinet requires a special key. See “Guards” on page 14.
To secure guards:
1 Make sure all guard doors and panels are closed.
2 Make sure all hardware is tightened.
3 Make sure and the main cabinet door is closed and locked.

Figure 2.13 Location of Guards

21 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Securing the Safety Features of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines

Securing the Interlock System

Verify the interlock system connection. Interlocked guard doors and gates must
be closed, and air must be turned on to allow the interlock system to function
properly. Ensure air pressure is between 60 to 80 PSI (4.1 to 5.5 BARS). If air
pressure is not at this level, then:
1 Make sure all interlocked doors are closed.
2 Verify that air is properly connected.
3 Verify that the air valve is in the ON position. The red in-line quick
disconnect valve should be up.
4 Verify that air pressure is present.
5 Verify proper air pressure. Increase or decrease air pressure until the gauge
reads the recommended level. A valve (or knob) is typically located on the
top of the pneumatic regulator. Turn this knob to increase or decrease
pneumatic pressure.
6 Call a supervisor if this cannot be resolved.
See also in this chapter, “Interlock System”, Table 2.1, “Guards”, and Figure 2.13,
“Location of Guards”.

Figure 2.14 Location of Interlock System

Paragon M 22
 Securing the Safety Features of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines Safety Features

Testing the Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons

Emergency stop (E-Stop) buttons stop the quilting machine immediately. Test
each E-Stop button every month to verify that it is functioning properly.

NOTE: Do not use this procedure for normal stops. Any use of the
E-Stop buttons while the quilting machine is operating
could cause damage to the quilting machine and materials.

To test the E-Stop buttons:

1 Before starting the test, stop the quilting machine using the normal stop
button.
2 Press one of the red E-Stop buttons.
3 The computer monitor shows a red screen while the machine saves data.

SYSTEM OFF

4 When the screen goes blank, verify that all control power immediately
disconnects. (Fluorescent lights remain on.)
You will need to reboot the machine. To do this:
1 Turn the main electrical power switch counter-clockwise (OFF) to disconnect
main power from the machine. The computer saves the current position.

NOTE: The international symbol I indicates ON; O indicates OFF.

2 Reset the E-Stop button by rotating the button one-quarter turn to the right
(clockwise).
3 The E-Stop button pops out and resumes its original position.
4 Turn the main electrical power switch clockwise (ON) to reconnect electrical
current to the machine.
5 The system performs several diagnostic tests, and if no faults are present,
displays the same position as prior to this test.
6 Press the start button to continue. The system will complete the product.
7 Repeat this procedure for each E-Stop button. Programmable Panel
Cutter A high speed
panel cutter where the
WARNING: In an emergency situation, pressing the E-Stop buttons on
control system of the cutter
the programmable panel cutter will stop the quilting receives the requested size
machine in a normal condition; it will not place it in an E- data through
Stop condition. Before correcting the emergency on the communication with a
quilting machine or by
quilting machine, you must press an E-Stop button on the manual entry from the
quilting machine and disconnect main power. operator.

23 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Securing the Safety Features of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines

Disabling the Pneumatic Regulator

Disable To prevent The pneumatic disconnect device disables pneumatic power. Test the pneumatic
operation.
disconnect device at least once a month. Always disable pneumatic power before
performing maintenance on the machine.
Follow these steps when it is necessary to shut down or stop the pneumatic part
of the machine:
1 Before testing, stop the quilting machine using the normal stop button.
2 Turn the main electrical power switch to the OFF position.
3 Locate the red valve on the pneumatic regulator.
4 Push the valve down to the OFF position.
5 Follow your isolation and lockout system (lockout/tagout).

WARNING: Pneumatic pressure is still present even after you disconnect

main power. Residual air may remain in the line. Allow at
least two minutes for air to release from the line.

Enabling the Pneumatic Regulator

Enable To cause to To enable the pneumatic regulator:
operate.
1 If necessary, remove the isolation and lockout system (lockout/tagout).
2 Turn the main electrical power switch to the ON position.
3 Locate the red valve on the pneumatic regulator.
4 Lift the valve up to the ON position. Air is now active in the machine.
5 Rotate the knob on top of the regulator until air pressure is at 60 to 80 PSI
(4.1 to 5.5 BARS).

Figure 2.15 Correct Setting of Pneumatic Regulator

Paragon M 24
 Review Safety Features

Review
The activities in this section will help you master the knowledge and skills
introduced in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review
Questions” starting on page 395.
1 True or False. A safety feature is a specific visual or acoustic guarding and
warning device.
2 Name a safety feature of the multi needle quilting machine.
3 Safety features are designed to protect you from ____________________.
4 The _________________ contains a hazardous voltage area.
5 Test each E-Stop button _________ to verify that it is functioning properly.
Choose one:
a. Daily
b. Weekly
c. Monthly
d. Yearly
6 True or False. A special key is required to open the high voltage area.
7 E-Stop buttons are located ________________________________.
8 Interlock switches are located ______________________________.
9 The correct setting for pneumatic air pressure is between
__________________. Choose one:
a. 40 to 50 PSI
b. 60 to 80 PSI
c. 80 to 90 PSI
d. 90 to 110 PSI
10 True or False. In an emergency situation, press the E-Stop buttons on either
the programmable panel cutter or quilting machine.

25 Quilting Machine
 Safety Features Review

Paragon M 26
 What is Personal Safety? Personal Safety

Personal Safety
3
This chapter details what you need to do to protect yourself and others from
injury while operating, and performing maintenance on the Paragon M series
quilting machines. You must read this chapter before operating or performing
maintenance on the quilting machine. After you review this chapter, read
Appendix D, “Safety and Maintenance Checklist” on page 393, then attach a copy
of this checklist near the machine. Please also ensure compliance with national
safety regulations.

NOTE: It is very important that you read and understand all of the
following instructions before operating the quilting
machine. These instructions are critical to the safe usage of
the machine.

You will learn:

• How to protect yourself and others from injury while using the Paragon M
series quilting machines.
• How to secure your work area.
• How to prepare the Paragon M series quilting machines for operation and
maintenance.
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1 What is personal safety?
2 What are personal safety items?

What is Personal Safety?

Personal safety is the action you take to ensure safe operation and maintenance of
the quilting machine. Only properly trained and authorized employees should
operate or perform maintenance on this machine.
You should be physically able to operate the quilting machine and to quickly Debris An accumulation
of loose material, trash,
reach all emergency stops. It is also important that you are properly dressed.
garbage, litter, or junk.
Further, make sure that your work area is free of debris, has proper clearance, and
that no unauthorized people are close to the machine.

27 Quilting Machine
 Personal Safety Personal Conduct

At the first sign of malfunction or danger, stop the mattress quilter,

and immediately report the problem to a supervisor.

WARNING: Failure to comply with these instructions could cause

serious injury or death.

Personal Conduct
It is important to conduct yourself appropriately when working around the
Paragon M series quilting machines. The following list describes what you should
and should not do while operating or performing maintenance on these
machines.
Horseplay Rough or • Do not indulge in horseplay.
boisterous play;
• Do not walk, climb, sit, stand, or crawl on the quilting machine.
roughhousing.
• Keep hands and other body parts away from all moving parts.
Components An • Keep long hair tied back and secured.
essential group of parts of
• Do not wear loose clothing, neckties, scarves, or jewelry.
a larger piece of
equipment. • Do not touch computer components, except where indicated.

Using Personal Safety Items

Attire Dress; items to “Personal safety items” may be defined as attire specifically designed to protect
cover the body such as
you from injury while the quilting machine is in operation. These items may
clothing, headgear, eye
wear, etc. include safety glasses, footwear, clothing, hearing protection, and particle masks
(dust masks).
The following list describes the personal safety items you must use while
operating the Paragon M series quilting machines.
Metatarsal/Metatarsus • Sturdy, slip-resistant shoes or boots with adequate toe and metatarsal (top of
The top of the foot foot) reinforcement. Do not wear sneakers.
between the ankle and the
• Impact-resistant safety glasses. Do not use tinted lenses. Do not remove
toes.
prescription lenses.
Safety Glasses Impact- • Hearing protection is recommended, if the noise level, once the machine has
resistant eyewear. Lenses been installed, is at or above acceptable levels. Check with your local safety
should be clear; not tinted. authorities or labor department for permissible guidelines.
Hearing Protection A • Due to the nature of the quilting industry, static electricity may be present.
device worn to reduce the Wear appropriate anti-static clothing to reduce static discharge. A fiber
level of sound where content of at least 50% cotton is preferred.
exposure to loud noise is
• Locate and identify fire-fighting equipment. Inspect fire protection systems
expected, such as, ear
and equipment to ensure that they are in place, charged, and ready for use in
plugs, ear muffs, and
hearing bands.

Paragon M 28
 Securing Your Work Area Personal Safety

the event of fire. Check with local authorities regarding approved fire
detection devices for your location.
• Keep all operation and maintenance manuals in a convenient, accessible
location near the machine.

Figure 3.1 Personal Safety Items

Securing Your Work Area

The following list describes what you need to do to secure your work area before
operating or performing maintenance on the Paragon M series quilting machines.

CAUTION: Never operate the quilting machine with unauthorized or

unsupervised personnel in the area.

Always keep your work area clean and dry, clear of all bags, containers, and
bundles.
• Ensure safe clearances for aisles and passageways (minimum distance is 3
feet or 1 meter).
• Keep aisles and passageways clear of obstructions. Obstruction Something
that hinders action or
• Secure all cables and hoses to avoid tripping or entanglement.
progress.
• Locate and read all warning and caution decals. Translated decals are
available upon request.
• Do not leave loose bars, tools, or parts in, on, or near the quilting machine.
• Keep hand tools in a predetermined location when the quilting machine is in
operation.

29 Quilting Machine
 Personal Safety Preparing Your Machine for Operation

Preparing Your Machine for Operation

The following list describes what you must do before operating the Paragon M
series quilting machines.
• Ensure that all guards, guard doors, gates, and panels are in place, closed
and locked.
• Make sure that guards and interlock switches have not been defeated.
• Make sure that hinges and screws on guards, guard doors, gates, and panels
are in place and tightened.
• Ensure your work area is secure. See “Securing Your Work Area” on
page 29.

Preparing Your Machine for Maintenance

The following list describes what you must do before performing maintenance on
the Paragon M series quilting machines.
• Do not attempt to adjust electronic parts. This may void your warranty.
Always contact your Gribetz International service technician.
• Where appropriate, observe proper isolation and lockout procedures.
• Disconnect power from the unit before performing maintenance or before
opening any panels.

WARNING: Service to the electrical system must be performed only by

qualified electrical personnel.

• Do not leave loose bars, tools, or parts in, on, or near the quilting machine.
• Do not service any of the pneumatic components until the unit is relieved of
air pressure. Always wear a mask or turn your face away from the regulator,
when releasing air pressure. Oil, residue, and debris from the floor may
spray with force into the air.
• Do not exceed 30 PSI (2 BARS) when using compressed air for cleaning
purposes.
• Do not use air hose on any body parts or point at another person.

Paragon M 30
 Handling Needles Personal Safety

Handling Needles
We recommend using the needle pliers (part number J5Q1657), which are Needle The primary stitch
forming device used on all
supplied in your tool kit, whenever you handle needles. The following list
sewing machines to carry
describes how to safely handle needles. thread through a seam. See
Figure 10.9, “Parts of a
• When handling needles, always grasp the head of the needle. Avoid contact Needle” on page 256.
with the sharp point.
• Do not lay needles beneath or around the needle bar, or on material. Needle Bar The upright
Damage to presser foot, rear feed roller, material, or other parts of the mechanical bar that holds
quilting machine may result. the needle in the correct
position.
• Do not reuse damaged needles. Dispose of needles in a closable, puncture
resistant container.

Figure 3.2 Needle Safety

31 Quilting Machine
 Personal Safety Review

Review
The activities in this section will help you master the knowledge and skills
introduced in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review
Questions” starting on page 395.
1 To ensure safe operation of your quilting machine you must be
_______________. Choose one:
a. Appropriately attired
b. Fully trained
c. Able to reach all emergency stops
d. All of the above
2 Safety glasses and sturdy shoes or boots protect you from _____________.
3 True or False. Do not allow unauthorized personnel near the machine.
4 True or False. Always keep operations and maintenance manuals near the
machine.
5 True or False. Secure all guards before operation.
6 Locate and read all ___________ and _____________ decals.

Paragon M 32
 What are Paragon M Series Quilting Machines? Machine Overview

Machine Overview
4
This chapter provides you with an overview of the Paragon M series quilting
machines. Upon completing this chapter you should be able to identify the basic
components of the Paragon M series quilting machines, their purpose, and how
the various components function together.
You will learn:
• How to identify the basic components of the Paragon M series quilting
machines.
• About the computer and its software.
• About additional equipment and optional attachments.
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1 What are Paragon M series quilting machines?
2 What is the Point & Sew® software program?

What are Paragon M Series Quilting

Machines?
The Paragon M series quilting machines are fully computerized, high speed,
chain stitch quilting machines. These machines feature our exclusive Point & Sew
software program and can quilt to speeds of 1500 RPM (see Table 4.1, “Evolution
of Gribetz Chain Stitch Series Machines” on page 36 and Table 4.2, “Paragon M
Series Specifications” on page 37).
Our multi-tasking Point & Sew software program dramatically improves Job/Jobs Work order or
product schedule. A job
productivity. You can pre-program the quilting and cutting system with a series
will include a product,
of individual jobs. As jobs progress through the system, the machine the mode, and the
automatically stops and prompts you to make necessary changes. When used in number of panels, to be
sewn for that product.
conjunction with a programmable panel cutter, material changes are
automatically cropped out and panels are spliced and cut to the proper size. This Crop or Crop-Out The
short section of waste
“intelligent” communication between the quilting machine and the material that is cut,
programmable panel cutter facilitates and monitors splicing and crop-out. removed, and discarded,
usually where two
different panel products
meet or material is spliced
together.

33 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview What are Paragon M Series Quilting Machines?

Splice, Splicing To join The Gribetz International patented Batch Mode is a product scheduling system in
together; the act of joining
which the quilting machine is scheduled to produce a group or series of products
together.
in a specific order. With this system you have the ability to create custom
Passcode A word, or a production schedules and reports, enhancing factory automation. You can easily
sequence of letters or
numbers, that allows transfer files by modem or CompactFlash® card to an office computer, where you
access to all, or part of, a can generate custom graphs and production reports. The Point & Sew software
computer’s screen.
program also allows supervisors to restrict access to some or all of the functions
Density A measure of on the Tools menu. Locked tools require the use of a passcode to gain access to
weight per cubic volume,
usually expressed in these restricted areas.
pounds per cubic foot.
Often referred to when
Each multi-needle series is specifically designed with production in mind. It is not
discussing foam. necessary to stop the quilting machine to change speed, length, width, stitch
density, or pattern compensation values. This allows for quick adjustments, to
Timing A procedure to
ensure synchronization of increase productivity. Using a 1x3x6 needle configuration and 12-inch carriage
moving parts. travel, these quilting machines can quilt a variety of Class I-IV pattern designs,
Mattress A including 360-degree Tack & Jump patterns. Our EquistitchTM feature ensures
manufactured product to equal stitch size in all directions. This feature ensures an equal amount of stitches
sleep on, consisting of
various resilient materials regardless of pattern class, especially Tack & Jump and continuous patterns,
covered with an outer thereby reducing overhead consumption of thread.
ticking. Comes from the
Arabic term “matrah” Paragon M series quilting machines are exceptionally suitable for quilting thick
meaning to throw down.
Early Arabs traveled with
and heavy materials such as mattress panels, mattress pads, bedspreads,
their bedding and threw it comforters, sleeping bags, upholstery, furniture, and automotive products.
down on the ground or
Unique looper blocks and holders have been designed to ensure ease of threading
floor at night.
and changeover. The Paragon M series machines feature automatic positioning of
Panel The layers of needle shaft to the proper position for looper timing adjustments. The quilting
material that constitutes
the top or bottom of the machines also feature an automatic lubrication system.
mattress.

Automatic Lubrication
System A mechanism
that works by itself
without direct human
intervention to provide
lubrication as a surface
coating to specific moving
parts. Also called “auto-
lube”.

Figure 4.1 The Paragon M Series Chain Stitch Quilting Machine

Paragon M 34
 What are Paragon M Series Quilting Machines? Machine Overview

History
The e series chain stitch quilting machine was first introduced in 1993 and
included the 4300 e, the 3300 e, and the 2300 e machines. This multi-needle series
was capable of high speed quilting, up to 1200 RPM, and included the
Point & Sew software program.
In 1995, the e series was enhanced to reach speeds of up to 1500 RPM. The e Plus
series included the 4300 e Plus, the 3300 e Plus, and the 2300 e Plus quilting
machines.
In 1996, the e Plus series was further upgraded to the Paragon series. Sensor A device that
receives a signal or a
Modifications included upgrading the sensors, controls, touch screen, and
stimulus (such as heat,
electrical system. The series was capable of high speed quilting, up to 1500 RPM, pressure, light, motion,
and also included the Point & Sew software program. The Paragon series replaced etc.) and responds to it.

both the e and e Plus series quilting machines and included the Paragon 4, the
Paragon 3, and the Paragon 2.
The new Paragon M series was first introduced in 2002. Although the Paragon M Presser Foot A device
that applies pressure to a
series quilting machines have many of the same features as the previous chain
product in manufacturing.
stitch quilters, these new machines are no longer DOS based. The implementation The presser foot on
of Windows CE allows faster processing and smoother graphical interface. Gribetz International
quilting machines
Material processes through the machine faster and jump speed is dramatically compresses material as it is
increased. A smaller, sleeker main electrical and computer cabinet houses the being sewn.

state-of-the-art technology. Mechanical advances were made to the gear box and
binders in the retainer system and the patented automated adjustable presser foot
can now be programmed in a specific position for each individual product.
The 2003 series offers faster product selection, navigation through screens, and
error identification. The new series incorporates seven new system status icons on
the Main Run screen along with newly designed color-coded graphics. These
changes allow for instant recognizable notification of machine and system status.
With the addition of the optional Autoscheduling System (patented), you can
connect multiple machines to a network so that job schedules can be sent from a
centralized point within your company’s infrastructure. The operator no longer
has the responsibility for the production schedule. Needle and material changes
are minimized as the system automatically sorts products according to
similarities in needle setting and materials. The Paragon M series is capable of
high speed quilting, up to 1500 RPM, and includes the Point & Sew software
program. This series will also support the optional Pattern Link® feature
(patented). The Paragon M series includes the Paragon M4, Paragon M3, and
Paragon M2 replacing all previous e, e Plus, and Paragon versions.

35 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview What are Paragon M Series Quilting Machines?

Monitor A computer Table 4.1 Evolution of Gribetz Chain Stitch Series Machines
display similar to a
television screen.
e Plus and Paragon M
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
e Series Paragon Series Series
DOS Disk Operating
System GI-4300 e GI-4300 e Plus and Paragon M4
Paragon 4
LCD Liquid Crystal 70”, 90”, 110”, and 130” 70”, 90”, 110”, and 130” 90”, 110”, and 130” models
Display models models
17-inch CRT color monitor 15-inch CRT color monitor 12” LCD color monitor
DOS-based DOS-based Windows CE
Quilts I-IV patterns Quilts I-IV patterns Quilts I-IV patterns
including intricate 360- including intricate 360- including intricate 360-
degree and Tack & Jump degree and Tack & Jump degree and Tack & Jump
designs designs designs
50 standard Class I-IV 50 standard Class I-IV 50 standard Class I-IV
patterns patterns patterns
Automatic top thread trim Automatic top thread trim Automatic top thread trim
(on Tack & Jump) (on Tack & Jump) (on Tack & Jump)
Optional material Optional material Optional material
handling system handling system handling system

GI-3300 e GI-3300 e Plus and Paragon M3

Paragon 3
70”, 90”, 110”, and 130” 70”, 90”, 110”, and 130” 90”, 110”, and 130” models
models models
17-inch CRT color monitor 15-inch CRT color monitor 12” LCD color monitor
DOS-based DOS-based Windows CE
Quilts I-III patterns Quilts I-III patterns Quilts I-III patterns
including intricate 360- including intricate 360- including intricate 360-
degree designs degree designs degree designs
40 standard Class I-III 40 standard Class I-III 40 standard Class I-III
patterns patterns patterns
Optional material Optional material Optional material
handling system handling system handling system

GI-2300 e GI-2300 e Plus and Paragon M2

Paragon 2
70”, 90”, 110”, and 130” 70”, 90”, 110”, and 130” 90”, 110”, and 130” models
models models
14-inch CRT color monitor 15-inch CRT color monitor 12” LCD color monitor
DOS-based DOS-based Windows CE
Quilts I-II patterns Quilts I-II patterns Quilts I-II patterns
30 standard Class I-II 30 standard Class I-II 30 standard Class I-II
patterns patterns (Class II patterns patterns (Class II patterns
include 180-degree) include 180-degree)
Optional material Optional material Optional material
handling system handling system handling system

Paragon M 36
 What is Point & Sew? Machine Overview

e Plus and Paragon M

e Series Paragon Series Series
e Series machines quilt up e Plus and Paragon series Paragon M series machines
to 1200 RPM machines quilt up to 1500 quilt up to 1500 RPM
RPM

Table 4.2 Paragon M Series Specifications

Stitches Per Inch
Description Specification Refers to the number of
stitches made in one inch
Machine width between 90” (228cm), 110” (280cm), 130” (330cm) of seam, starting at a
first and last needle needle penetration and
measuring the lengths of
Carriage travel 12” (30cm) thread between needle
penetrations.
Sewing speed Up to 1500 RPM (90” models and Class I-II patterns)
Needle Spacing A term
Up to 1200 RPM (110”, 130” models and Class III-IV
that refers to the distance
patterns)
between needles or the
distance between the rows
Stitch sizes 5 to 10 stitches per inch (SPI)
of stitch where more than
Needle spacing 1” (2.5cm) one row of stitch is being
produced simultaneously.
Needle bar spacing 3” between bars (7.6cm)

Number of bars 3

Power requirements Std. 230 V, 3 Ph, 60 Hz

Through a multi-tap isolation transformer (supplied).

What is Point & Sew?

Point & Sew is an interactive software program that allows you to create products
and operate the quilting machine with the touch of a finger. Simple to learn, easy
to operate, and independent of language, the Point & Sew software program
provides interaction through a touch screen interface. Quilting and cutting
processes are controlled by touching icons (pictures) on the screen. For example,
by simply touching a box containing a picture of the pattern, you can adjust
pattern dimensions. This interactive program continually diagnoses all activity,
enabling service technicians to view historical and at-the-moment information.
Service technicians can also view this information by modem. A database
manages specific system files, providing statistics for made-to-order reports and
graphs.

37 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines

Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting

Machines
Catwalk A narrow, The main sections of the Paragon M series quilting machines are identified as the
elevated walkway.
near side, the front, the back (or rear), the far side, and the sewing box.
Input Information put • The near side, also known as the main cabinet side, is where you perform
into a communications computer or data related duties.
system for transmission or
into a data processing • The front is where the material enters the quilting machine (input).
system for processing. • The back is where the material exits the quilting machine (output) and feeds
through to a panel cutter or slitter.
Output Information taken
out of a communications • The sewing box is the central section of the machine where all sewing
system for transmission or activity takes place and is accessed from the front or back.
out of a data processing • The far side is the area farthest away from the main cabinet side.
system for processing.
To clearly identify the front and back of the quilting machine, think of the flow of
fabric through the machine, where input would be the front and output would be
the back (or rear).
Back or Rear (Output)

Front (Input)

Figure 4.2 Machine Orientation (Top View)

Paragon M 38
 Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines Machine Overview

Front of the Paragon M Quilting Machine

The front of the machine is the input side. This area contains the sewing box,
infeed rollers, material trough, and bagger. In front of this area you will also find
a thread rack, catwalk, and material handling pack.
The front section of the sewing box is where you can observe the top of the Butterfly A part of the
machine that takes up
material as it is being sewn. This is where you will change needles and top thread.
thread and gives it to the
Adjustments to the butterfly bar and precompression rollers are also made here. stitch. At the end of the
This section is guarded by a front in-feed guard and a front enclosure guard. stitch, the butterfly
mechanism tightens the
thread with a quick pull
through a toggle motion.

Figure 4.3 Paragon M (Front View)

Near Side of the Paragon M Quilting Machine

When facing the front of the machine, the near side includes the left area of the
sewing box (front or back), an end guard housing mechanical and electrical
components and the multi-tap transformer, and the main cabinet.

WARNING: The main cabinet houses the computer system and circuitry
and controls for the quilting machine. It is a high voltage
area and access is limited to qualified electrical service
personnel only. A key is required to open the hinged door
on the back of the cabinet.

Operator Console and Main Cabinet

In the front of the main cabinet is the operator console. This area includes a
computer monitor and control buttons.
The computer monitor, mounted on the front of the cabinet, is similar to a
television screen where the computer shows or tells you what is happening to

39 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines

the machine. Unlike a television screen, however, you can input information, or
give instructions to the computer by touching icons (pictures) on the screen.

WARNING: Never operate the quilting machine with guard doors open
or removed.

In the rear of the main cabinet is the main electrical power switch, a counter,
modem connection, and communication hub. The main electrical power switch
connects power from the switch to the machine. The counter records the
number of hours the machine has been operating since installation.
The modem connection allows another computer to communicate with the
quilting machine through telephone lines. For more information, see“Modem”
on page 51.

CAUTION: For modem connection, use a dedicated telephone line. Do

not connect additional modems, fax machines, or other lines
with the modem line.

Machine Cabinet
The machine cabinet is located inside the near side end guard. This cabinet
houses the electrical circuitry and controls to the machine.

Figure 4.4 Paragon M (Near Side - Front View)

Paragon M 40
 Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines Machine Overview

Back (Rear) of the Paragon M Quilting Machine

The back of the machine is the output side. This area feeds material from the Eccentric A disk or
wheel with its axis of
quilter to the panel cutter or material windup. The rear section of the sewing box
revolution displaced from
is where you can observe the underside of the material as it is being sewn. This its center so that it is
section is guarded by two sliding doors. E-Stop buttons are located to the left and capable of imparting back
and forth motion.
right of these clear guard doors.
Drive The means or
Rear guard panels, located to the left and right of the sewing box, house the apparatus for transmitting
eccentrics and the main drive assembly. A tool is required to open these hinged motion of a machine or a
machine part.
panels. Access to these areas is for fully trained maintenance personnel only.

WARNING: Never operate the quilting machine with guard doors and
panels open or removed.

Below the sewing box sits the bottom thread rack. This rack can hold up to 90 Bottom Thread Refers to
the under thread in a stitch
spools of thread.
formation, also called the
A pneumatic regulator is located on the leg under the near side end guard. looper thread on chain
stitch machines. Looper
NOTE: The model and serial numbers of your quilting machine are threads feed directly off
the cone or spool into the
found on the back of the near side leg. You need this
sewing machine
information whenever you call our Helpline. eliminating bobbin
changes.

Spool/Cone Threads are

wound on spools or cones
with a precision wind.
Most cones today are made
of plastic that can be
recycled. Industrial sewing
threads are generally
wound on larger cones in
lengths of 6,000 yards,
12,000 yards, or more.

Figure 4.5 Paragon M (Rear View)

41 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Overview of the Paragon M Series Quilting Machines

Far Side of the Paragon M Quilting Machine

To the far right-hand side of the quilting machine is an enclosed cabinet (or end
guard). Access to this area is for fully trained maintenance personnel only. A tool
is required to open these panels.

WARNING: Never operate the quilting machine with guard doors and
panels open or removed.

Figure 4.6 Paragon M (Far Side View)

Paragon M 42
 Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors Machine Overview

Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors

A control switch is a device which requires intervention on the part of the
operator. Control switches include push buttons and selector switches, such as
the emergency stop (E-Stop) button, the control power button, and the main
electrical power switch.
An indicator shows the current status of the machine. Indicators include
illuminated buttons and indicating (pilot) lights. Some examples are: the control
power button, thread detector lights, and the main power light.
A sensor is a device that receives a signal or a stimulus (such as heat, pressure,
light, motion, etc.) and responds to it. Sensors on the Paragon M quilting machine
include the electronic thread detectors and interlock system. For information on
how these sensors work, see “Interlock System” on page 19 and “Thread Sensor
System (Electronic Thread Detectors)” on page 49.
It is important to locate all control switches, indicators, and sensors before
starting the quilting machine. Those found on the Paragon M series machines are:
• Main Electrical Power Switch
• Main Power Indicator Light
• Pneumatic Air Regulator
• Pneumatic Supply Valve
• Control Power Button
• Start Buttons
• Normal Stop and E-Stop Buttons
• Thread Sensor System (optional feature)

43 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors

Main Electrical Power Switch

The main electrical power switch is located on the back of the main cabinet. This
switch supplies all power to the quilting machine, including power to the
computer. For information about how this switch works, see “Electrical
Disconnect Devices” on page 17.
The main electrical power switch and the pneumatic supply valve must be in the
ON position, before the quilting machine will operate.

Figure 4.7 Main Electrical Power Switch

Main Power Indicator Light

When machine power is on, an indicator light located on the side of the main
cabinet illuminates. The light may not illuminate if the bulb is damaged,
defective, or incorrectly installed. If the bulb does not illuminate it will not affect
the operation of the computer. However, it is important to ensure all indicator
lights are functioning at all times. See “Replacing Main Power Indicator Light” on
page 315.

Figure 4.8 Main Power Indicator Light

Paragon M 44
 Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors Machine Overview

Pneumatic Air Regulator

The pneumatic air regulator is located on the back of the machine. It is attached to
the leg under the near side end guard. The regulator controls the flow of air to the
entire quilting machine. For information on how the pneumatic regulator works,
see “Pneumatic Disconnect Devices” on page 18, and “Disabling the Pneumatic
Regulator” and “Enabling the Pneumatic Regulator” on page 24.

Pneumatic Supply Valve

The pneumatic supply valve or disconnect device is located on the pneumatic
regulator, under the near side guard. During installation, a Gribetz International
service technician sets the regulator to the proper air pressure. If air pressure
drops or becomes disconnected, verify that the pneumatic supply valve is on. For
more information, see “Pneumatic Disconnect Devices” and Figure 2.9,
“Pneumatic Regulator and Disconnect Device” on page 18.

Figure 4.9 Pneumatic Supply Valve

45 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors

Control Power Button

A control power button is located below the computer monitor. When the
operator presses this button, the quilting machine becomes ready for normal
operation, provided there are no E-Stops or other machine errors present.

NOTE: An open guard or low air pressure are not machine errors.

If an E-Stop or other machine error is present, the machine will be forced out of
the normal operating mode. After correcting the error, the operator must press
the control power button again to start the machine. The button lights up when
the system is ready. For more information, see “Control Power Button” on
page 46.

NOTE: The control power button may not illuminate if the bulb is
damaged, defective, or incorrectly installed. If the bulb does
not illuminate, it does not affect the operation of the
computer. However, it is important to ensure all indicator
lights are functioning at all times. See “Replacing Control
Power Button Light” on page 322.

Figure 4.10 Control Power Button

Paragon M 46
 Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors Machine Overview

Start Buttons
The start buttons are located on both sides of the sewing box in the front. Start
buttons start the sewing motion of the quilting machine during general operation.

NOTE: The start buttons do not turn on the computer or the main
electrical power.

Figure 4.11 Start Button

47 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors

Normal Stop and E-Stop Buttons

Normal stop buttons are located on both sides of the sewing box in the front and
the rear. Normal stop buttons stop the quilting machine during general operation.
They do not turn off the computer or disconnect electrical power.
Station The place or Emergency stop (E-Stop) buttons are located on both sides of the sewing box in
position where a person or
the front and the rear, and on the front of the main cabinet. Press any one of these
thing is assigned to stand
or operate from, such as an red and yellow buttons to immediately disconnect control power from the
operator console or cutting quilting machine. They do not disconnect main electrical power.
station.

Figure 4.12 Normal Stop Button and Figure 4.13 Normal Stop Button, Start
E-Stop Button (Rear) Button, and E-Stop Button (Front)

Become familiar with the location of all E-Stop buttons before operating the
machine. See also, “Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons” on page 16.

Figure 4.14 E-Stop Locations

Paragon M 48
 Control Switches, Indicators, and Sensors Machine Overview

Thread Sensor System (Electronic Thread

Detectors)
Electronic thread detectors sense the presence of thread. An illuminated detector
indicates that a thread has broken or tension is loose. When this occurs, the
quilting machine stops (power remains on) and idles until threading is corrected.
Depending on the width of your machine, there are 90 to 130 thread detectors
located above the needle bar, one for each needle position. Follow the correct
threading procedures in Chapter 9, “Loading Material.”

NOTE: Carefully monitor these indicator lights.

Figure 4.15 Electronic Thread Detectors

49 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Touch Screen

Touch Screen
Run/Running To control A touch screen is a device, mounted to the face of the computer monitor, that
the functioning of a
allows you to interact with the computer. It is a “touch-sensitive device” on which
machine. To be in action or
operation. you use your hand (or approved pointing tool) to make selections and input
information to the computer that runs the operational software. The built-in
resistive touch screen allows you to select simple menus and icons. With the
touch of a finger, you can select or create products, operate the quilting machine,
save information, and send or receive information through a modem. When you
touch an icon on the screen, it responds and performs the requested action or
takes you to the next screen.

NOTE: If you select an icon by mistake, select the Cancel icon on the
screen that appears. This will take you back to the previous
screen.

There are three types of icons: active, display, and fault. To identify these icons
and their functions, see Appendix C, “Glossary of Icons” on page 369.

Figure 4.16 Touch Screen

Active Icon
An active icon responds to touch. A button is an example of an active icon. You
can use active icons to enter information or open other screens. Most active icons
respond to a single touch (tap and release). Some active icons require a special
touch sequence (tap, tap). Touch (tap) these icons twice.

Display Icon
A display icon shows information and does not respond to touch. Display icons
show the current status of the quilting machine. Some display icons might show
that the quilting machine is in the process of performing a task or that it is waiting
to perform a task. A display icon, such as a text box, might also display product
information.

Paragon M 50
 CompactFlash Disk Drive Machine Overview

Fault Icon
A fault icon identifies an error and requires immediate attention and special
actions. Some of these icons respond to touch. For further information about what
to do when you see a fault icon, see Chapter 12, “Troubleshooting” starting on
page 321.

CompactFlash Disk Drive

Supervisors, advanced operators, and service technicians use the CompactFlash
disk drive to copy, store, and remove product and pattern files from the
computer. The CompactFlash disk drive is located on the bottom of the touch
screen monitor and can be accessed only when the main cabinet door is open.
You can copy information to or from the computer onto the 1 ½” (38mm)
CompactFlash card, which functions similar to a floppy diskette. Insert the card
into the thin, horizontal slot on the disk drive. Use the card release button located
beside the slot to eject the CompactFlash card.

CAUTION: Insert and remove the CompactFlash card only when the
computer is turned OFF. Failure to do so will damage the
card. Only authorized personnel should access the disk
drive or insert and remove the cards.

Modem
All Paragon M quilting machines are supplied with a modem. This electronic
communications device allows another computer to communicate with the
quilting machine through telephone lines. Through the modem you can send and
receive information, such as patterns and software upgrades. The modem also
allows service technicians to view system activity when providing assistance. The
modem connection is located on the back of the main cabinet. For detailed
instructions on how to use your modem, see “Using a Modem” on page 187.

Figure 4.17 Modem Connection

51 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Optional Features

Optional Features
Your quilting machine may include one or all of the following options:
• Thread Sensor System (Electronic Thread Detectors) See “Thread Sensor
System (Electronic Thread Detectors)” on page 49.
• Back Canopy with Motorized Wind-up
• Catwalk with Material Handling Package
• Pattern Link Software
• Autoschedule Software

Back Canopy with Motorized Wind-up

The back canopy attaches to the back of the quilting machine to allow clear access
to the back of the sewing box. The motorized wind-up is mounted on the back
canopy and winds up material as it exits the machine.

Catwalk with Material Handling Package

Clamp A device placed The Catwalk is placed at the front of the quilting machine to allow you safe access
against the side (or sides)
to the front of the sewing box. The Material Handling Package (MHP) contains a
of a material roll to keep
the roll from moving from top thread rack attached to a material stand. The material stand typically holds up
side to side. to three fill materials (you can request additional stations). The MHP allows you
easy access to material for faster re-loading. Clamps provide tension control to
assist in the flow of material through the quilting machine.
The MHP is designed to hold a top thread rack. Depending on the width of the
machine, the top thread rack holds a capacity of 90 to 130 spools of thread.
To obtain more information on optional attachments, contact Gribetz
International Sales Department at (800) 326-4742 or (954) 846-0300.

Paragon M 52
 Optional Features Machine Overview

Pattern Link Software

The Pattern Link software allows you to link multiple Tack & Jump style patterns
within a single product to create unique and contemporary quilted mattress panel
designs similar to single needle designs. Once the pattern is downloaded,
adjustments to size and spacing can be made as necessary.
Through the Pattern Link software, users are able to create three distinctly
different pattern looks - random, centered and zoned patterns.
Random designs use combinations of Tack & Jump patterns to create a repetitive,
all-over pattern similar to a normal Tack & Jump pattern. This type of design may
be cut to any size as the pattern does not have to be centered within a panel.
Centered designs are used to center a particular portion of the pattern within a
single panel. These patterns must be cut to the exact size they are developed for.
Zoned designs are used to create specific "comfort zones" throughout the panel.
Zoned patterns are not only eye-catching, but they also establish different sleep
surfaces across the length of the mattress to suite the needs of the consumer. As
the zoned designs are also centered within a single panel, the patterns must be cut
to the exact size for which they are developed.

Autoschedule Software
The Autoschedule software sorts and schedules similar jobs from one location. By
linking several machines, the software automatically sorts products according to
similarities in needle setting and materials. Then, the job schedules are created
and sent to predetermined machines. The operator no longer has the
responsibility for the production schedule.
To obtain more information on the Pattern Link or Autoschedule software,
contact Gribetz International Sales Department or the Gribetz Pattern
Development and Styling Studio at (800) 326-4742 or (954) 846-0300.

53 Quilting Machine
 Machine Overview Review

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 True or False. The Paragon M series quilting machines are fully
computerized, high speed, chain stitch quilting machines.
2 The sewing box is located ________________________ .
3 Another word for the touch-sensitive device used on the Paragon M series
quilting machines is a ____________________________.
4 True or False. The normal stop buttons are used to turn off the computer.
5 The Paragon M series quilting machines have the ability to sew up to _____
RPM.
6 The near side of the quilting machine is also known as the ____________.
Choose one:
a. Sewing box
b. Material station
c. Main cabinet side
d. Back canopy
7 True or False. Never operate the quilting machine with guard doors and
panels open or removed.
8 True or False. A display (status) icon does not respond to touch.
9 A device which requires _____________ is called a control switch.
10 True or False. The main electrical switch (or lever) connects electrical power
from the switch (or lever) to the machine.

Paragon M 54
 Operating Procedures

Operating Procedures
5
This chapter provides you with quick-start instructions on how to operate the
Paragon M quilting machines. For detailed information, see the recommended
chapters below. After reading this chapter, an operator with prior experience with
Gribetz International multi-needle chain stitch quilting machines should be able
to operate the machine quickly and accurately.
You will learn:
• How to break-in your new machine.
• How to turn on power and activate the quilting machine.
• How to stop the quilting machine in an emergency.
• How to operate the quilting machine for a single product.
• How to operate the quilting machine for multiple products.
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1 How does a multi-needle quilting machine work?
2 What are the operating modes?
The following chapters contain more information about operating the quilting
machine:
For more information about creating products, refer to Chapter 6, “Working with
Patterns and Products”.
For more information about batch mode, refer to Chapter 7, “Working with
Batches”.
For more information about other features, refer to Chapter 9, “Loading Material”
and Chapter 10, “Sewing Adjustments.”
For more information about the Point & Sew software program, refer to Chapter
8, “Utilities.”
For more information about solving problems, refer to Chapter 12,
“Troubleshooting.”

55 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Quick Start for Experienced Operators

Quick Start for Experienced Operators

This page is for experienced operators. For operators new to the Paragon M
quilting machines, please read the remaining sections in this chapter, and
Chapter 6, as they discuss in detail how to operate the quilting machine.
There are only a few simple steps to operating the Paragon M quilting machines.
Before proceeding make sure you read and understand the safety features and
procedures found in Chapter 2, “Safety Features” and Chapter 3, “Personal
Safety.”
1 Make sure you know how to stop the machine in the event of an emergency.
2 Make sure you are familiar with all operating controls of the machine.
3 Apply pneumatic air. Verify that air pressure is between 60 to 80 PSI (4.1-5.5
BARS).
4 Turn on main power to the machine by turning the main electrical power
switch located on the back of the main cabinet to the ON position.

NOTE: If your quilting machine is connected to a panel cutter, you

must turn on the panel cutter before turning on the quilting
Main Run Screen The
primary operations screen
machine.
that appears after the
computer is turned on and
5 The system performs several diagnostic tests and then displays the Main
the system completes the Run screen.
diagnostic tests. You can 6 Press the control power button directly beneath the computer monitor. This
gain access to additional
function screens from the
supplies control power to the system.
screen. 7 Ensure that:
Backing Any fabric or • There are no fault indications present.
sheeting material that is
• The quilting machine is properly connected to the panel cutter, if a panel
used during quilting to
cutter is present.
anchor stitches.
• Needles and loopers are properly threaded.
Product Identification • Top material, fills, and backing levels are sufficient.
Icon • Thread levels are sufficient.
8 If a product is already selected, all product specifications, including stitch
length are set to the desired values.
9 If there is no product selected, select a product to sew by touching the
Start Icon Product Identification icon on the Main Run screen, then select a product.
10 Press a start button to begin sewing.

NOTE: Always observe safe operating practices.

Paragon M 56
 How Does a Multi-Needle Quilting Machine Work? Operating Procedures

How Does a Multi-Needle Quilting Machine

Work?
The purpose of a multi-needle quilting machine is to produce quilted goods in a
variety of designs. Here is how it works:
The control system of the quilting machine receives the required data, either Mode A method or way of
performing a specific task.
through communication of the machine operating in Batch Mode or by manual
entry from the operator.
After the product is selected, the quilting machine is fed layers of unquilted Plate A rolled, thin,
usually rigid sheet of metal
material from a material handling station. These layers are compressed and
with an even surface and
pulled into the sewing area by the feed rollers. Then, the presser foot plate uniform thickness; often
compresses and holds the material in place while the layers are sewn by three part of a mechanism.

linear rows of needles and loopers.

As the material is sewn, the flow of fabric is drawn through the machine to either
a wind-up or a panel cutting attachment, typically a programmable panel cutter.
The interactive program continually diagnoses activity. When operating in Batch
Mode, the machine prompts the operator to make necessary changes, as the jobs
progress through the system.

NOTE: Patterns are defined as drawing files and are created by the
Gribetz International Pattern Development and Styling
Studio. These files are then converted into shape files that
can be read by the Paragon M quilting machine.

Products include all necessary information to manufacture a

finished item, such as the shape file, raw materials (top
material, fills, and backing), panel size, and quilting
machine conditions. For more information, see “Working
with Patterns and Products” on page 75.

57 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Operating Modes

Operating Modes
The Paragon M series quilting machines can operate in two primary modes:
• Single Product Mode
• Batch Mode

NOTE: In batch mode the quilting machine controls the panel

cutter; in single product mode the operator controls the
panel cutter.

Single Product Mode

In Single Product Mode the operator can sew only one selected product at a time.
The quilting machine continues to sew this product until the operator selects
another product or changes to batch mode.
You cannot change the product size or design while in single product mode.
However, the operator can program panel sizes from the panel cutter. For how to
program preset panel sizes, see the instruction manual for your panel cutter.

NOTE: You can also schedule large volumes of a single product as

part of your job schedule using batch mode.

Batch Mode
The patented Batch Mode is used to schedule the quilting machine to operate
multiple products in a specific order. When used correctly, batch mode identifies
each product and informs you when to change materials. The system knows the
proper pattern, material, and panel sizes to be quilted and cut. Crop out of
changes in patterns and material is automatic with the addition of a Gribetz
International programmable panel cutter.

NOTE: The process monitor system is always running whether the

machine is operating in single product mode or in batch
mode. This does not interfere with operating the machine in
single product mode and makes the change to batch mode
quilting quicker and more efficient.

Paragon M 58
 Getting Started Operating Procedures

Getting Started
Before you begin operating the Paragon M quilting machines there are some basic
things you need to know. They are:
• How to break-in a new quilting machine.
• How to stop the quilting machine, especially in an emergency.
• How to turn on main power and activate the quilting machine.
• How to operate the touch screen.

Breaking-In the Paragon M Quilting Machine

As you begin to use your Paragon M quilting machine, it is recommended that
during the first six weeks of operation machine speed is limited to 1000 RPM for
all pattern classes. This allows for a break-in period, and allows for a time period
to observe the machine characteristics with various materials.
Establish a specific and scheduled maintenance program during this time. For
cleaning, lubrication, and general maintenance procedures, refer to Chapter 11,
“General Maintenance.”

Making a Safety Check

Before operating the Paragon M quilting machine, walk around the perimeter and
visually check for obstructions. Make sure that all moving parts are clear and all
surfaces are free of tools, equipment, fabric, and any debris and that there are no
unauthorized people near the machine. Make sure that the pneumatic regulator
and emergency stop (E-Stop) buttons are working correctly. For a more complete
explanation, see Chapter 2, “Safety Features” and Chapter 3, “Personal Safety”.

Turning On Power and Activating the Paragon M

You will need to turn on the air supply, apply electrical power to the machine,
and turn on the computer system.
1 Locate the pneumatic regulator on the back side of the quilting machine and
lift the red lever up to the ON position. Air is now connected to the quilting
machine. Verify air pressure is 60 to 80 PSI (4.1 to 5.5 BARS). Adjust the
regulator as required.

59 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Getting Started

2 Locate the main electrical power switch on the back of the main cabinet.
Rotate the handle clockwise to the ON position. Power turns on, an indicator
light on the main cabinet illuminates, and the computer turns on.

Figure 5.1 Main Power Indicator Light

NOTE: If your quilting machine is connected to a panel cutter, you

must turn on the panel cutter before turning on the main
electrical power switch on the quilting machine. When the
quilting machine is activated, it will communicate with the
panel cutter if one is attached.

3 The system performs several diagnostic tests and then displays the Splash
screen. Diagnostic information is displayed on the Splash screen in a
“progress bar.” The system will check each section of the computer in order.
If an error is present, a red icon appears next to the system icon. If no errors
are present, the progress bar displays a green icon beside each system icon.

Figure 5.2 Splash Screen with No Errors Present

4 If no fault situations are present, the Main Run screen appears.

Paragon M 60
 Getting Started Operating Procedures

5 Press the control power button located directly beneath the computer
monitor. This supplies control power to the system.

Figure 5.3 Applying Control Power to the System

NOTE: If the Idle icon appears on the Main Run screen, touch the
Product Identification icon and select any product. This will
“wake up” the system.

Stopping the Paragon M Using a Normal Stop

To stop the quilting machine temporarily at any time during operation, press any
of the red normal stop buttons located to the left and right of the sewing box in
the front or back of the machine. (See Figure 5.4.)

NOTE: Always use the normal stop button for non-emergency

stops.

Figure 5.4 Stopping the Quilting Machine Using a Normal Stop

61 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Getting Started

Stopping the Paragon M in an Emergency

Before you turn on power to the quilting machine you must know how to stop the
machine, especially in the event of an emergency. (See Chapter 2, “Safety
Features.”)

CAUTION: Do not use this procedure except for an emergency. Any use
of the emergency stop buttons may cause damage to the
quilting machine and materials.

To stop the quilting machine and disconnect all control power due to an
emergency:
1 Press one of the red E-Stop buttons. These buttons are located to the left or
right of the sewing box, on both front and back of the quilting machine and
on the front of the main cabinet.
2 The quilting machine will stop within a few moments and saves the current
position. During this period the computer monitor shows a red screen.
3 Verify that all control power immediately disconnects by pressing any one
of the green start buttons on the machine. (Fluorescent lights remain on.)
4 Turn the main electrical power switch counter-clockwise (OFF) to disconnect
main power from the machine.
5 Keep all guard doors closed until main power and air is removed from the
machine.

WARNING: Pneumatic pressure is still present even after you disconnect

main power. Residual air may remain in the line. Allow at
least two minutes for air to release from the line.

6 Inspect needles, loopers, retainers, trimmers, and other sections for damage.
Correct the problem. If you can’t fix the problem, call a supervisor.

CAUTION: You will need to reboot the machine. Always wait 3-5
minutes, while the machine saves data, before reconnecting
electrical current to the machine or you may corrupt the
database, which may require reloading the entire database
through Gribetz International Service Department.

WARNING: In an emergency situation, pressing the E-Stop buttons on

the programmable panel cutter will stop the quilting
machine in a normal condition; it will not place it in an E-
Stop condition. Before correcting the emergency on the
quilting machine, you must press an E-Stop button on the
quilting machine and disconnect main power.

Paragon M 62
 Getting Started Operating Procedures

Figure 5.5 Stopping the Quilting Machine in an Emergency

Operating the Touch Screen

The touch screen allows you to interact with the computer by selecting options (as
from a menu) by touching an icon on the screen. The system recognizes the
command and acts on the requested information, such as opening another screen.
Each menu screen, or page, is divided by several icons. There are three types of
icons: active, display, and fault. Active icons and some fault icons respond to
touch. Display icons only show information, such as the status of the machine or
product information. To identify icons, see Appendix C, “Glossary of Icons”
starting on page 369.
To operate the touch screen, place your finger on an icon and then release it. Most
active icons respond to a single touch (tap and release). Some active icons require
a special touch sequence (tap, tap). Touch (tap) these icons twice.

NOTE: The touch screen will not operate correctly if it is dirty or

damaged. See “Cleaning the Touch Screen” on page 304.

For additional information on the touch screen interface, see “Touch Screen” on
page 50 and “Touch Screen Problems” on page 328.

63 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

This section discusses how to sew mattress panels in single product mode and in
batch mode. Before operating the machine, read “Preparing Your Machine for
Operation” on page 30, along with Chapters 2-4, as they contain important safety
information.

Verifying Machine Status

The Paragon M quilting machine will start in the operating mode it was in when it
was last used.
To verify the status of the machine:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product Identification icon.

2 The Product Selection screen appears. If the Batch Mode icon is shown, then
the machine is set in single product mode. If the Batch Mode icon is missing,
then the machine is set in batch mode.

The machine is in Single Product Mode. The machine is in Batch Mode.

3 Touch the Check Okay icon. The Main Run screen reappears.

Paragon M 64
 Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine Operating Procedures

Operating the Paragon M in Single Product Mode

Single Product Mode allows the operator to sew only one product at a time. To
sew multiple products, see “Operating the Paragon M in Batch Mode” on page 67.
To operate the Paragon M quilting machine in Single Product Mode you will
select a product and then sew that product. If there are no products created, see
Chapter 6, “Working with Patterns and Products” starting on page 75.

NOTE: The machine will start in the operating mode it was in when
it was last used. See “Verifying Machine Status” on page 64.

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product Identification icon.

2 The Product Selection screen appears.

NOTE: If the Batch Mode icon is shown on the Product Selection

screen, touching a Pattern icon will automatically take the
machine out of batch mode.

3 Select a product by touching the desired Pattern icon.

65 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

4 The Main Run screen appears.

NOTE: Make sure that the number or

name on the first line under the
Product Identification icon matches
the number on the Pattern icon.

Ready Mode A product

is selected, no fault
indications are present, NOTE: When in Single Product Mode the Panel Tracker will be
and the Start icon is shown blank from the quilter to the panel cutter.
on the Main Run screen,
indicating that the 5 The Start icon on the Main Run screen indicates that the machine is ready to
machine is ready to begin
sewing.
begin sewing.

6 Press a start button on the machine.

Move to Start is an event 7 The machine will move to the start position and beginning sewing the
that happens when the selected product.
quilting machine changes
from one pattern to NOTE: If the machine had not finished sewing a scheduled product
another; the carriage it will complete that product before starting the selected
moves to the start position.
The Move to Start icon
product.
appears briefly on the
Main Run screen during
this event.

Paragon M 66
 Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine Operating Procedures

Operating the Paragon M in Batch Mode

Batch Mode allows the operator to schedule multiple products to sew in a specific
order. This automated process organizes the production schedule, greatly
increasing efficiency.
To operate the Paragon M quilting machine in Batch Mode you will select
multiple products and enter them into a production (or job) schedule. If there are
no products created, see Chapter 6, “Working with Patterns and Products”
starting on page 75. For detailed information about creating, deleting, and sewing
job schedules, see Chapter 7, “Working with Batches” starting on page 131.

NOTE: The machine will start in the operating mode it was in when
it was last used. See “Verifying Machine Status” on page 64.

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

2 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen appears. The job schedule page will be
empty if no jobs are currently scheduled.

Jobs Schedule Set Up screen with no Completed Jobs Schedule Set Up screen
products scheduled. with multiple products scheduled.

67 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

3 Touch the Add icon to add a product to the schedule.

4 The Product Selection screen appears. Select a product by touching the

desired Pattern icon.

5 The Jobs Schedule Set Up - Quantity screen appears. Enter the number of cut
panels, or the number of yards (or meters) for wind-up, for this product,
then touch Enter to accept the entry.

6 The Jobs Schedule Set Up - Type of Mode screen appears.

Paragon M 68
 Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine Operating Procedures

7 Touch the icon to enter the type of mode; panel or windup..

Panel Mode icon

Windup Mode icon

8 The Job Schedule screen will reappear with the new product.

9 Add additional products according to your production schedule. Products

are added in the order they are entered. To move or delete products from the
job schedule see, Chapter 7, “Working with Batches” starting on page 131.
10 Once your schedule is complete, touch the Check Okay icon.

69 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

11 The Main Run screen will reappear.

12 Verify that the system is in Batch Mode.

NOTE: From the Main Run screen, touch

the Product Identification icon to access
the Product Selection screen.

If the Batch Mode icon is present, then

touch the Batch Mode icon to place the
machine in Batch Mode.

13 Touch the Check Okay icon. The Main Run screen reappears. The system is
now in Batch Mode and will process the products in the order that they were
listed.

NOTE: Make sure that the number or

name on the first line under the
Product Identification icon matches
the number on the Pattern icon.

Paragon M 70
 Operating the Paragon M Quilting Machine Operating Procedures

14 Verify that machine status is in Batch Mode. See “Verifying Machine Status”
on page 64.

NOTE: When in Batch Mode the Panel Tracker will show panels in
queue to be sewn, the panel being sewn, and panels sewn
that are in queue for the panel cutter.

15 The Start icon on the Main Run screen indicates that the machine is ready to
begin sewing.

16 Press a green start button on the machine.

17 The machine will move to the start position and beginning sewing the
selected product.

NOTE: If the machine had not finished sewing a scheduled product

it will complete that product before starting the selected
product.

18 The machine will sew all the products in the list and will automatically
notify you of material and needle setting changes.

NOTE: When the number of jobs in the schedule is low, the

background of the Product Selection icon changes to from
gray to yellow. When there are no jobs remaining in the
schedule, the icon changes from yellow to red.
See Chapter 7, “Working with Batches” starting on
page 131 for detailed information on Batch Mode.

71 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Turning Off the Paragon M Quilting Machine

Turning Off the Paragon M Quilting Machine

You will need to disconnect main power from the machine whenever you
perform maintenance that requires lockout and tagout procedures. You may also
be required to disconnect main power at the end of your shift.
To disconnect main power:
1 Start with the Main Run screen showing on the monitor.
2 Make sure the machine is not sewing, then press any E-Stop button.
3 To disconnect all power from the machine, rotate the main electrical power
switch, located on the back of the main cabinet, counter-clockwise to the OFF
position.

NOTE: The international symbol I indicates ON; O indicates OFF.

4 Main power disconnects.

CAUTION: The computer will maintain power long enough to save

data. The Main Run screen remains on the monitor while the
computer performs diagnostic tests and saves data, then the
screen will go blank.

WARNING: The main electrical power switch connects electrical power

from the switch to the machine. Electrical power is still
connected from the electrical source to the switch.

Paragon M 72
 Review Operating Procedures

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 To stop the quilting machine in an emergency press any of the _______
buttons.
2 When breaking in the machine, keep the machine speed below _________
a. 1500
b. 1000
c. 800
d. 500
3 The two operating modes are ________ ________ and ________.
4 True or False. If your quilting machine is connected to a panel cutter, turn
the panel cutter on first.
5 Press the _______ button to start sewing.
6 Operating multiple products in a specific order is called _________ Mode.
7 You cannot change the product size or design when operating in _________
___________ Mode.
8 True or False. If the machine loses power, the computer will not save the
current position.
9 The term ________ _______ refers to multiple panels of the same product.
10 When you see the Idle icon you must ______________________________.
a. wake up the system
b. touch the Idle icon to continue
c. touch the Batch Mode icon to enter Batch Mode
d. record the time
11 When activating the computer, the progress bar on the Splash screen will
indicate what the error is by ________________________________.
12 A ______ icon on the Splash screen indicates that area of the system is
functioning correctly.
13 A method or way of performing a specific task is called a ___________.
14 True or False. “Move to start” is an event that happens when the quilting
machine changes from one pattern to another; the carriage moves to the start
position.
15 To stop the quilting machine temporarily at any time during operation,
press any of the _______ _______ _______ located to the left and right of the
sewing box in the front or back.
16 True or False. To disconnect power from the computer, first stop the
machine, then rotate the main electrical power switch clockwise to the OFF
position.

73 Quilting Machine
 Operating Procedures Review

Paragon M 74
 What is a Pattern? Working with Patterns
and Products

Working with Patterns and

6
Products
This chapter discusses the basic concepts of planning and creating products. After
reading this chapter, you should be able to create a product in about 15 minutes.
You will learn:
• About the different classes of patterns.
• How to create a product.
• How to edit a product.
• How to clone a product.
• How to delete a product.
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
1 What is a pattern?
2 What is a product?
3 What is a railroad pattern?

What is a Pattern?
“Patterns” are defined as drawing files. These files are then converted into shape
files that can be read by the Paragon M quilting machine. Pattern shape files are
stored as “ordered drawing elements” files, which have the file extension ODE
(such as STARBURST.ODE or 206.ODE). All patterns are created by the Gribetz
International Pattern Development and Styling Studio. The Paragon M series
quilting machines can sew a variety of pattern classes:

Class I Class II Class III Class IV

55-degree angle 90-degree angle 360-degree angle 360-degree angle

Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous

Railroad Railroad Tack & Jump

In continuous patterns, the top and bottom threads never disconnect (except Thread Break Caused by
a number of variables.
during a thread break). The needles sew continually. Depending on the Class,
See Chapter 12,
these patterns can sew angles from 55- to 360-degrees. “Troubleshooting”.

75 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns What is a Pattern?
and Products

The Class IV Tack & Jump pattern (patented) allows you to create independent or
segmented designs. After each segment of the pattern is sewn, the needles lift and
the machine advances to the next segment. During this time the top thread is
trimmed. Class IV Tack & Jump patterns are typically used on the finer products.
Railroad Pattern A The railroad pattern is a distinctive pattern which allows the operator to achieve
distinctive pattern used for
similar results of certain Class I and Class II patterns. These “railroad” patterns
reducing materials and
production time. are typically used to save production time and materials. In Figure 6.1, “Standard
Class Pattern and Railroad Pattern”, the panel on the left shows a typical Class I
pattern. The panel on the right shows similar results using the railroad version of
the same pattern. Notice the use of less material.

Cross-cut
Cross-cut

Slitter Slitter
cut cut

Cross-cut
Cross-cut
Class I, Pattern 206-1 Direction of material Class I, Pattern 206-RR
through machine (railroad)

Figure 6.1 Standard Class Pattern and Railroad Pattern

The Paragon M quilting machine is programmed with 30 to 50 standard patterns:

• 20 Class I designs in three sizes, plus the railroad version, where applicable.
(All machines.)
• 10 Class II designs in three sizes, plus the railroad version, where applicable.
(All machines.)
• 10 Class III designs (Paragon M3 and M4 machines.)
• 10 Class IV designs (Paragon M4 machines.)
Load/Download Additional pattern files can be loaded by modem or through CompactFlash card.
Computing transfer (data)
See “Using a Modem” on page 187 and “Copying Information from a
from one storage device or
system to another CompactFlash Card” on page 193.
(especially a remote one).
The Gribetz International Pattern Development and Styling Studio is available to
assist you with any questions you may have about pattern development, a
specific pattern, or custom designs. For more information, call 1-954-846-0300.

Paragon M 76
 What is a Product? Working with Patterns
and Products

What is a Product?
“Products” include all necessary information to manufacture a finished item: pattern
shape file, pattern dimensions, raw materials (top, backing and fill materials),
panel size, machine speed, stitches per inch, plus additional information specific
to Tack & Jump patterns. Products are created at your site by a designated person
in a centralized location and then downloaded to each machine, or created
directly on the machine by the operator.

Continuous products are Tack & Jump products are Pattern Link products are
shown with a white shown with a blue shown with a pink
background. background. background.

Figure 6.2 Types of Products

Getting Started
Before beginning the following sections, review Appendix C, “Glossary of Icons”
and Chapter B, “Glossary of Screens”, particularly the following screens:
• Main Run Screen (Figure B.2 on page B-351.)
• Product Information Screens (Figure B.11 through Figure B.13 starting on
page B-354.)
• Product Entry Screens (Figure B.11 through Figure B.34 starting on
page B-354.)

Loading Patterns
You should already have patterns loaded into the machine. If you require
additional patterns, you or a service technician, will need to load these. Follow the
instructions in “Using a Modem” on page 187, “Copying Information from a
CompactFlash Card” on page 193, and “Copying Information to a CompactFlash
Card” on page 195 carefully, or fault situations may occur.

CAUTION: Patterns with the same name will be overwritten.

77 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Creating a Product
and Products

Creating a Product
Field/Fields Specific To create a product you will complete a lengthy sequence of screens by entering
information areas typically
information into “fields”. Table 6.1, “Product Information - Creating a Product”
associated with a database.
In the Point & Sew system, on page 90 describes each field in detail. You will need the Class I - IV Multi-needle
these areas are displayed Pattern Design Manual (part number J513169045).
on the screen for
information, data entry, Gather the information you will need to create the product:
and selection.

Tick/Ticking A strong, 1 Decide what type of design you will create. If the ticking is busy and
tightly woven fabric used detailed, the quilt design should be simple and clean.
to make pillow and
mattress coverings. A 2 Choose a pattern shape file that will work with the design.
decorative or finished top
material. NOTE: For more information on choosing the perfect quilt pattern,
see the Gribetz International Pattern Development and
Styling Studio book: Pattern Design Collections.

3 Decide on a name for the product. You can use up to 15 characters.

CAUTION: Each product must have a unique identification name. The

system will not allow you to overwrite an existing file with
the same name. However, the product description can be
different.

4 Determine the needle setting according to the pattern selection. This

information is found in the Class I - IV Multi-needle Pattern Design Manual.
5 Decide what type of materials you will use: top (ticking), bottom, and fill
materials.
6 Decide how the fill materials will be layered.
7 Decide if you will be cutting panels or winding up a continuous quilted roll.
8 If the product will be cut into panels, decide the width and length of the
panel.
9 Write your product components on a piece of paper.

NOTE: The following steps show you how to create a continuous or

Tack & Jump product. The additional steps (w-z) needed to
create a Tack & Jump product are shown at the end of the
sequence. Pattern link products are created only by Gribetz
International Pattern Development and Styling Studio.

Paragon M 78
 Creating a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

To create a product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

NOTE: If the screen displays a pattern link product (shown with a pink background),
the Add, Delete, and Clone icons will not be present. You must display a continuous or
Tack & Jump product to view the Add, Delete, and Clone icons. Touch the Arrow icons
to scroll up or down to locate any continuous or Tack & Jump product.

3 Touch the Add icon. Current Product The

product currently selected
to be sewn, or that is being
sewn.

NOTE: You can modify the current

product shown on the screen or create a
new product. When creating a new
product the current information on this
screen does not have any affect on the
new product being created; you will
select your pattern ODE during the
product entry sequence. The Product
Identification screen will not change to
show the new information until the
entire product entry sequence has been
completed.

79 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Creating a Product
and Products

4 After touching the Add icon, the first of a sequence of screens appears.

CAUTION: Once you enter the product

entry screen sequence there is no “back”
button to return to the previous screen.
You must cancel the sequence and start
over.

5 Complete the fields on each screen as shown. After entering the required
information, touch Enter to move to the next screen. Each screen will come
up in order.

NOTE: To have the system stop automatically for material changes, make sure to
complete these fields: pattern, top and backing material, and any fill materials.

a. Enter the product

identification name, up to 15
characters.

Remember, each product

must have a unique
identification name.
NOTE: The second field on each screen
will show the current product
information and has no impact on the
product you are creating.

b. Enter the product description,

up to 30 characters.

Paragon M 80
 Creating a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

c. Select unit of measurement.

English

Metric

d. Select pattern type:

C for Continuous

T for Tack & Jump

e. Select the Pattern icon.

To search for the Pattern icon,

use the Arrow icons to scroll
to the previous or next rows
or touch the Search icon and
enter the Pattern number or
name.
NOTE: Pattern icons are listed in
numeric, then alphabetic order.

81 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Creating a Product
and Products

f. Enter the pattern length.

g. Enter the pattern width.

h. Enter machine speed for this

product. Up to 1200 RPM for
Class IV, Tack & Jump, and
Pattern Link products and up
to 1500 RPM for Class I-III
products.

Paragon M 82
 Creating a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

i. Select presser foot postion.

Presser foot to HIGH.

Presser foot to LOW.

NOTE: The adjustable presser foot is

automatically set to HI for all products, if
you want this product to be set to LOW
you must touch the Presser Foot icon to
toggle to the LOW position.

j. Enter the number of stitches

per inch, from 5-10.

k. Enter the needle setting

setting code.
NOTE: You must enter the needle setting
code for the pattern you selected. This
information is found in the Class I - IV
Multi-needle Pattern Design Manual.

83 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Creating a Product
and Products

l. If needed, adjust pattern

compensation in the feed
direction by entering a
number value. The system
accepts + or - numbers in 5%
intervals.

Touch Enter if no adjustment

is needed.

m. If needed, adjust pattern

compensation in the carriage
direction by entering a
number value. The system
accepts + or - numbers in 5%
intervals.

Touch Enter if no adjustment

is needed.

n. Enter the panel length.

o. Enter the panel width.

Paragon M 84
 Creating a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

p. Enter the name of the top

(ticking) material, up to 15
characters.

q. Enter the name of the fill

material, up to 15 characters,
for station #1.

This fill material will be

layered below the top
material.

Enter the remaining fill

materials in order from top to
bottom. If no fill material will
be used in a position, then
press Enter to continue.

r. Enter the name of the fill

material, up to 15 characters,
for station #2.

This fill material will be

layered below fill #1.

s. Enter the name of the fill

material, up to 15 characters,
for station #3.

This fill material will be

layered below fill #2.

85 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Creating a Product
and Products

t. Enter the name of the fill

material, up to 15 characters,
for station #4.

This fill material will be

layered below fill #3.

u. Enter the name of the fill

material, up to 15 characters,
for station #5.

This fill material will be

layered below fill #4.

v. Enter the name of the fill

material, up to 15 characters,
for station #6.

This fill material will be

layered below fill #5.

w. Enter the name of the backing

material, up to 15 characters.

Paragon M 86
 Creating a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

6 If you are creating a continuous pattern, the final screen will appear. From
this screen, you can continue to create additional products or use the Arrow
icons to scroll through and select products to delete or clone.

7 When you are finished, touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product
Information screen and return to the Main Run screen.

87 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Creating a Product
and Products

8 If you are creating a Tack & Jump pattern, complete the remaining screens.

x. Enter the tail length, from

0.50 to 1.50 (typically 0.75 to
1.0) to indicate the amount of
thread to remain in the needle
after a tack is sewn. This does
not indicate the length of
thread left on the panel.

NOTE: Do not set the length to 0. A zero

indicates that no thread remains in the
needle and may activate the thread break
detectors.

y. Enter the number of tacks for

backtacking, from 0-7
(typically 4 or 5), to be sewn
at the start and end of the
product.

NOTE: Backtacking refers to the reverse

feed sewing at the beginning or ending of
the seam to prevent the thread from
unraveling.

Paragon M 88
 Creating a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

z. Enter a value from 0-10. For

lighter materials enter 0-5;
thicker materials may require
a higher number, such as 6 or
7.

aa. Enter the length of the jump

from the pattern end to the
start of the pattern repeat.

9 When all screens are completed, the final screen will appear.

10 From the final Product Information screen, you can continue to create
additional products or use the Arrow icons to scroll through and select
products to delete or clone.
11 When you are finished, touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product
Information screen, the Wait icon flashes briefly, then the Main Run screen
appears.

NOTE: The Main Run screen will display the current product in the job schedule. It will
not show the newly created product until it has been added to the job schedule.

89 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Creating a Product
and Products

Table 6.1 Product Information - Creating a Product

Field Product Information

Product ID Product Identification. Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters to
uniquely identify the product. You must complete this field.

Description Product Description. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters to

describe the product. Optional field.

Units Touch the Units-English icon to enter measurement in English or

the Units-Metric icon to enter measurement in Metric. You must
complete this field.

Type Type of pattern repeat. Enter C for Continuous, T for Tack & Jump.
You must complete this field. Pattern Link patterns are shown as S.

Pattern Name of pattern shape file (.ODE). This field contains a menu.
Touch the Arrow icons to scroll through the menu and select a
pattern. You must complete this field.

Length Length of one pattern repeat. Enter measurement in English or

Metric. You must complete this field.

Width Width of one pattern repeat. Enter measurement in English or

Metric. You must complete this field.

Quilting Operating speed of the quilting machine for this product (in
Machine Speed stitches per minute). You must complete this field.

Stitch Density Stitch length. For English: Enter the number of stitches per inch.
For Metric: Enter the millimeters per stitch. You must complete
this field.

Needle Spacing Needle Setting Code for a product. You must complete this field.
See the Class I - IV Multi-needle Pattern Design Manual for this
information.

Feed Amount of pattern compensation in feed direction.

Compensation Default is 0. Optional field.

Carriage Amount of pattern compensation in carriage direction.

Compensation Default is 0. Optional field.

Panel Length Length of panel for the product. Enter measurement in English or
Metric (inches or centimeters).

Panel Width Width of panel for the product. Enter measurement in English or
Metric (inches or centimeters).

Top Material Description of top material (ticking) for the product. You must
complete this field.

Fill Stations Description of fill materials for the product at each fill station. You
1-6 must complete all fields for fill stations with materials. Touch
Enter for stations with no fill material.

Paragon M 90
 Creating a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

Field Product Information

Backing Description of backing material for the product. You must
Material complete this field.

Tail Length Tail length of top thread, cut during jump. Values from 0.5 - 1.5
(1.27 - 3.8cm). Complete this field for Tack & Jump products only.

Tacks Number of tack stitches at the beginning and end of a pattern

repeat. Typical number is 4 stitches. Complete this field for Tack &
Jump products only.

Tack Type Type of tack for the product. This is a future feature.

Tack Modify Tack modification for the product. Values are from 0-10. Use 0-5
for thinner materials; 6 or 7 for thicker materials. Complete this
field for Tack & Jump products only.

Feed Jump Distance for feed jump between each pattern repeat.
Complete this field for Tack & Jump products only.

Carriage Jump Distance for carriage jump between each pattern repeat.
Complete this field for Pattern Linking products only.

91 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Searching for a Completed Product
and Products

Searching for a Completed Product

Whenever you want to edit, clone, or delete a product you will need to locate and
select it in the product database. You cannot clone a Pattern Link product.
To search for a product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Search for the product by using the Arrow or Search icons.

Touch the Arrow icons to scroll To narrow your search, touch the Search icon to
through the selection of products. access the Search screen and enter the product
identification name or number.

Paragon M 92
 Searching for a Completed Product Working with Patterns
and Products

4 From the Search screen, enter the first few letters or numbers of the product,
or the entire known name. Then, touch Enter.

5 The system will search for the closest match to the product name or number,
then the Product Information screen appears. If you entered a partial name
or number, the screen will display the first of a list of similarly named
products. This may not be the searched-for product, but will narrow your
search. Use the Arrow icons to scroll through the database until you locate
the product.

NOTE: Products are listed in numeric,

then alphabetic order.

6 Once you have located the correct product, you can edit, delete, or clone the
product or continue to search for other products.
7 When you are finished, touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product
Information screen, the Wait icon flashes briefly, then the Main Run screen
appears.

NOTE: The Main Run screen will display the current product in the job schedule. You
must add the searched for product in the job schedule before you can sew it.

93 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Editing a Product
and Products

Editing a Product
Feed Compensation A Some products may require modifications. This may be due to a change in panel
feature that corrects
size or materials. You may also want to adjust speed as your skill level increases.
pattern distortion in the
feed direction (top to You can modify or edit individual elements from the Product Information screen.
bottom). For pattern modifications, such as feed and carriage compensation, see Chapter
Carriage 10, “Sewing Adjustments.”
Compensation A
feature that corrects To edit a product:
pattern distortion in the
carriage direction (side to 1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.
side).

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Search for the product to edit.

NOTE: The Product Information screen displays the current product. To search for the
product to edit, see “Searching for a Completed Product” on page 92.

Paragon M 94
 Editing a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

4 Touch the icon that represents the element you wish to edit. The Product
Entry screen for that icon will appear. Enter the new information, then touch
Enter.

For Example:
Touch the Machine Speed icon to change
the machine speed from 800 RPM to 1000
RPM for this product only.

CAUTION: You must enter a value. Do not enter 0 or leave the field
empty. There is no default. Touching Enter after entering 0,
or leaving the field empty, may cause a system error.

5 The Product Identification screen appears with the Copy to Card icon.

NOTE: The Copy to Card icon appears

on the screen after the first edit.

6 Continue editing each item as needed.

7 When you are finished editing, touch the Copy to Card icon to save all edits
made to the product. The Copy to Card icon disappears to identify that all
changes were accepted.

CAUTION: You must select the Copy to Card icon before scrolling up or
down, or exiting the current Product Identification screen. If
you do not, the changes will not be saved.

95 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Cloning a Product
and Products

8 Continue to edit the product, clone the product, or search for additional
products.
9 When all screens are completed, touch the Check Okay icon to close the
Product Information screen, the Wait icon flashes briefly, then the Main Run
screen appears.

WARNING: The Main Run screen will display the current product in the
job schedule. If the edited product is part of the current job
schedule, it will not sew with the updated information and
may cause a serious system malfunction. You must delete
the job and enter the updated job

Cloning a Product
The cloning feature reduces time when adding a product to the product database.
Many products may require only minimal changes to an existing product. You
can duplicate an existing product, rename the product, then change only the
information required.

CAUTION: Cloning does not copy the product identification or

description. You must enter a new product identification
name and description for the cloned product.
Remember, each product must have a unique identifier. The
system will not allow you to overwrite an existing file with
the same name.

To clone a product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

Paragon M 96
 Cloning a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Search for the product to clone.

NOTE: The Product Information screen displays the current product. To search for the
product to clone, see “Searching for a Completed Product” on page 92.

4 Once you have located the product to clone, select the Clone icon.

NOTE: You must select the clone icon

before proceeding.

97 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Cloning a Product
and Products

5 The Product Entry - Product Identification screen, appears.

6 Enter the new product identification, then touch Enter.

7 The Product Entry - Description screen, appears.

8 Enter the new description, then touch Enter.

9 The Product Identification screen appears with the new product.

NOTE: The Copy to Card icon appears

on the screen after the first edit.

Paragon M 98
 Cloning a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

10 Touch the icon that represents the element you wish to modify. The Product
Entry screen for that icon will appear. For how to modify and make changes
to a product, see “Editing a Product” on page 94.

NOTE: Change only the elements that are necessary to create a new product. It is not
necessary to modify each element.

11 Continue modifying elements as needed.

12 When you are finished editing, touch the Copy to Card icon to save all edits
made to the product. The Copy to Card icon disappears to identify that all
changes were accepted.

CAUTION: You must select the Copy to Card icon before scrolling up or
down, or exiting the current Product Identification screen. If
you do not, the changes will not be saved.

13 Continue to modify the product, clone this product, or search for additional
products to clone.
14 When all screens are completed, touch the Check Okay icon to close the
Product Information screen, the Wait icon flashes briefly, then the Main Run
screen appears.

NOTE: The Main Run screen will display the current product in the job schedule. You
must add the cloned product in the job schedule before you can sew it.

99 Quilting Machine
 Working with Patterns Deleting a Product
and Products

Deleting a Product
There may be times when you no longer need a product or you may have created
a product in error. To keep your database clean, and to save disk space, always
delete obsolete products.

CAUTION: Always delete products from job schedules before deleting

from the database. Make sure to delete the product from
ALL job schedules, including backup files. If you do not,
should you run a job schedule that includes the deleted
product, a serious system malfunction will occur.

To delete a product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

Paragon M 100
 Deleting a Product Working with Patterns
and Products

3 Search for the product to delete.

NOTE: The Product Information screen displays the current product. To search for the
product to delete, see “Searching for a Completed Product” on page 92.

4 With the selected product displayed on the Product Information screen,

touch the Delete icon.

5 A pop-up screen will appear. Touch the Check Okay icon.

6 The system deletes the product and returns to the Product Identification
screen.
7 Continue to search for and delete products, or create or clone new products.
8 When you are finished, touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product
Information screen, the Wait icon flashes briefly, then the Main Run screen
appears.

NOTE: The Main Run screen will display the current product in the job schedule.

101 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Sewing in Single Product Mode
and Products

Sewing in Single Product Mode

The Paragon M series machines have the capability of inserting a single product
into a job schedule. However, there may be times when you simply want to sew a
single product separate from batch mode. To sew a single product see the
following sections:
• “Single Product Mode” on page 58.
• “Verifying Machine Status” on page 64.
• “Operating the Paragon M in Single Product Mode” on page 65.
For information on how to insert a product into a job schedule or how to sew
multiple products using batch mode, see Chapter 6, “Working with Batches.”

Working with Pattern Link Products

The Pattern Development and Styling Studio creates the distinctive design for all
of the initial Paragon M series Pattern Link products loaded in the machine. After
training, these specialized products can be modified or cloned by the operator.
Step/Steps A product A Pattern Link product will have multiple patterns, each with its own size,
within a Pattern Link
position, and details within its structure. Each of these is called “Steps”. View the
product.
steps in a Pattern Link product from the Product Information screen.
A Pattern Link defines a
panel.

Figure 6.3 Identifying Pattern Link Steps

Paragon M 102
 Working with Pattern Link Products Working with Patterns
and Products

Modifications made to stitches per inch, panel size, and top, fill, and backing
materials are product based.

Figure 6.4 Modifying a Pattern Link Product

Modifications made to tail length, number of tacks, tack type, speed, carriage
start, carriage jump, feed jump, and number of step repeats, must be entered for
each individual step. For example, if the carriage jump for step 2 of 5 and step 5 of
5 is 9, when you change the carriage jump on step 5 from 9 to 12, the carriage
jump for step 2 will remain 9.

Figure 6.5 Modifying Pattern Link Steps

103 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Working with Pattern Link Products
and Products

The Product Identification screen for Pattern Link products contains six
additional icons. See also the note after Table 6.2.
Table 6.2 Pattern Link Icons

tail length Touch this icon to enter the length of the thread that will remain in
the needle after the thread is trimmed for this step only. (Typically
0.90.)
NOTE: The length of the thread is from the needle and not the
thread remaining on the panel.

number of Touch this icon to enter the number of tacks for this step only.
tacks (Typically 4 or 5.)

tack type Display icon. Future feature. Product Entry Tack & Jump, Product
and Entry Pattern Link.

feed jump Touch this icon to set the number of inches (centimeters) for the
jump in the feed direction for this step only. This function is “step”
specific.

number of steps This is a display only icon. It shows the total number of steps of the
Pattern Link product currently being viewed. This example shows
the second of five steps.

number of Touch this icon to enter the number of repeats for this step only.
repeats

pre jump Touch this icon to pre-jump into the panel to place the “linked
pattern” within the boundaries of the desired panel size.

When a Pattern Link product is selected, the quilter will “jump”

the distance defined in the Pre Jump field when the start button is
pressed. This allows the machine to sew on materials that have no
sewing on them.

Paragon M 104
 Working with Pattern Link Products Working with Patterns
and Products

carriage start Touch this icon to set the carriage start position for this step only.

carriage jump Touch this icon to set the number of inches (centimeters) for the
jump in the carriage direction (side- to-side) for this step only. A
negative number indicates that the carriage will jump to the left; a
positive number indicates that the carriage will jump to the right.

post jump Touch this icon to post-jump out of the panel to place the “linked
pattern” within the boundaries of the desired panel size.

At the end of sewing a Pattern Link product, the quilter will

“jump” the distance defined in the Post Jump field. This allows the
machine to sew on materials that have no sewing on them from the
Pattern Link product that was just sewn.

NOTE: Proper use of the pre- and post-jump icons allows you to design
Pattern Link products that are “panel-centric”. Meaning, the
patterns are sewn within the boundaries

Modifying a Pattern Link Product Panel-centric Patterns

are sewn within the
Whenever you use a Pattern Link product in Batch Mode, you will need to enter boundaries of the desired
panel size.
the panel width and length, and the top, fill, and backing materials.

CAUTION: Any modification to a Pattern Link product, or any product,

will overwrite the original product.

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

105 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Working with Pattern Link Products
and Products

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Search for the Pattern Link product to modify.

NOTE: To search for the Pattern Link product to modify, see “Searching for a
Completed Product” on page 92.

4 Touch the Panel Width icon. A keypad pop-up for that icon will appear.

5 Enter the panel width, then touch Enter.

NOTE: The minimum value allowed is 54.0 in this example.

Paragon M 106
 Working with Pattern Link Products Working with Patterns
and Products

6 The Product Identification screen appears with the Copy to Card icon.

NOTE: The Copy to Card icon appears

on the screen after the first modification.

7 Continue entering panel length and top, fill, and backing materials.
8 Change any other parameter as required.
9 When you are finished, touch the Copy to Card icon to save all modifications
made to the product. The Copy to Card icon disappears to identify that all
changes were accepted. All steps are updated to reflect the new information.

CAUTION: You must select the Copy to Card icon before scrolling up or
down, or exiting the current Product Identification screen. If
you do not, the changes will not be saved.

10 Touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product Information screen and
return to the Main Run screen.

107 Quilting Machine

 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

Practice Exercises
The following exercises are presented to help you become familiar with working
with patterns and products. If you have any questions, refer back to the step-by-
step detailed directions earlier in this chapter.
You will learn how to:
• create a continuous product
• create a Tack & Jump product
• search for a product
• edit a product
• clone a product
• delete a product
• modify a Pattern Link product

NOTE: All exercises are in English measurements.

109 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

Practice Exercise #1: Creating a Continuous

Product (Slumber Swan)
For this exercise, we will be creating a simple Class I design. First, gather the
information you will need to create the product:
1 From the Class I - IV Multi-needle Pattern Design Manual select the pattern
ODE file 340-3.
2 We will name the product identification as Slumber Swan and the
description as Slumber Swan 2002.
3 According to our book the needle setting for the pattern selection is 3x3-3.
4 Our book also tells us that the pattern length is 12 and the width is 3.
5 For our materials we will use:
• WhiteSS-2578 for the ticking
• 1/4” Fiber, 3/4” Foam, and Poly5 for the fills
• Basic for the backing material
6 We will layer the fill materials in the following order:
• WhiteSS-2578 in top material station
• 1/4” Fiber in station #1
• 3/4” Foam in station #2
• Poly5 in station #3
• Basic in bottom material station
7 We will be creating panels cut to queen size: width 80” and length 60”.
To create the Slumber Swan Class I Continuous product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

Paragon M 110
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

2 The Product Information screen appears. Touch the Add icon.

3 The first Product Entry screen appears.

NOTE: Once you enter the product entry

screen sequence there is no Back button
to return to the previous screen. You
must cancel the sequence and start over.

4 Continue with the following Product Entry screens:

a. Touch SLUMBER SWAN for the product identification, then touch
Enter to move to the next screen.
b. Touch SLUMBER SWAN 2002 for the product description, then touch
Enter.
c. Select English for the unit of measurement.
d. Touch C for pattern type, then touch Enter.
e. Select the 340 Pattern icon.
f. Touch 12 for the pattern length, then touch Enter.
g. Touch 3 for the pattern width, then touch Enter.
h. Touch 800 for the machine speed, then touch Enter.
i. Touch 7 for stitches per inch, then touch Enter.
j. Enter the needle setting code 3x3-3, then touch Enter.
k. Touch Enter for both Carriage and Feed compensation screens, no
adjustment is needed.

111 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

l. Touch 60 for the panel length, then touch Enter.

m. Touch 80 for the panel width, then touch Enter.
n. Touch WHITESS-2578 for the top (ticking) material, then touch Enter.
o. Touch 1/4 FIBER for the name of the fill material for station #1, then
touch Enter.
p. Touch 3/4 FOAM for the name of the fill material for station #2, then
touch Enter.
q. Touch POLY5 for the name of the fill material for station #3, then touch
Enter.
r. Touch Enter for Stations 4, 5, and 6, no additional fill is needed.
s. Touch BASIC for the backing material, then touch Enter.
t. The final screen appears showing the completed product.

Figure 6.6 Practice Exercise #1 - Completed Slumber Swan Product

5 Touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product Information screen and
return to the Main Run screen.

Paragon M 112
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

Practice Exercise #2: Creating a Tack & Jump

Product (Starry Night)
For this exercise, we will be creating a Class IV Tack & Jump design. First, gather
the information you will need to create the product:
1 From the Class I - IV Multi-needle Pattern Design Manual select the pattern
ODE design 4STAR.
2 We will name the product identification as Starry Night and the description
as SN 2002 Blue Diamond.
3 According to our book the needle setting for the pattern selection is sx6-3.
4 Our book also tells us that the pattern length is 8 and the width is 8.
5 For our materials we will use:
• Powder Blue for the ticking
• Wool, 1/4” Fiber, 3/4” Foam, 1/2” Foam, Poly3 and Poly5 for the fills
• Basic for the backing material
6 We will layer the fill materials in the following order:
• Powder Blue in top material station
• Wool in station #1
• 1/4” Fiber in station #2
• 1/2” Foam in station #3
• 3/4” Foam in station #4
• Poly3 in station #5
• Poly5 in station #6
• Basic in bottom material station
7 We will be creating panels cut to queen size: width 80” and length 60”.
To create the Starry Night Class IV Tack & Jump product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

113 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Touch the Add icon. The first Product Entry screen appears.

NOTE: Once you enter the product entry

screen sequence there is no Back button
to return to the previous screen. You
must cancel the sequence and start over.

4 Continue with the following Product Entry screens:

a. Type STARRY NIGHT for the product identification, then touch Enter
to move to the next screen.
b. Type SN 2002 BLUE DIAMOND for the product description, then touch
Enter.
c. Select English for the unit of measurement.
d. Type T for pattern type, then touch Enter.
e. Select the 4STAR Pattern icon.
f. Type 8 for the pattern length, then touch Enter.
g. Type 8 for the pattern width, then touch Enter.
h. Type 800 for the machine speed, then touch Enter.
i. Type 7 for stitches per inch, then touch Enter.
j. Type the needle setting code sx6-3, then touch Enter.
k. Touch Enter for both Carriage and Feed compensation screens, no
adjustment is needed.

Paragon M 114
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

l. Type 60 for the panel length, then touch Enter.

m. Type 80 for the panel width, then touch Enter.
n. Type POWDER BLUE for the top (ticking) material, then touch Enter.
o. Type WOOL for the name of the fill material for station #1, then touch
Enter.
p. Type 1/4 FIBER for the name of the fill material for station #2, then touch
Enter.
q. Type 3/4 FOAM for the name of the fill material for station #3, then
touch Enter.
r. Type 1/2 FOAM for the name of the fill material for station #4, then
touch Enter.
s. Type POLY3 for the name of the fill material for station #5, then touch
Enter.
t. Type POLY5 for the name of the fill material for station #6, then touch
Enter.
u. Type BASIC for the backing material, then touch Enter.
v. Type 0.75 for the tail length, then touch Enter.
w. Type 4 for the number of tacks, then touch Enter.
x. Type 0 for the type of tack, then touch Enter.
y. Type 12 for the length of the jump from the pattern end to the start of the
pattern repeat.
5 The final screen appears showing the completed product.

Figure 6.7 Practice Exercise #2 - Completed Starry Night Product

6 Touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product Information screen and
return to the Main Run screen.

115 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

Practice Exercise #3: Searching for a Product

(Slumber Swan)
In this exercise you will search for the Slumber Swan product by using the Arrow
and Search icons.
To search for the Slumber Swan product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 We want to locate Slumber Swan. Touch the Arrow icons to scroll up and
down to search for the product.

As products are listed in numeric, then alphabetic order we may have to

scroll through several products before we locate Slumber Swan.

Paragon M 116
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

4 To narrow the search, touch the Search icon.

5 The Product Entry - Search screen appears.

6 Type S, then touch Enter.

7 The system will display the first of all products beginning with “S”. This
may not be Slumber Swan so use the Down Arrow icon to scroll through the
database until you locate the product.

NOTE: To locate the products, always look at the name under the Product
Identification icon and not the name on the Pattern icon.

8 After locating the Slumber Swan product, touch the Check Okay icon to
close the Product Information screen and return to the Main Run screen.

117 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

Practice Exercise #4: Editing a Product (Slumber

Swan and Starry Night)
For this exercise, we will be editing the two patterns created in Practice Exercise
#1 and #2.

NOTE: For Slumber Swan we will change the size of the panels
from queen to twin, increase the speed to 1000 RPM, add a
new fill named Poly2 in station #3 and move the fill named
Poly3 into station #4.

To edit the Slumber Swan product:

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

NOTE: If the screen does not display,

Slumber Swan, then touch the Search
icon and search for the Slumber Swan
product.

3 With the Slumber Swan product displayed on the Product Information

screen, edit the following:
a. Touch the Machine Speed icon and type 1000 on the Product Entry
screen, then touch Enter.

Paragon M 118
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

b. Touch the Panel Length icon and type 40 on the Product Entry screen,
then touch Enter.
c. Touch the Panel Width icon and type 75 on the Product Entry screen,
then touch Enter.
d. Touch Fill Station #3 icon and type POLY2 on the Product Entry screen,
then touch Enter.
e. Touch Fill Station #4 icon and type POLY3 on the Product Entry screen,
then touch Enter.
f. Touch the Copy to Card icon.

Figure 6.8 Practice Exercise #4 - Edited Slumber Swan Product

4 When all changes are completed, touch the Check Okay icon to close the
Product Information screen and return to the Main Run screen.

NOTE: For Starry Night we will change the ticking from Powder
Blue to Twilight and replace fill #1 Wool with Lambs Wool.

119 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

To edit the Starry Night product:

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Touch the Search icon and search for the Starry Night product.
4 With the Starry Night product displayed on the Product Information screen,
edit the following:
a. Touch the Top Material icon and type TWILIGHT on the Product Entry
screen, then touch Enter.
b. Touch Fill Station #1 icon and type LAMBS WOOL on the Product
Entry screen, then touch Enter.

Paragon M 120
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

5 Touch the Copy to Card icon.

Figure 6.9 Practice Exercise #4 - Saving Edited Starry Night Product

6 When all changes are completed, touch the Check Okay icon to close the
Product Information screen and return to the Main Run screen.

Figure 6.10 Practice Exercise #4 - Edited Starry Night Product

121 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

Practice Exercise #5: Cloning a Product (Starry

Night TS)
In this exercise we will make a clone of the Tack & Jump product Starry Night and
name it Starry Night TS. The new product will need a new ticking (Cotton 47) and
a reorganization of the fill stations. Currently 1/4 Fiber is in station #2, 3/4
FOAM is in station #3, 1/2 FOAM is in station #4, POLY3 is in station #5, and
POLY5 is in station #6. We will move the 1/2” Foam to station #2 and remove the
3/4” Foam from station #3.
To clone the Starry Night product:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 If necessary, touch the Search icons and search for the Starry Night product.

Paragon M 122
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

4 Once you have located Starry Night, select the Clone icon.

NOTE: You must select the clone icon

before proceeding.

5 The Product Entry - Product Identification screen appears.

6 Enter STARRY NIGHT TS, then touch Enter.

NOTE: “TS” was added to the product identification to identify it as a new

product. Remember, each product must have a unique identification name.

7 Type TWINKLE LITTLE STAR as the product description, then touch

Enter.
8 The Product Identification screen appears with the new product.
9 Touch the Top Material icon and type COTTON 47 for the new ticking, then
touch Enter. The screen will now display the Copy to Card icon.
10 Touch Fill Station #2 and type 1/2 FOAM, then touch Enter.
11 Touch Fill Station #3 and then touch Enter. Station #3 will now be blank.

123 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

12 Touch the Copy to Card icon to save the new cloned product.

Figure 6.11 Practice Exercise #5 - Cloned Starry Night Product

13 When all screens are completed, touch the Check Okay icon to close the
Product Information screen and return to the Main Run screen.

Paragon M 124
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

Practice Exercise #6: Deleting a Product

(Slumber Swan, Starry Night, and Starry Night
TS)
So that other operators may use these exercises, we will delete the newly created
and cloned products: Slumber Swan, Starry Night, and Starry Night TS.

NOTE: These products are used in Chapter 7, “Working with

Batches”. Delete these products only after completing all
practice exercises.

To delete these products:

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Search for Slumber Swan.
4 With the Slumber Swan displayed on the Product Information screen, touch
the Delete icon.

5 A pop-up screen will appear. Touch the Check Okay icon.

6 The system deletes Slumber Swan and returns to the Product Identification
screen.
7 Search for Starry Night, then touch the Delete icon.
8 Touch the Check Okay icon on the pop-up screen.
9 The system deletes Starry Night and returns to the Product Identification
screen.
10 Search for Starry Night TS, then touch the Delete icon.
11 Touch the Check Okay icon on the pop-up screen.
12 The system deletes Starry Night TS and returns to the Product Identification
screen.

NOTE: Check to make sure these products are deleted by searching for Slumber
Swan, Starry Night, and Starry Night TS.

13 When these screens are deleted, touch the Check Okay icon to close the
Product Information screen and return to the Main Run screen.

125 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

Practice Exercise #7: Modifying a Pattern Link

Product (1BOX4CIR)
In this exercise we will modify the Pattern Link product 1BOX4CIR.

CAUTION: You cannot create or clone a new Pattern Link product.

Therefore you WILL overwrite the structure of the existing
Pattern Link product.

To modify Pattern Link product 1BOX4CIR:

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product icon.

2 The Product Information screen appears.

3 Search for the Pattern Link product 1BOX4CIR.

NOTE: The Product Information screen displays the current product. To search for the
Pattern Link product to modify, see “Searching for a Completed Product” on page 92.

Paragon M 126
 Practice Exercises Working with Patterns
and Products

4 Once you locate the Pattern Link product 1BOX4CIR, touch the small Down
Arrow icon at the bottom of the screen to identify the number of steps in this
product. This product has five steps:

Step 1 of 5: SDE-CHAN Step 4 of 5: 4CIRCLE

Step 2 of 5: 4CIRCLE Step 5 of 5: SDE-CHAN

Step 3 of 5: 3BOX

5 Note the panel length and width, and the top, backing, and fill materials.
You will need this information at the end of this exercise.

127 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Practice Exercises
and Products

6 Touch the Panel Width icon and type 60 for panel width, then touch Enter.
7 Touch the Panel Length icon and type 80 for panel length, then touch Enter.
8 Touch the Top Material icon and type DEVONSHIRE, then touch Enter.
9 Touch the Fill Material #1 icon and type WOOL, then touch Enter.
10 Touch the Fill Material #2 icon and type 3/4 POLY, then touch Enter.
11 Touch the Fill Material #3 icon and type 1/4 FOAM, then touch Enter.
12 Touch the Backing Material icon and type BASIC, then touch Enter.
13 All of the steps for the Pattern Link product 1BOX4CIR have been
simultaneously updated with the new entries. Touch the small Arrow icons
to scroll up or down to check each of the steps.

14 To complete this exercise, return the Pattern Link product 1BOX4CIR to its
original design using your notes from Step 5.
15 Then, touch the Check Okay icon to close the Product Information screen
and return to the Main Run screen.

Paragon M 128
 Review Working with Patterns
and Products

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 True or False. Patterns are defined as _________ files and must be converted
to ODE ________ files.
2 Class I and Class II designs are ___________ patterns.
3 Class III designs can sew up to ____ degrees.
4 True or False. Carriage compensation is a feature that corrects pattern
distortion in the carriage direction (side to side).
5 A “product” includes all the necessary information to manufacture a
finished item. Select the item that is not part of the product.
a. Pattern shape file
b. Machine speed
c. Stitches per inch
d. Raw materials
e. Number of panels
6 The pattern class that can sew up to a maximum angle of 90-degrees is
_________.
7 A Pattern icon with a blue background is a __________ pattern.
a. Continuous
b. Pattern Link
c. Tack & Jump
d. Class III
8 The pattern class that includes segmented or independent designs is
_______.
9 True or False. The purpose of the railroad pattern is to reduce materials and
save production time.
10 True or False. The pattern class III can sew 360-degree and Tack & Jump
patterns.
11 True or False. When creating a product, the Tail Length entry is the length of
the thread left in the needle after a tack is sewn.
12 The maximum number of characters for the product identification name is:
a. 30
b. 15
c. 6
13 True or False. The database lists patterns and products in numeric, then
alphabetic order.
14 True or False. There is no “back” button during the product creation
sequence.

129 Quilting Machine

 Working with Patterns Review
and Products

15 Each product must have a unique identification __________.

16 Use the _______ icons or the _______ icon to search for a product.
17 The following Product Information screen displays a Continuous,
Tack & Jump, or Pattern Link product.

18 Match the following icons with the correct name:

Pattern

Product Identification

Clone

Batch Mode

Product

19 The individual products within a Pattern Link product are called ________.

Paragon M 130
 What is Batch Mode Quilting? Working with Batches

Working with Batches

7
This chapter provides you with detailed instructions for operating the machine
using the Gribetz International patented Batch Mode job scheduling system. After
reading this chapter you should be able to create a short job schedule with 9 jobs
within 1 hour.
Read Chapter 5, “Operating Procedures” prior to reading this chapter.
You will learn:
• How to identify Batch Mode screens and icons.
• How to determine splicing stations.
• How to create job schedules.
• How to edit job schedules.
• How to delete a job from a schedule.
• How to sew in batch mode.
• How to monitor the machine during operation.
In addition, this chapter answers the following question:
1 What is Batch Mode Quilting?
2 What is a Job Schedule?

What is Batch Mode Quilting?

The term “batch” describes a group or series. The term “mode” describes a
method or way of performing a specific task. When you are in “batch mode
quilting” you have scheduled the quilting machine to sew a group of products in
a specific order. When this information is entered correctly, the quilting machine
identifies the next product and automatically informs you when to change
materials, including the type of material, for that product.
When using batch mode quilting, a Paragon M series quilting machine is most
commonly paired with a programmable (Pro I™ or Pro ME®) panel cutter.
Although batch mode is most efficient when operated with a panel cutter,
customers can use batch mode without a cutting operation.

131 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches What is a Job Schedule?

What is a Job Schedule?

A job schedule is the listing of several jobs in a specific order. Each job includes:
• a product
• the number of panels for that product
• the mode (cut panels or wind-up rolls) for that product
The listed jobs will be sewn automatically in the specified order. By scheduling
your products, you will reduce the potential for error and increase machine
operation time. Job schedules can be entered at the machine or from the main
office system. You can create job schedules for any period: one hour, one shift,
one day, or an entire week.

NOTE: When in batch mode quilting, the system will notify you
when there are four jobs remaining in the schedule (the
Product Identification icon turns yellow) and will not
operate if there are no jobs in the schedule or if there are
insufficient panels (the Product Identification icon turns
red). Always monitor the job schedule and add jobs as
needed.

Creating a job schedule is accomplished in three steps:

1 Determine the distances from the material splice points to the middle needle
bar, the panel cutter distance, and a nominal crop-out value.
2 Identify the individual products to be quilted, the number of panels to be cut
for each of these products, and whether the panels will be cut or wound in a
roll.
3 Enter each product and number of panels into the Jobs Schedule Set Up
screen.
To be proficient in batch mode quilting, we recommend attending our Advanced
301 Training Course. For current class dates, please contact our Technical
Training Center at 1-954-846-0300.

Getting Started
Before beginning the following sections, review Chapter 5, “Operating
Procedures”, Chapter 6, “Working with Patterns and Products”, Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”, and Appendix B, “Glossary of Screens”, particularly the
following screens:
• Main Run Screen (Figure B.2 on page B-351.)
• Jobs Schedule Set Up Screens (Figure B.3 through Figure B.7 starting on
page B-352.)
• User Configurations Screens (Figure B.44, Figure B.46, Figure B.48, Figure
B.50, and Figure B.52 starting on page B-365.)

Paragon M 132
 Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance Working with Batches

Determining Measurements for Splice

Stations and Panel Cutter Distance
Several measurements need to be determined and entered into the computer
before batch mode will operate correctly. These measurements notify the machine
of material changes and coordinate cutting and size changes with the
programmable panel cutter.

CAUTION: This information is vital to the entire batch mode operation.

Without proper values, the software does not communicate
the correct panel sizes and crop-out areas to the panel cutter.
In addition, the software does not communicate the correct
prompts for pattern or material changes.

Authorized Gribetz International installation personnel determine and enter

these measurements during initial installation of your panel cutter and quilter.
You will not need to change these measurements unless the machine, panel
cutter, or splicing stations are moved or unless slight adjustments are required.
The key measurements and their definitions are described in Table 7.1, “Job
Scheduling System - Key System Measurements.”

NOTE: Measurements are shown in inches if you are working in the

English system, and in centimeters if you are working in the
metric system. All measurements should reference the
middle needle bar.

Table 7.1 Job Scheduling System - Key System Measurements

Measurement Definition
Top Material (Tick) Distance along the material path from splice point for top
material (ticking) to middle needle bar.

Fill #1 Distance along the material path from splice point for fill
station #1 to the middle needle bar.

Fill #2 Distance along the material path from splice point for fill
station #2 to the middle needle bar.

Fill #3 Distance along the material path from splice point for fill
station #3 to the middle needle bar.

Fill #4 Distance along the material path from splice point for fill
station #4 to the middle needle bar.

Fill #5 Distance along the material path from splice point for fill
station #5 to the middle needle bar.

Fill #6 Distance along the material path from splice point for fill
station #6 to the middle needle bar.

133 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance

Table 7.1 Job Scheduling System - Key System Measurements

Measurement Definition
Backing Distance along the material path from splice point for
backing material station to middle needle bar.

Cutter Blade Distance along material path from middle needle bar to
panel cutter cross-cut blade (measured with the
accumulator bar in the DOWN position).

Determining Measurements
You will need to determine the distance from the quilting machine to the panel
cutter so that the panel cutter will know when and where to cut the quilted
panels. You will also need to determine the splice stations for top, backing, and
fill materials. This is done by:
1 Making marks on the material at specific locations.
2 Running the material through the quilting machine and panel cutter.
3 Measuring each mark from the middle needle bar.
4 Entering the measurements into the computer.

NOTE: This example assumes that we are using English units and
that materials are already loaded into the machine. Use
inexpensive material when determining measurements.

You will need:

• material
• a large permanent marker
• calculator
• masking tape (optional)
• a tape measure
1 Place the programmable panel cutter in Manual mode. See your panel cutter
operations manual for how to do this. The Pro ME Programmable Panel Cutter
Operations and General Maintenance manual is part number J513165050.

NOTE: If panels still remain in the panel cutter, make a cross-cut.

Paragon M 134
 Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance Working with Batches

2 Slowly operate the quilting machine until the accumulator bar on the panel
cutter is at the bottom of its travel. (Figure 7.1)

Figure 7.1 Accumulator Bar at Bottom of Travel

3 Determine where you want your material splice stations.

4 Make sure that the floater bar is down and there is no excessive slack.
Release tension on all fill and backing material. Remain consistent each time
you splice material. Consistency is very important.
5 With a large permanent marker, make a mark on the ticking material,
directly in front of the precompression roller. (Figure 7.2) This is the mark
you will use to determine the panel cutter distance.

NOTE: The middle needle bar is under the presser foot where your
marks cannot be viewed. The front of the precompression
roller is 7” (17.78cm) from the middle needle bar. Therefore,
when you run the material through the machine you will
need to subtract 7” (17.78cm) from the first measurement.

6 Make a mark at each station. You can also mark the areas with masking tape.

Figure 7.2 Marking the Panel Cutter Figure 7.3 Marking the Ticking Splice
Distance Station

135 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance

Figure 7.4 Marking the Fill Splice Figure 7.5 Marking the Backing Splice
Station Station

NOTE: You can place top material in the material trough or at any
of the stations on the material handling package. Select only
one area and remain consistent.
7 Label each station to identify the location. For example, “Tick” or “T” for
ticking station; “Fill 1” or “F1” for Fill Station 1, “All Fills” or “F” for Fill
Stations 1-6. (Figure 7.3 through Figure 7.5)
8 Make a mark on the edge of each material next to the splice station mark.
Make sure that the mark on the material aligns with the mark on the station.
Label each mark on the material to identify location. (Figure 7.6 through
Figure 7.8)

NOTE: The mark on the material should always match the actual
splicing station. The station may be the same location for
several materials. The splicing station for ticking material is
typically on the front of the material trough. For more
information on splicing stations, see “Replenishing
Material” on page 230.

Figure 7.6 Marking the Figure 7.7 Marking the Figure 7.8 Marking the
Ticking Material Fill Material Backing Material

9 You should now have marks and labels on all of the stations and in front of
the precompression roller.

Paragon M 136
 Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance Working with Batches

10 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product Identification icon.

11 The Product Selection screen appears. Select a product by touching a

Pattern icon.

NOTE: A Class I product is

recommended, such as one with a
channel pattern.

12 Operate the machine until all material is through the panel cutter.
13 Lay the entire length of material on the floor.
14 Locate the panel cutter distance mark and measure 7” (17.78cm) towards the
cross-cut. Make a mark at this location. It is the location of the middle needle
bar. All measurements will be from the middle needle bar. (Figure 7.9)

Figure 7.9 Marking the Location of the Middle Needle Bar

137 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance

15 Measure from the cross-cut to the panel cutter mark.

Figure 7.10 Measuring Panel Distance

16 Measure from the cross cut mark to the panel cutter distance mark.
(Figure 7.10)
17 Record the measurement. It is your panel cutter distance.
18 Measure from the middle needle bar to the first mark. (Figure 7.11)

NOTE: Depending on the material path, the first mark may be

ticking, backing, or station #1. (Figure 7.12 through Figure
7.14)

19 Record this measurement.

20 Measure from the middle needle bar to the next mark. (Figure 7.11)
21 Record this measurement.
22 Continue until you have all measurements recorded. (Figure 7.11 through
Figure 7.14)

NOTE: Each material station must be measured separately from the

middle needle bar.

Paragon M 138
 Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter Distance Working with Batches

23 You should now have different measurements for the panel cutter and each
of the splicing stations: ticking, backing, fill materials.

Figure 7.11 Measuring Material Figure 7.12 Measuring Ticking

Stations from the Middle Needle Bar Distance

Figure 7.13 Measuring Fill Distance Figure 7.14 Measuring Backing

Distance

Table 7.2 Example of Distance Measurement

Station Distance from Middle Needle Bar

Panel Cutter 238”

Ticking 115”

Fill Stations 1-6 240”

Backing 276”

NOTE: These are example measurements only. Measurements for

each machine will be different.

139 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Entering Splice Station and Panel Cutter Distance Measurements

Entering Splice Station and Panel Cutter

Distance Measurements
After the physical measurements are made and verified, you will need to enter
the information into the computer to activate the splice stations and to notify the
quilting machine of the panel cutter distance. You will not need to change these
measurements unless the machine, panel cutter, or splicing stations are moved or
unless slight adjustments are required.
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Tools icon.

2 The Tools screen appears. Touch the User Configuration icon.

NOTE: A passcode is required to access

the User Configuration screens. For
information about passcodes, see
“Setting System Security” on page 214 or
your supervisor.

Paragon M 140
 Entering Splice Station and Panel Cutter Distance Measurements Working with Batches

3 A Passcode Keypad screen appears.

4 Type the passcode and touch Enter on the keypad.

5 The User Configuration screen appears. Touch the Set Top Material icon.

NOTE: The set distance icons are dual

touch; they are divided into two active
icons.
Touch the left icon to access the pop-up
keypad and set distance measurement.

Touch the right icon to enable or disable

the station.

6 A pop-up keypad screen appears. Enter the distance in inches (or meters) for
the Top Material station, then touch Enter.

141 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Entering Splice Station and Panel Cutter Distance Measurements

7 The User Configuration screen reappears. Touch the Set Bottom Material
icon.

8 When the pop-up keypad screen appears, enter the distance for the Bottom
Materials station, then touch Enter.
9 The User Configuration screen reappears. Touch the Set Fill Material icon.

10 The User Configuration - Set Fill Material Station Distance screen appears.

Paragon M 142
 Entering Splice Station and Panel Cutter Distance Measurements Working with Batches

11 Touch each fill station icon to access the pop-up keypad screen and enter the
distance for that splice station.

NOTE: Station icons on the User Configuration screen indicate

whether a station is enabled or disabled for that station.
Several stations may be at one location; some stations may
not be used at all.

Icons displaying a 0 with a Icons displaying a I with a Icons displaying a I with a

red background indicate green background indicate yellow background
that the station is disabled that the station is enabled indicate that not all
and is not used as a splice as a splice point for only stations are enabled or
point. that material. there is more than one
splice point at that
measurement.

12 When all splice station measurements are entered, touch the Check Okay
icon to return to the User Configuration screen.
13 The User Configuration screen reappears. Touch the Set Panel Cutter
Distance icon.

14 When the pop-up keypad screen appears, enter the panel cutter distance,
then touch Enter.
15 When all measurements are entered, touch the Check Okay icon to return to
the Tools screen.
16 Then, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main Run screen.

143 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Entering a Crop-Out Value

Entering a Crop-Out Value

It is necessary to sew a short section of material when changing from one pattern
to another, and whenever you splice material. This unusable quilted portion, a
“crop-out”, is then cut and discarded. Crop-outs represent about 6" to 12"
(15.24cm to 30.48cm) of wasted materials. To automate this process, you will need
to enter a crop-out value into the quilting machine to notify the quilting machine
and programmable panel cutter of the exact length of waste material to sew, cut,
and discard. Adjust this measurement as needed to reduce material waste.
The crop-out value range is 4 inches (10.16cm) to 25 inches (63.50cm). As the
measurement from the front to rear needle bar is 6 inches (15.24cm), the
recommended crop-out value is 8 to 12 inches (20.32 to 30.48cm).
Certain Pattern Link patterns are sewn using only the middle needle bar. If you
are sewing these patterns exclusively a crop-out of less than 8 inches may be
used.To enter the crop-out value:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Tools icon.

2 The Tools screen appears. Touch the User Configuration icon.

NOTE: A passcode is required to access

the User Configuration screens. For
information about passcodes, see
“Setting System Security” on page 214 or
your supervisor.

Paragon M 144
 Entering a Crop-Out Value Working with Batches

3 A Passcode Keypad screen appears.

4 Type the passcode and touch Enter on the keypad.

5 The User Configuration screen appears. Touch the Crop-Out icon.

6 A pop-up keypad screen appears. Enter the crop-out value, then touch
Enter.

145 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Creating a Job Schedule

7 Touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Tools screen.

8 Then, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main Run screen.

Creating a Job Schedule

Job/Jobs A job is the To create a job schedule you will enter each individual job in a specified order
compilation of a product,
into the job schedule screen. The can be done while the machine is operating.
the mode (cut panels or
wind-up), and the number 1 First, gather the types of products for this job schedule.
of panels or yard (meters)
for that product. 2 On piece of paper, list the products in the order that you will sew them.
3 Next to each product, write the number of panels or yards (meters) for that
product.
4 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

Paragon M 146
 Creating a Job Schedule Working with Batches

5 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen appears. The screen should be empty.

NOTE: If the screen displays job entries,

then you must delete the entries before
creating a new job schedule or the listed
entries will become part of the current job
schedule. See “Deleting a Product from
the Job Schedule” on page 154.

6 Touch the Add icon. The Product Selection screen appears.

NOTE: Search for the product by using

the Arrow or Search icons. See
“Searching for a Completed Product” on
page 92.

7 Select a product by touching the desired icon and then the Check Okay icon.
8 The Number of Panels keypad screen appears. Enter the number of panels,
then touch Enter.

147 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Creating a Job Schedule

9 The Type of Mode screen appears. Select the type of mode, then touch Enter.

NOTE:
Touch the Panel icon to select cut panels.

Touch the Wind-up icon to select panels

wound in a roll.

10 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen reappears with the new job listed in the first
row.

Paragon M 148
 Creating a Job Schedule Working with Batches

NOTE: The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen will show details for each
product.

The first column indicates the product identification.

The second lists the quantity for each job: the number of cut
panels, or the number of yards (meters) if wind-up mode is
selected. Touch this icon to change quantity for the selected
job only.
The third displays the mode (panel or wind-up). Touch this
icon to toggle from panels to wind-up for the selected job
only.
Panel length and panel width are defined in the fourth and
fifth columns. Touch these icons to change panel length and
width for the selected job only.
11 From your list, continue to add the remaining jobs. The Jobs Schedule Set Up
screen should now show all of your jobs in the order they were entered.

NOTE: The quantity is shown in either

number of panels or yards (meters),
depending on whether the wind-up or
the panel mode was selected.

12 When all jobs are entered, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main
Run screen.

149 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Adding a Product to the Job Schedule

Adding a Product to the Job Schedule

You can add jobs to a job schedule. This can be done while the machine is
operating. Once jobs are past the splice point, they cannot be modified.
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

2 Touch the Add icon. The Product Selection screen appears. Select a product
by touching the desired icon and touch the Check Okay icon.

Paragon M 150
 Adding a Product to the Job Schedule Working with Batches

3 The Quantity screen appears. Enter the number of panels for this job, then
touch Enter.

4 The Type of Mode screen appears. Enter the type of mode, panels or wind-
up, then touch Enter.

NOTE:
Touch the Panel icon to select cut panels.

Touch the Wind-up icon to select panels

wound in a roll.

The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen

reappears with the new job listed as
the last entry in the job schedule.
Continue to add jobs as desired.
NOTE: The job schedule can hold an
unlimited number of jobs, however the
screen will only show 22 jobs at a time.
To locate all jobs and scroll up or down
through the list of jobs, touch the Arrow
icons at the bottom of the screen, or touch
the scroll bar on the right side of the job
schedule.
Jobs are listed in the order that they will
be sewn.

5 When all jobs are added, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main
Run screen.

151 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Moving a Job Within the Job Schedule

Moving a Job Within the Job Schedule

You can move jobs within a job schedule, even while the machine is operating.
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

2 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen appears. Touch the job you want to move.

NOTE: Once jobs are past the splice

point, they cannot be moved.

In the following steps, the ninth entry,

“Starry Night”, will be moved as an
example.

3 Touch the Check Select icon. The selected job becomes highlighted in green.

NOTE: To move a group of jobs, select

one job at a time and then the Check
Select icon, each job is highlighted only
until you touch the Check Select icon,
however it is still part of the selected
group. When you touch the Move icon,
the entire group will move. A future
feature will highlight the entire group.

Paragon M 152
 Moving a Job Within the Job Schedule Working with Batches

4 Touch the Move icon. The selected job will disappear from the job schedule.

NOTE: If you are moving a group of jobs

the entire selected group will disappear.

5 Touch a job in the job schedule. Then, touch the Insert Job icon.

NOTE: When moving a job back into the

job schedule you will always move the
job above the selected job.
If you are moving a group of jobs the
entire selection will reappear in the order
they were scheduled and not the order
they were selected.

6 The moved job will appear in the job schedule above the selected job in step 5.
7 When all jobs are moved, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main
Run screen.

153 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Deleting a Product from the Job Schedule

Deleting a Product from the Job Schedule

To delete a product from the production schedule:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

2 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen appears.

Paragon M 154
 Deleting a Product from the Job Schedule Working with Batches

3 Touch the job you wish to delete from the job schedule. Then, touch the
Delete icon.

4 A pop-up screen will appear. Touch the green I icon to delete the job from
the job schedule. Touch the red O icon to cancel the request.

Touch the red I icon to accept the

request to delete the selected job.

Touch the green O icon to cancel the

request to delete the selected job.

NOTE: Deleting a job from the job

schedule does not delete the product of
that job from the product database.

5 When all jobs are deleted, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main
Run screen.

155 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Sewing in Batch Mode

Sewing in Batch Mode

When you are satisfied with the sequence of jobs that you have created or edited,
verify that the system is in Batch Mode.
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product Identification icon to access
the Product Selection screen.

NOTE: If the Batch Mode icon is NOTE: If the Batch Mode icon is
missing, as above, then the machine present, as above, then touch the
is in Batch Mode. Batch Mode icon to place the machine
in Batch Mode.

2 Touch the Check Okay icon. The Main Run screen reappears. The system is
now in Batch Mode and will process the jobs in the order that they were
listed.

NOTE: Make sure that the number or

name on the first line under the
Product Identification icon matches
the number on the Pattern icon.

Paragon M 156
 Monitoring the Job Schedule During Operation Working with Batches

3 The Start icon on the Main Run screen indicates that the machine is ready to
begin sewing.

4 Press a start button on the machine.

5 The machine will move to the start position and beginning sewing the
selected product.

NOTE: If the machine had not finished sewing a scheduled product

it will complete that product before starting the selected
product.

6 The machine will sew all the products in the list and will automatically
notify you of material and needle setting changes.

Monitoring the Job Schedule During

Operation
While the quilting machine is in operation, you can:
• Observe the current job while it is being sewn
• Observe the number of yards (meters) sewn for the current job or machine
• Observe and change the current speed
• Observe details of jobs that are in queue

Observing the Current Job During Operation

While the current job is being sewn all information for that product is displayed Queue A sequence of
stored data or programs
on the Main Run screen. In the Panel Tracker, the jobs waiting in queue to be
awaiting processing, such
sewn are shown in purple. Jobs sewn and waiting in queue to be cut are shown in as an ordered list of jobs.
blue. Crop-outs are shown in green.
Panel Tracker The area
on the Main Run screen
that displays the most
recent panels in queue for
the quilting machine and
all sewn panels in queue
from the quilting machine
to the panel cutter.

Crop/Crop-out The
short section of waste
material that is cut,
removed, and discarded,
usually where two
different panel patterns
meet or material is spliced
NOTE: Single Product Mode will not together.
display jobs in queue for the panel cutter.

157 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Monitoring the Job Schedule During Operation

Observing Job and Machine Throughput

The machine tracks the yield percentage of the current job, the number of yards
(or meters) sewn for the current job, and the number of yards (or meters) that
have been processed by the quilting machine for a specified period. This period
may be set to record the shift, day, week, month, period, or year and includes all
jobs processed during the specified period. See “Resetting the Counter for
Machine Throughput” on page 188 for how to set the Yardage Counter for
Machine Throughput.

Yield Percentage of Yards Number of Yards or Number of Yards or

or Meters per Minute of Meters for Current Meters for Currently
Current Product Product Tracked Period

Figure 7.15 Observing Job and Machine Throughput

Observing and Changing Job Speed

A speed is assigned to each product when it is created. In certain situations, you
may want to temporarily alter the speed. This is done by touching the Speed
Graph on the Main Run screen. The three methods for changing speed are:
• Touch the left or right arrows
• Touch and slide the center bar
• Touch the preset values

touch and slide bar left to decrease speed

touch and slide bar right to increase speed
touch to reduce speed by intervals of 5 touch to increase speed by intervals of 5

current speed
touch to set at lowest preset speed touch to set at highest preset speed

Figure 7.16 Changing Job Speed from the Speed Graph

Paragon M 158
 Monitoring Material and Needle Settings Working with Batches

Monitoring Material and Needle Settings

When operating the machine in batch mode, the machine will notify you of needle
setting and material changes for each job. When the system identifies a material
change, the quilting machine stops and the background of the appropriate icon
changes color to teal. A field directly below each icon identifies the name of
material to be changed, or may show <None> to indicate that no material is
required at that station for that job.
Figure 7.17 shows that no stations require changes.

Figure 7.17 Monitoring Material in Batch Mode - No Material Changes Required

In Figure 7.18, the machine has stopped to indicate that the next job will require
LINEN for the top material station and 050 024 for fill material station number 2.
Both icons show a teal background. The remaining stations do not require a
change at this time. After changing top and fill #2 material, touch the associated
icons to indicate to the machine that the change was made. Then, press the start
button to resume sewing. The machine will continue sewing the current schedule.

Figure 7.18 Monitoring Material in Batch Mode - Scheduled Material Change

When operating a job schedule, the machine tracks material for each job.
However, the machine does not know when material is low or about to run out.
Therefore, you will need to request a material change. In Figure 7.19, the operator
has touched the Backing icon to request the machine to stop so that they can
replenish material at the backing station. The background color is shown as blue.
The machine will search for and stop at the next available splice point in the job
schedule, typically inserting a crop-out. After changing material, touch the icon to
indicate to the machine that the change was made. Then, press the start button to
resume sewing. The machine will continue sewing the current schedule.

Figure 7.19 Monitoring Material in Batch Mode - Requesting a Material Change

159 Quilting Machine
 Working with Batches Monitoring Material and Needle Settings

When the system identifies a needle change, the quilting machine stops and the
needle setting icon displays the new needle setting code. The background color
does not change. You cannot request a needle change.

NOTE: Notification occurs only if batch mode procedures are

properly set. See, “Determining Measurements for Splice
Stations and Panel Cutter Distance” on page 133 in this
chapter. Products and job schedules must also be created
correctly or the quilting machine will not stop automatically.

Observing Jobs in Queue

The Panel Tracker on the Main Run screen (Figure 7.20) identifies the panels for
the most current jobs in queue. Panels shown on this screen are committed and
are unchangeable; they cannot be modified or deleted from the current job
schedule.
Panels waiting in queue to be sewn are shown as purple. Panels sewn and waiting
in queue to be cut are shown as blue. Crop-outs are shown as green.
The product identification name appears for each panel along the graph. Above
the name is a number identifying the sequence and number of panels for that job.
For example, the second panel of five panels is shown as 2/5.
Numbers and arrows below the graph identify the splice stations, the middle
needle bar, and the panel cutter cross-cut blade. Arrows coordinate with the
colors under each material icon shown on the Main Run screen. When several
splice stations are at the same location, the color of the number indicates the first
splice station at that location; the color of the arrow indicates the last splice station
at that location. The number zero (0) indicates the location of the middle needle
bar. The middle needle bar and panel cutter cross-cut blade numbers are both
shown as black. (See “Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel
Cutter Distance” on page 133.)

Paragon M 160
 Monitoring Material and Needle Settings Working with Batches

Second job in queue with one panel Fourth panel of five panels for this job
First (next) job in queue with three panels crop-out

crop-out

fill splice station #5 middle needle bar cross-cut blade

backing splice station

Figure 7.20 Panel Tracker

You may view all jobs in queue for the quilting machine and panel cutter from the
Look Ahead screen. To access the Look Ahead screen, touch the Look Ahead icon.
The Look Ahead screen appears.

NOTE: You can view the Look Ahead

screen while the machine is operating.
When a splice point approaches, the
machine stops and the Main Run screen
reappears so that you can view the
material and needle setting icons that
require changes.

Figure 7.21 Look Ahead Screen

The top list shows recently sewn panels that are in queue to be processed by the
panel cutter. This list matches the panels shown in blue on the panel tracker. The
bottom list shows jobs in queue to be sewn. Jobs that are highlighted in green are
committed and cannot be modified. These jobs match the panels shown in purple
on the panel tracker.
Use the Arrow icons on the side of the screen to scroll through the list of sewn
panels that are in queue to be processed by the panel cutter. Use the Arrow icons
on the bottom of the screen to scroll through the list and view jobs in queue to be
sewn. Jobs are listed in the order that they will be sewn.

161 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen

Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look

Ahead Screen
You can add, delete, move, and change panel size or mode for jobs in queue to be
sewn in the job schedule, as long as they have not been committed. (These are jobs
that are highlighted in green on the Look Ahead screen or in purple on the panel
tracker). You can also make minor modifications to panels in queue to be
processed by the panel cutter.

NOTE: To add or move products within the job schedule, see

“Adding a Product to the Job Schedule” on page 150 and
“Moving a Job Within the Job Schedule” on page 152.

Deleting Jobs from the Look Ahead Screen

To delete jobs from the job schedule:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Look Ahead icon.

2 The Look Ahead screen appears.

Paragon M 162
 Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen Working with Batches

3 Scroll to and touch the job you want to delete.

NOTE: On this screen, you cannot touch jobs to select them; you
must scroll to the jobs.

4 Touch the Delete icon located at the bottom of the screen.

5 Depending on your revision level, a pop-up screen will appear asking “YES
or NO” or “DELETE JOB?? ARE YOU SURE??”. Touch the green I icon or
Yes to delete the job from the job schedule. Touch the red O icon or No to
cancel the request.

6 The job disappears from the list indicating it is deleted from the job
schedule.
7 When all jobs are deleted, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main
Run screen.

Changing Panel Size, Quantity, and Mode from the

Look Ahead Screen
To change the panel size:
8 From the Main Run screen, touch the Look Ahead icon.

163 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen

9 The Look Ahead screen appears. Use the Arrow icons at the bottom of the
screen to scroll to and select a panel.

NOTE: Use the Arrow icons on the

bottom of the screen to scroll through the
list and view or select jobs in queue to be
sewn.

10 Touch the Panel Length or Panel Width icon.

11 A keypad screen appears. Enter the panel length or width, then touch Enter.

To change the quantity:

1 From the Look Ahead screen, use the Arrow icons at the bottom of the
screen to scroll to and select a panel.
2 Touch the Quantity icon.

3 A keypad screen appears. Enter the quantity, then touch Enter.

Paragon M 164
 Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen Working with Batches

To change the mode:

1 From the Look Ahead screen, use the Arrow icons at the upper right of the
screen to scroll to and select a panel.

NOTE: The mode for the selected

STARRY NIGHT TS is W for windup.

2 The Touch the Mode icon. The icon toggles between wind-up and cut panels.

NOTE: The mode for the selected

STARRY NIGHT TS is now P for cut
panels.

3 When all modifications are completed, touch the Check Okay icon to return
to the Main Run screen.

165 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen

Modifying Panels in Queue for the Panel Cutter

from the Look Ahead Screen
Once the material passes the middle needle bar it is in queue to be processed by
the panel cutter. Only minor modifications can be made at this point; you can
only add or delete panels.

CAUTION: Adding or deleting panels from the panel cutter should be

reserved for extreme circumstances, such as deleting a panel
due to a material jam. Adding or deleting panels from the
panel cutter queue will affect the batch mode process, which
may require modifications to the job schedule. Only
operators skilled with batch mode should attempt to modify
panels in this queue.

To add panels that are in queue to be processed by the panel cutter:

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Look Ahead icon.

2 The Look Ahead screen appears. Use the Arrow icons at the upper right of
the screen to scroll to and select a panel.

Paragon M 166
 Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen Working with Batches

3 Touch the Add icon.

4 A “Manual Entry” panel is added.
5 Select the panel width and length to fit schedule.

NOTE: The total of all panels in this queue cannot exceed the panel
cutter cross-cut measurement.

6 When you are finished, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main Run
screen.
To delete panels that are in queue to be processed by the panel cutter:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Look Ahead icon.

2 The Look Ahead screen appears. Use the Arrow icons at the upper right of
the screen to scroll to and select a panel.

3 Touch the Delete icon.

4 Depending on your revision level, a pop-up screen will appear asking “YES
or NO” or “DELETE JOB?? ARE YOU SURE??”. Touch the green I icon or

167 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Modifying Jobs in Queue from the Look Ahead Screen

Yes to delete the job from the job schedule. Touch the red O icon or No to
cancel the request.

5 The selected panel disappears from the list.

6 When you are finished, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main Run
screen.

Paragon M 168
 Practice Exercises Working with Batches

Practice Exercises
The following exercises are presented to help you become familiar with working
with batches and job schedules. If you have any questions, refer back to the step-
by-step detailed directions earlier in this chapter.
You will learn how to:
• determine a splicing station
• create a job schedule
• reposition jobs in a job schedule
• delete a job from a schedule

NOTE: All exercises are in English measurements.

169 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Practice Exercises

Practice Exercise #8: Determining and Entering

the Panel Cutter Cross-Cut Blade Measurement
For this exercise, we will determine the location of the panel cutter cross-cut blade
from the middle needle bar on the quilting machine, then enter the information
into the computer.
You will need:
• material
• a large permanent marker
• calculator
• masking tape (optional)
• a tape measure
1 Place the programmable panel cutter in Manual mode. If the panel cutter
was in Wind-up mode, make a cross-cut.
2 Slowly operate the quilting machine until the accumulator bar on the panel
cutter is at the bottom of its travel.
3 With a large permanent marker, make a mark on the ticking material,
directly in front of the precompression roller.
4 From the Main Run screen, touch the Product Identification icon.

Paragon M 170
 Practice Exercises Working with Batches

5 The Product Selection screen appears. Touch any Class I Pattern icon.

6 Operate the machine until all material up to the panel cutter mark is through
the panel cutter.
7 Make a cross-cut and lay the length of material on the floor.
8 Measure from the cross-cut to the panel cutter mark, then subtract 7”
(17.78cm).
9 This is your panel cutter distance.
10 From the Main Run screen, touch the Tools icon.

171 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Practice Exercises

11 The Tools screen appears. Touch the User Configuration icon.

12 The User Configuration screen appears.

13 Touch the Set Panel Cutter Distance icon.

14 The pop-up keypad screen appears.

15 Enter the panel cutter distance.
16 Touch the Check Okay icon to return to the User Configuration screen.
17 Touch the Check Okay icon to exit the Tools screen and return to the Main
Run screen.

Paragon M 172
 Practice Exercises Working with Batches

Practice Exercise #9: Creating a Job Schedule

(Slumber Swan, Starry Night, and Starry Night
TS)
For this exercise, we will be creating a job schedule by entering products in a
specific order and assigning the number of panels and mode for each product. We
will be using the jobs we created in Chapter 6, “Working with Patterns and
Products”.

Product Identification Number of Panels Mode (Panels or Wind-

up)
Slumber Swan 2 P

Starry Night 3 P

Starry Night TS 1 P

NOTE: If you have deleted the products Slumber Swan, Starry

Night, and Starry Night TS created in Chapter 6, “Working
with Patterns and Products” you will need to recreate them
before proceeding with this exercise.

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

2 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen appears. The screen should be empty.

NOTE: If the screen displays job entries, then you must delete the
entries before creating a new job schedule. See “Deleting a
Product from the Job Schedule” on page 154.

3 Touch the Add icon.

4 The Product Selection screen appears.

173 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Practice Exercises

5 Search for and select Slumber Swan, then touch the Check Okay icon.
6 Enter 2 for the number of panels, then touch Enter.
7 Touch the Panel Mode icon.
8 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen reappears with Slumber Swan listed in the
first row.
9 Touch the Add icon.

10 The Product Selection screen appears.

11 Search for and select Starry Night, then touch the Check Okay icon.
12 Enter 3 for the number of panels, then touch Enter.
13 Touch the Panel Mode icon.
14 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen reappears with Slumber Swan listed in the
first row and Starry Night listed in the second row.
15 Touch the Add icon.

16 The Product Selection screen appears.

17 Search for and select Starry Night TS, then touch the Check Okay icon.
18 Enter 1 for the number of panels, then touch Enter.
19 Touch the Panel Mode icon.
20 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen reappears with Slumber Swan listed in the
first row, Starry Night listed in the second row, and Starry Night TS listed in
the third row.
21 Touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main Run screen.

Paragon M 174
 Practice Exercises Working with Batches

Practice Exercise #10: Moving a Job in the Job

Schedule (Starry Night TS)
For this exercise, we will be editing the job schedule by moving Starry Night TS to
the second row.
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

2 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen appears.

3 Touch the job listing Starry Night TS.

4 Touch the Check Select icon.

5 Touch the Move icon. Starry Night TS disappears from the job schedule.

6 Touch the job listing Starry Night in the job schedule.

7 Then, touch the Insert Job icon.

8 Starry Night TS appears in the job schedule above Starry Night.

9 Touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main Run screen.

175 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Practice Exercises

Practice Exercise #11: Deleting a Job from the

Job Schedule (Starry Night)
For this exercise, we will be deleting the job schedule Starry Night.
1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Job Schedule icon.

2 The Jobs Schedule Set Up screen appears.

3 Touch the job listing Starry Night on the job schedule.

4 Touch the Delete icon to delete Starry Night.

5 Touch Yes on the pop-up screen.

6 Starry Night disappears from the job schedule.
7 Touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main Run screen.

NOTE: So that other operators may use these exercises, delete

Slumber Swan and Starry Night TS.

Paragon M 176
 Review Working with Batches

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 _______ is a strong, tightly woven fabric used especially to make pillow and
mattress coverings.
2 ____ ____ are necessary to cut and discard unusable quilted portions
containing pattern change-overs and material splices.
3 The term _______ describes a group or series. (Choose one.)
a. batch
b. mode
c. crop out
d. pattern
4 The listing of two or more jobs in a specific order is called a ______ _______.
5 A job includes:
a. a product, number of panels, and ODE file
b. the number of panels
c. a product, number of panels, and mode
d. a batch, a product, and mode
6 The first step to creating a job schedule is to:
a. access the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen
b. determine splice stations, crop-out values, and panel cutter distance
c. list the products, the number of panels, and the mode
d. Enter each product and number of panels into the computer
7 When measuring the panel cutter distance, do not allow the ______________
______ to active the sensor.
8 True or False. Gribetz International offers an Advanced Training Course to
help you become proficient in batch mode quilting.
9 The Paragon M has _____ fill stations.
10 This icon, with a green background, displays the top material splice point. Is
it enabled or disabled?

11 True or False. This icon, shown with a yellow background, identifies that the
fill material station distance is measured for several stations.

177 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Review

12 Match the following icons with the correct name:

Start

Product Identification

User Configuration

Look Ahead

Job Schedule

Insert Job

Check Select

13 The following icon indicates that 7.20 _________ have sewn for the current
product.
a. yards or meters
b. inches or centimeters
c. inches or yards
d. feet or millimeters

7.20
14 True or False. Material station distances must be measured separately for
each station.

Paragon M 178
 Review Working with Batches

15 True or False. Splice station measurements are from the splice station to the
middle needle bar.
16 Splice station measurement is from the splice station to the:
a. material trough
b. panel cutter
c. middle needle bar
d. material handling pack
17 This Main Run screen shows that the machine is operating in _____________
mode.

18 True or False. You must stop the machine before modifying a job schedule.
19 True or False. When creating a new job schedule, you must delete old jobs
before entering the new jobs or the old jobs will become part of the new job
schedule.
20 True or False. The second column in the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen
indicates the number of cut panels or the yards (or meters) of wound rolls.

21 True or False. Jobs are always listed in the order that they will be sewn.
22 When moving a job back into the job schedule you will always move the job
______________.
a. to the top of the list
b. above a selected job
c. below a selected job
d. to the bottom of the list
23 True or False. Once jobs are past the splice point, they cannot be moved.
24 Which icon is used to insert a job back into the job schedule.

a. b.

25 True or False. Deleting a job from the job schedule will also delete the
product of that job from the product database.

179 Quilting Machine

 Working with Batches Review

26 Before sewing a job schedule always verify to see if the system is set to batch
mode. This is done from the:
a. Product Selection screen
b. User Configuration screen
c. Jobs Schedule Set Up screen
d. Panel tracker
27 In which mode will you not see panels in queue for the panel cutter.
a. Batch mode
b. Single product mode
c. Idle mode
d. A la mode
28 Touch the arrows on the speed graph to increase or decrease speed by
intervals of ________.
a. 7
b. 15
c. 5
d. 30
29 When in batch mode quilting, the system notifies you of material and
__________ changes.
30 When the system identifies a material change, the background of the icon
changes color to _________.
31 When you request a material change, the background of the icon changes
color to ________.
32 All panels shown on the panel tracker are __________ and cannot be
changed.
33 Panels waiting in queue to be sewn are shown in the color ________.
34 Panels sewn and waiting in queue to be cut are shown in the color ________.
35 _________ are shown in green.
36 Identify the panels on following panel tracker.

37 True or False. The colored arrows below the graph identify the
predetermined splice stations.
38 True or False. The colored arrows at the bottom of the panel tracker
coordinate with the colors under each material icon, unless there are more
there is more than one splice station at the at location.
39 The number zero (0) indicates the _________ __________ _________.

Paragon M 180
 Menus and Options Utilities

Utilities
8
This chapter describes the various utilities of the Paragon quilting machine.
You will learn:
• About the Tools screen.
• About the User Configuration screen.
• About the Help screen.
• About Stop Codes.
• About the Info screen.
• How to use the modem.
• How to set and lock system parameters.
• How to save and load patterns, products, and job schedules into and from
the database using a CompactFlash card.

Menus and Options

There are three main utility screens associated with the Paragon quilting machine.
• Tools screen. Access this screen from the Main Run screen. Use this screen to
set system utilities.
• User Configuration. Access this screen from the Tools screen. Use this screen
to set system parameters.
• Help screen. Access this screen from all screens. This future feature will
provide interactive information in several languages.
The Tools and User Configuration screens display a variety of active, fault, and Toggle To alternate
between two types of
display-only icons. Some icons allow you to toggle between two choices. A
operations.
Symbol I with a green background indicates the feature is turned ON. A Symbol O
with a red background indicates the feature is turned OFF. For an all inclusive list
of icons, see Appendix C, “Glossary of Icons” on page 369.
A legend describing individual icons follows each screen. Some of these icons
may be duplicated on other screens, however they may not have the same
function.

181 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

Tools Screen
The Tools screen is where you will set system utilities. From this screen you can:
• turn the thread detectors On or Off
• prime the auto-lubrication lines
• set the time interval for the auto-lubrication cycle
• update panel cutter with quilter
• set the system time and date
• connect and transmit information by modem
• reset the machine throughput counter
• view the quilter control status
• view the panel cutter status
• copy information to and from the CompactFlash card
• access the User Configuration screen to set system parameters

From the Main Run screen, touch the Tools icon to access the Tools
screen.

set auto-lubrication
time intervals prime auto-lubrication lines

turn thread detectors update panel cutter

on or off with quilter

light grease dark grease

set time and date view system log

connect to modem save data

to or from card
view quilter user configuration
control status
view panel reset yardage
counter
cutter status

info help current date and time check okay

to exit screen

Figure 8.1 Tools Screen

NOTE: This feature may be passcode protected.

Paragon M 182
 Tools Screen Utilities

Turning the Thread Detectors On or Off

Touch the Thread Detector icon to toggle the electronic thread detectors between
ON and OFF.

Thread detector ON. Thread detector OFF.

Figure 8.2 Turning Thread Detectors On and Off

Priming the Auto-Lubrication Lines

Touch the following icons to continuously prime the auto-lubrication lines for
light and dark grease. See “Maintaining the Automatic Lubrication System” on
page 293 for more information on the auto-lubrication system.

Prime auto-lube lines (light grease) Prime auto-lube lines (dark grease)

Figure 8.3 Priming the Auto-Lubrication Lines

CAUTION: Do not overlubricate the machine. The system will continue to

prime lines until the icon is pressed again.

183 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

Setting the Time Interval for the Auto-Lubrication

Cycle
Touch the following icons to access a pop-up keypad and set the time interval for
light or dark grease. A text box below the icon indicates the current time interval.
The time interval can be set from 1-10 minutes, with 5 being the recommended
setting. Keep the pulse time set at five minutes unless you experience indications
of excessive lubrication. The system automatically primes one section each time
the cycle starts. Always make to replenish reservoirs as grease becomes depleted.
See also, “Maintaining the Automatic Lubrication System” on page 309.

Set time interval (light grease) Set time interval (dark grease)

Figure 8.4 Setting the Time Interval for the Auto-Lubrication Cycle

Paragon M 184
 Tools Screen Utilities

Adjusting the Presser Foot Height

Touch the Presser Foot icon to toggle the automatic adjustable presser foot
between HI and LOW. The field under the icon shows the current position. The
arrow indicates the position the presser foot will go to when pressed.
When creating a product you have the option of setting the presser foot at either
HI or LOW. The default setting for all products is HI.

Presser Foot set to HI position. Presser Foot set to LOW position.

Figure 8.5 Adjusting Presser Foot Height

185 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

Setting System Time and Date

Time and date is set to Eastern Time during production. Reset as required for
daylight savings time or your time zone.
To set system time and date:
1 From the Tools screen, touch the Set Time and Date icon. The Set Time and
Date screen appears. The current settings are shown in the text box at the
bottom of the screen.

2 Touch the up and down Arrow icons to increase or decrease the time by
hour, minutes, and seconds in digital time.

Figure 8.6 Setting System Time and Date

NOTE: The time-keeping style is 12-hour (AM/PM) only. The

system does not allow you to set the time for a 24-hour
period, that is, from 1:00:00 to 24:59:59. When the time
reaches 12:59:59 it will start the clock over at again at 1:00:00.

3 Touch the Check Okay icon to accept the new changes and return to the
Main Run screen, or touch the Cancel icon to ignore changes.

Paragon M 186
 Tools Screen Utilities

Using a Modem
The modem allows service technicians to view historical information. Through
this modem you can also send and receive information, such as patterns,
products, and software upgrades. Do not attempt to operate the quilting machine
while communication is in process.
Your modem connection is located on the back of the main cabinet. Connect the
modem to a dedicated telephone line. We recommend that you do not connect
additional modems, fax machines, or other lines with the modem line.

CAUTION: Securely connect telephone lines before beginning the

modeming process. Do not connect the modem through
your PBX or digital phone system. This will damage your
phone system and may damage the modem.

To initiate the modem session:

1 From the Tools screen, touch the Modem icon. A pop-up screen appears.

2 Touch the Start icon to initiate the modem session or touch the Cancel icon to
return to the Tools screen.

NOTE: The machine will not function during modem operations.

3 Verify normal operations after all modem operations are complete. If you
downloaded pattern shape files, make sure you build a product file. You
must build a product file or the pattern will not be represented with an icon
on the selection menu. (See “Creating a Product” on page 78.)

187 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

Resetting the Counter for Machine Throughput

The machine tracks the number of yards (or meters) that have been processed by
the quilting machine for a specified period. This period may be set to record the
shift, day, week, month, period, or year and includes all jobs processed during
these periods. Use the Machine Throughput Counter to track the performance of a
work schedule for piece work or for performance evaluations. See also,
“Observing Job and Machine Throughput” on page 158.

NOTE: If your system is set for metric measurements, the Main Run
screen displays the number of meters quilted.

To reset the machine throughput counter:

1 From the Tools screen, touch the Machine Throughput Counter icon.

2 A pop-up screen will appear asking, “MACHINE COUNTER RESET!!! ARE

YOU SURE??”. Touch Yes to reset the machine throughput counter to zero.
Touch No to cancel the request and return to the Tools screen.

NOTE: On the Main Run screen, the

counter on the actual icon does not
change.

Always look at the field directly under

the icon to see the number of yards or
meters for the currently tracked period.

Paragon M 188
 Tools Screen Utilities

Viewing the Quilter Control Status

The Motion System Monitor constantly diagnoses the motion system of the
quilting machine. This display-only screen is for authorized service and
maintenance personnel. For more information on the Motion System Monitor,
contact a Gribetz International service technician.
To access the Quilter Control Status screen:
1 From the Tools screen, touch the Motion System Controller icon.

2 The Quilter Control Status screen appears.

Figure 8.7 Viewing the Quilter Control Status Screen

The Quilter Control Status screen is divided into two sections:

• Inputs and Outputs
• Torque Monitor

189 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

Inputs and Outputs

Viewing this section of the Quilter Control Status screen allows the operator to
understand the operational state of the quilting machine.
The top half of the Quilter Control Status screen (Figure 8.7) displays the Inputs
and Outputs found in the main and machine cabinets.
The colors used in this section of the screen have significance, and are defined
as follows:
• The yellow I/O designate both Inputs and Outputs that are located within
the main cabinet.
• The white I/O designate both Inputs and Outputs that are located in the
machine cabinet, within the guard on the machine.
• The light cyan (aqua) designates Inputs, regardless of their physical
location.
• The dark cyan (teal) designates Outputs, regardless of their physical
location.
• Red with a white O designates that the particular I/O is in an OFF state.
• Green with a black S designates that the particular I/O is in the ON state.

Torque Monitor
Torque The amount of This feature is part of the Quilter Control Status screen. It is located at the
force you apply to a type of bottom half of the screen, which supplies information about motion on the
lever arm, such as a
wrench, to produce a
machine. It monitors the carriage, the feed, and the needle axes separately to
twisting or a rotating determine the amount of torque exerted by the drive during the sewing
motion. Here, the lever is process.
the drive shaft.
On the left side of the lower section of the screen you will find three icons.
Select the appropriate icon for the axis you want to monitor. The second row of
values represents the physical positions of the carriage and needle axes.

NOTE: The carriage typically travels from 0 to 12.5 inches

(317.5mm). The needle axis typically travels from 0 to 359-
degrees. Because it is not limited to a certain range of
motion, the feed axis does not display position values.

The axes speeds are displayed in the third row of values. The fourth row
displays the numerical torque values for each axis. The speed and torque values
of the carriage, feed, and needle axes are always displayed regardless of the
axis icon you select. On the right side of the lower section of the screen is the
torque graph. This displays the torque for the axis you select. Red lines indicate
extreme values, but do not indicate fault areas. The axes torque extremes are
typically set at +/-200% of rated torque.

NOTE: By touching the torque graph, the operator can save the
current data. This information may be used for performance
comparisons or downloaded by a Gribetz International
service technician for evaluation.

Paragon M 190
 Tools Screen Utilities

Viewing the Panel Cutter Status

This display-only screen is for authorized service and maintenance personnel. For
more information, contact a Gribetz International service technician.
To access the Quilter Control Status screen:
1 From the Tools screen, touch the Panel Cutter Status icon.

2 The Panel Cutter Status screen appears.

Figure 8.8 Viewing the Panel Cutter Status Screen

The Panel Cutter Status screen is divided into two sections:

• Inputs and Outputs
• Communication Status
For more information on the communication between the quilting machine and
panel cutter, see your Pro I or Pro ME operations manual. The Pro ME
Programmable Panel Cutter Operations and General Maintenance manual is part
number J513165050.

191 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

Viewing the System Log

Touch the View System Log icon to see the history of the machine. Use the scroll
bar, to the right and bottom of the screen, to scroll left or right to view the entire
length of information.

NOTE: This display-only screen is for authorized service and

maintenance personnel only.

Figure 8.9 Viewing the System Log

NOTE: Service and maintenance personnel will need a keyboard to

access the remaining sections of the System Log. See Gribetz
International Service Department for more information.

Paragon M 192
 Tools Screen Utilities

Copying Information from a CompactFlash Card

The Paragon M quilting machine is programmed with 30 to 50 standard patterns.
If your company requested optional pattern files, these are also programmed into
your computer. From time to time you may wish to add other pattern or system
files to your database. This action is called “loading” files. Additional files can be
loaded by modem. See “Using a Modem” on page 187.

NOTE: Pattern Shape (.ODE) files and Product Database (.DB) files
are received from Gribetz International with the necessary
structure on the CompactFlash cards. When loading your
backup files you will first need to create an Update folder.
Call Gribetz International Service Department for
instructions. Always store cards in a clean, dry place away
from excessive heat.

CAUTION: Any products in a databases (.DB) file that have the same
product identification name as a product in the main
database will overwrite the product in the main database.
Each product must have a unique identification name. See
“Creating a Product” on page 78 for more information on
product identifications.

CAUTION: Insert and remove the CompactFlash card only when the
computer is turned OFF. Failure to do so will damage the
card. Only authorized personnel should access the disk
drive or insert and remove the cards.

Figure 8.10 Inserting the CompactFlash Card into the Drive

193 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

To copy files from a CompactFlash card:

NOTE: Make sure the pattern files on the CompactFlash card are in
a folder titled UPDATE.

1 With the quilting machine off, insert a CompactFlash card (with files) in the
drive.

CAUTION: Any attempt to remove or insert a CompactFlash card with

power on, will permanently damage the CompactFlash card
drive.

2 Once the CompactFlash card is properly inserted, turn on the main power to
the machine.
3 Press the control power button.
4 The machine will automatically copy all files on the CompactFlash card to
the appropriate folders in the database.

Paragon M 194
 Tools Screen Utilities

Copying Information to a CompactFlash Card

You will want to keep a reserve copy of all files and databases in case of an
emergency. This action is called “backing up” files. You “back up” or save pattern
shape files and system files to one or more CompactFlash cards. Keep these files
in a separate location, preferably at another site. If you experience damage to your
system, damage to your site, or accidentally delete files, you will have a safety
back-up.

NOTE: Save Pattern Shape (*.ODE) files and Product Database

(*.DB) files on separate CompactFlash cards. Then, label the
cards with an identification and a date. Keep back-up cards
in a separate location. Store cards in a clean, dry place away
from excessive heat.

CAUTION: Insert and remove the CompactFlash card only when the
computer is turned OFF. Failure to do so will damage the
card. Only authorized personnel should access the disk
drive or insert and remove the cards.

To copy files to a CompactFlash card:

1 With the quilting machine off, place a blank CompactFlash card in the drive.
(See “Inserting the CompactFlash Card into the Drive” on page 193.)
2 Turn on main power to the machine and press the control power button.
3 From the Main Run screen, touch the Tools icon to access the Tools screen.

195 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Tools Screen

4 The Tools screen appears. Touch the Copy to Card icon.

NOTE: This is the only access to the Copy

screen. From the Copy screen you will
decide whether to copy files to or from
the system.

5 The Copy screen appears. Touch the Copy to Card icon (shown on left).

6 The Software Update screen appears. Select one of the following options or
touch the Cancel icon to return to the Tools screen.

Paragon M 196
 Tools Screen Utilities

a. Touch the PDS icon to copy pattern shape files.

b. Touch the Product icon to copy product files.

c. Touch the Database icon to copy system files.

d. Touch the Job Schedule Set Up icon to copy job files.

7 When all files are copied, touch the Check Okay icon to return to the Main
Run screen.

197 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

User Configuration Screen

The User Configuration screen is restricted to supervisory personnel. You must
have access to the passcode. If you have forgotten your passcode, call a Gribetz
International service technician for assistance. Before you call, you must have
your customer identification number and the machine's serial number. (See “How
to Get Additional Help” on page 6.)
From the User Configuration screen you can:
• set distance measurements
• set crop-out measurement
• set stop codes
• set the needle and carriage axes position
• select units of measurement, English or Metric
• select language
• change the security passcode
• security lock specific functions

set panel cutter distance set units of measurement

set top
stop code
material distance

set bottom
material distance easy zero

crop-out lock

set fill machine info

material distance

panel cutter passcode

info help current date and time check okay

Figure 8.11 User Configuration Screen

Paragon M 198
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

1 From the Main Run screen, touch the Tools icon.

2 The Tools screen appears. Touch the User Configuration icon.

NOTE: A passcode is required to access

the User Configuration screens. For
information about passcodes, see
“Setting System Security” on page 214 or
your supervisor.

3 A Passcode Keypad screen appears.

4 Type the passcode and touch Enter on the keypad.

5 The User Configuration screen appears.

199 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

So that features, such as the Stop Codes could be added, the appearance of the
User Configuration screen changed as of revisions 1.7 and again with 2.0..

Icons relevant to revisions up to 1.7. Icons relevant to revisions after 1.7.

The Machine Information icon is shown This Machine Information icon replaces
only on revisions prior to 1.7. the previous version and provides
additional information about the
machine.

The Reset Program icon is shown only on The Stop Codes icon is a new icon to
revisions prior to 1.7. revision 1.7.

Icons relevant to revisions up to 2.0. Icons relevant to revisions after 2.0

The Autoschedule icons are shown on The Panel Cutter icon is a new icon to
the User Configuration screen only on revision 2.0 and above.
revisions prior to 2.0.

Paragon M 200
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

Screens prior to revision 2.0. Screens after revision 2.0

Figure 8.12 User Configuration Screen Revision Levels Toggle To change

between two types of
operations.
NOTE: Some icons on the User Configuration screen allow you to
toggle between two choices. A Symbol I with a green
background indicates the feature is turned ON. A Symbol O
with a red background indicates the feature is turned OFF.

201 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

Setting Panel Cutter and Top, Bottom, and Fill

Material Distance
The set distance icons are dual touch; they are divided into two active icons.
Touch the left icon to access the pop-up keypad and set distance measurement.

Touch the right icon to enable or disable the station.

See also, “Determining Measurements for Splice Stations and Panel Cutter
Distance” on page 133 and “Entering Splice Station and Panel Cutter Distance
Measurements” on page 140.

Setting Crop-out Measurement

You will need to set the crop-out value into the quilting machine to notify the
quilting machine and programmable panel cutter of the exact length of waste
material to sew, cut, and discard. The recommended crop-out value is 8 to 12
inches (20.32 to 30.48cm). Start with 12 inches (20.32cm) and adjust as required.
Certain Pattern Link patterns are sewn using only the middle needle bar. If you
are sewing these patterns exclusively a crop-out of less than 8 inches may be used.
Touch the Crop-Out icon to access a pop-up keypad. Type the value, then
touch Enter to return to the User Configuration screen.

Paragon M 202
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

Setting Stop Codes and Machine Speed Defaults

Each time the machine stops, the system tracks the idle time. Should the machine
remain idle beyond the allowed time period, the system will request a reason for
the stop (Figure 8.13). These periods are then recorded in the database for
supervisory review.

Figure 8.13 Request for Stop Code

When the Stop Code screen appears, use the Arrow icons to select a reason why
the machine has stopped longer than the allowed idle period. Then, touch the
Check Okay icon.

NOTE: You must select a stop code or the machine will not operate.

From the Stop Code screen you can:

• set the default time period between when the machine stops and the Stop
Code screen appears
• set the default the minimum and maximum speed for the speed graph
• add stop codes
• delete stop codes
• edit stop code descriptions

203 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

To access the Stop Code Screen:

1 From the User Configuration screen, touch the Info icon.

2 The Stop code screen appears.

Paragon M 204
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

The Stop Code screen currently displays the following codes.

Table 8.1 Stop Codes

Code Definition
10 Looper Maintenance

20 Machine Cleaning

30 Unplanned Splice

40 Thread Replenish

50 Lunch

100 Break Time

110 Shift Change

120 Other

Setting the Stop Code Period

To set the allowed time period from when the machine stops to when the
system requests a reason for the stop:
1 Touch the Set Stop Code Period icon.

205 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

2 A pop-up keypad screen appears.

3 On the keypad, type the number of minutes to specify the time period
between when the machine stops and the Stop Code screen appears.

NOTE: To deactivate the stop code function, set the time period to 0.

4 Then, touch Enter.

5 The Stop Code screen reappears.

Setting the Minimum and Maximum Speed Defaults

The Speed Graph on the Main Run screen displays the minimum and
maximum default values for the machine speed.

minimum maximum

Figure 8.14 Setting the Minimum and Maximum Speed Defaults

Paragon M 206
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

To set the default for the minimum and maximum speed for the speed graph:
1 Touch the machine speed icons.

Touch the Machine Speed 1 icon to set

minimum speed.

Touch the Machine Speed 2 icon to set

maximum speed.

2 A pop-up keypad will appear.

3 Enter the minimum or maximum speed, then touch Enter.
4 The Stop Code screen reappears.

Adding a Stop Code

To add a stop code:
1 Touch the Add icon.

2 A pop-up screen appears.

3 Enter the new stop code number, from 1-9999, then touch Enter.

207 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

4 The Stop Code Description screen appears.

5 Enter the description, up to 20 characters, then touch Enter.

6 The Stop Code screen reappears with the new entry.

Editing a Stop Code

To edit a stop code:
1 Use the Arrow icons to scroll to and select the item to edit.
2 Touch the Stop Code Description icon.

3 The Stop Code Description screen appears.

4 Type the new description, then touch Enter.

5 The Stop Code screen reappears.

Paragon M 208
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

Deleting a Stop Code

To delete a stop code:
1 Use the Arrow icons to scroll to and select the item to delete.

2 With a job selected, touch the Delete icon.

3 A pop-up screen will appear asking you to confirm the request.

Touch the Check Okay icon to delete the

stop code.

Touch the Cancel icon to disregard the

request.

4 The Stop Code screen reappears with the selected stop code deleted from
the list.

209 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

Setting Needle and Carriage Axis Positions with

Easy Zero
Home Also known as Easy Zero is a feature used to automatically set the needle axis position to UP and
“home position”. A
the carriage axis position to HOME. Maintenance and service personnel will need
designated starting
position for specific to use the feature whenever they disconnect the needle or carriage motors or if
components. they change drives.

Setting the Needle Axis Position

To set the needle axis to UP:
1 From the User Configuration screen, touch the Easy Zero icon.

Initialize The machine’s 2 The User Configuration - Easy Zero screen appears. Touch the Needle
search for its “home” Initialize icon.
parameter; the machine
moves or sews to the
pattern’s start position.

3 Press the start button. The screen turns red.

4 Press the E-Stop button to turn the machine off. You will need to restart
the machine.

NOTE: You do not need to turn the machine power OFF.

Paragon M 210
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

Setting the Carriage Axis Position

To set the carriage axis position to home:
1 From the User Configuration screen, touch the Easy Zero icon.

2 The User Configuration - Easy Zero screen appears. Touch the Carriage
Initialize icon.

3 The carriage will seek home position, come off of home position, and
then set zero.
4 After the carriage axis sets zero, the screen turns red.
5 Press any E-Stop button to turn the machine OFF.
6 Restart the machine.

NOTE: You must shut the machine down and then restart after
setting the carriage axis each time. This allows the machine
to save the position. After setting the carriage axis, the
machine will not operate until you power OFF/ON..

211 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

Setting Units of Measurement

The Paragon M quilting machine allows you to work in either English or Metric
measurements.
To select a unit of measurement, touch the Units icon to toggle between English
(E) and Metric (M).

This screen is set to English units. This screen is set to Metric units.

Paragon M 212
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

Setting Language
Currently language selection is English only. Manuals translated in other
languages are available on request. Contact the Gribetz International Parts
Department. See also, “Help Screen” on page 222.

213 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

Setting System Security

Certain screens on the machine should be restricted to maintenance or
supervisory personnel. When restricted, these screens will require a passcode for
access to view or modify the screens. We recommend that you change the
passcode often to prevent unauthorized personnel entry to these screens.
You will need the original passcode number to proceed.
To change the passcode protection number:
1 From the User Configuration screen, touch the Passkey icon.

Screen prior to revision 1.7 Screen after revisions 1.7 and 2.0

2 A Passcode Keypad screen appears.

NOTE: A pop-up screen will notify you

should you enter an incorrect passcode.

3 Type the new passcode and touch Enter on the keypad.

Paragon M 214
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

4 The User Configuration screen appears. All passcode protected functions

will now respond to the new passcode.

CAUTION: Always write down your passcode and keep it safe. If you
forget your passcode it may require a service call from the
Gribetz International Service Department.

215 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

Locking Functions
You can lock certain functions of the machine to restrict access from unauthorized
personnel. These choices are detailed in Table 8.2 “Lock Screen Definitions” on
page 218.
1 From the User Configuration screen, touch the Lock icon.

2 The Lock screen appears.

Figure 8.15 Lock Screen

3 Touch each icon to select whether a function can be accessed with or without
a passcode. A locked icon requires a passcode to access that function. Table

Paragon M 216
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

8.2, “Lock Screen Definitions” identifies each icon. See also, Table C.1
“Glossary of Icons” on page 369.

NOTE: Each icon allows you to toggle

between two choices:

locked

unlocked

4 When your selections are complete, touch the Check Okay icon to accept the
changes.
5 The User Configuration screen appears.

217 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

Table 8.2 Lock Screen Definitions

Icon Definition
first row

machine speed Touch this icon to lock or unlock the functionality of the speed
graph on the Main Run screen to change machine speed.

fill#1 Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to all material distance
stations measurements: top, backing, and fills.

product yield Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to reset the number of
counter yards (or meters) sewn for the current product

look ahead Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the Look Ahead screen
to view or modify the job schedule.

lube Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to prime the auto-
lubrication lines and set the time intervals for the auto-lubrication
cycle.

view system Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to be able to view the
log system history log.

Paragon M 218
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

Icon Definition
second row

floater bar Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to position the floater bar.

stitch density Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to be able to change stitch
density (number of stitches per inch).

tools Touch this icon to lock or unlock access the Tools screen.

help Future feature. Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to all Help
screens.

set presser foot Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to be able to toggle the
presser foot between HI (up) or LOW (down) from the Main Run
screen.
NOTE: The machine will automatically respond to the preselected
presser foot position with each job. Default position is HI (up).
The gray background indicates that the presser foot is in the
DOWN position.
The green background indicates that the presser foot is in the UP
position.

motion system Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the Quilter Control
controller Status screen.

219 Quilting Machine

 Utilities User Configuration Screen

Icon Definition
third row

set loop take Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to be able to activate Loop
time Take Time.

modem Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to modem operations.

product Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the Product Information
screen to create or modify products.

info Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the System Information
screen.

time Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to set the time or date.

panel cutter Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the Panel Cutter Status
status screen.

Paragon M 220
 User Configuration Screen Utilities

Icon Definition
fourth row

product Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the Product

identification Identification screen to select new products.

panel distance Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the panel cutter distance
measurement.

thread Touch this icon to lock or unlock this feature.

copy to card Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the Copy screen to
backup or enter new files to or from the computer.

user Touch this icon to lock or unlock access to the User Configuration
configuration screen.

221 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Help Screen

Help Screen
A new feature to the Paragon M series quilting machines is the Help screen. On
each screen you will find a Help icon.

Touch this icon to activate the Help function for the current screen. The yellow
highlighted areas provide quick reference. Figure 8.16 shows a sample of screens
with the Help function activated.

Product Identification Screen Tools Screen

User Configuration Screen Lock Screen

Figure 8.16 Help Screens

Paragon M 222
 Help Screen Utilities

A future feature of the Paragon M series quilting machines will be the Help Text
screen. With the Help screen active, touch any icon to access the Help Text screen
to see additional information specific to that icon. This feature will include
English text followed by translated text in several languages. Use the scroll bars to
the right of the screen to locate the language of your choice. Figure 8.17 shows the
Help Text screen as accessed from the Clone icon on the Product Information
screen.

Figure 8.17 Help Text Screen (a future feature)

223 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Help Screen

Information Screen
The Information (Info) Screen provides the following information specific to your
Paragon M quilting machine.
• Model number
• Serial number
• Software revision level
• Maximum carriage travel (inches or centimeters)
• Maximum speed
• Loop Take Time default (typically 232 degrees)
• Tack & Jump capability
• Pattern Link capability
• Batch Mode capability
• Maximum and total available system memory
• Maximum and total available system storage
• Maximum and total available CompactFlash drive
On most screens you will find the Info icon.

Touch the icon to access the Info screen. The information on this screen cannot be
altered. Should you require additional features, such as Pattern Link capability,
contact your Gribetz International Sales Representative for upgrade information.

Figure 8.18 Information Screen

Paragon M 224
 Review Utilities

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 To make sure that the thread detectors are activated, access the _______
screen and verify that the Thread Detector icon indicates the ON status.
2 Which of the following icons toggle between two choices:
a. Thread detector

b. Presser foot

c. Units

d. All of the above

3 ____ ____ is feature used to set the needle axis position to UP and the
carriage axis position to home.
4 True or False. Copying Pattern Shape (*.ode) files from a CompactFlash card
may overwrite existing files.
5 To set system parameters, you must first have access to the system _______.
6 Store back-up files in a _______ .
7 True or False. Save Pattern Shape (*.ODE) files and Product Database (*.DB)
files on separate CompactFlash cards.
8 True or False. Do not connect the modem through your PBX or digital phone
system.
9 True or False. Do not operate the quilting machine while performing modem
operations.
10 The _________ screen is where you set system utilities.
11 When priming the auto-lubrication system, the machine will continue to
prime the lines until you do what?
12 The auto-lubrication cycle can be set for 1-10 minutes. What is the
recommended setting.
a. 3
b. 5
c. 7
d. 10

225 Quilting Machine

 Utilities Review

13 The adjustable presser foot default is set to:

a. HI
b. LOW
14 True or False. If you loaded pattern shape files, make sure you build a
product file or the pattern will not be represented with an icon on the
Product Selection screen.
15 True or False. The Machine Throughput Counter can be used to track
employee performance.
16 The ________ ________ ________ screen displays the operational state of the
machine.
17 The ________ ________ ________ screen displays the history of the machine.
18 True or False. Insert or remove the CompactFlash card only when the
machine is turned off.
19 The Lock screen is accessed from the _________ _____________ screen.
20 True or False. Each time the machine stops, the system tracks the idle time.

Paragon M 226
 Types of Material Loading Material

Loading Material
9
This chapter discusses how to replenish material and thread. You will learn:
• About the different types of material
• How to layer materials
• How to change materials using the product scheduling system
• How to replenish material
• How to use the bag closer attachment
• About the different types of thread
• How to thread material through the quilting machine
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions: Grip Roller Holds the
material tube to prevent
1 If you are using the product scheduling system, how do you know when to the material from
change the material? unrolling. Typically used
for backing material and
2 When do you replenish material? with the Material Wind-up
3 When do you replenish thread? option.

4 How does a grip roller function?

NOTE: The Paragon M quilting machine arrives from the factory

with an initial quantity of material and thread. Attach your
own materials and thread to this initial quantity.

Types of Material
The quilting industry uses many types of material, each with a specific purpose. Damask Woven ticking
produced on a loom. The
These types of material are generally separated into three categories:
design is woven into the
• Ticking fabric rather than printed
on the surface.
• Fill material
• Backing Polyester A synthetic
fiber made from a chemical
Ticking is a strong, tightly woven, decorative or finished fabric for covering composition of diethyl
mattresses and foundations. It is also known as “top material.” Common types terephthalate and ethylene
glycol.
include: damask, knit, print, woven stripe, and non-woven.
Fill material provides density to the finished product. Many types of fill materials
are used, such as; foam, polyester, wool, and cotton.

227 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Types of Thread

Backing is a thinner material. Its function is to protect fill materials, allowing

materials to move smoothly under the presser foot plate. It is also known as
“bottom material.” The backing also acts as a carrier for the fill and top materials
and as an anchor for stitches. If the backing is feeding loosely through the
machine, the fill and top materials will not be pulled through the machine
consistently which may cause pattern distortion and wrinkling. (See “Adjusting
Patterns” on page 278.)
To clearly identify how to layer these materials, think of a sandwich, where the
top and bottom material encase the filling (or fill material).
Fabric Tails The back Except for certain maintenance procedures, maintain a continuous flow of
edge of material. The edge
material during the life of the quilting machine. Do not deplete fabric tails.
of material that enters or
exits the machine last. Also
called the “trailing edge.” CAUTION: During normal operation, never allow the trailing edge of
backing, fills, or top (ticking) materials to move past the
infeed rollers. Doing so may result in serious damage to the
machine.

Tenacity A term relating Types of Thread

to the strength per size of
thread and is generally We ship each Paragon M quilting machine with one case of top (needle) thread
measured in grams per and one case of bottom (looper) thread. These starter cases are for installation
denier. Threads made from
continuous filament fibers purposes only. Order additional thread prior to operating the quilting machine.
are stronger and have a
higher tenacity than thread We recommend using only high quality thread. For proper loop formation, use
made from staple fibers. three-ply 150 denier for top thread and two-ply 150 denier for bottom thread. See
Continuous Filament Figure 9.1 for proper loop formation.
Refers to synthetic fibers of
an indefinite length. NOTE: Keep thread in clean, dry condition. Store thread in
consistent environmental conditions.
Denier Denotes the size,
the weight, and the
strength of the thread.
Refers to a sizing system Loop Take Time Loop Take Time
used for continuous
filaments. Denier is the
gram weight of 9000
meters of sewing thread.
Needle Rising Needle Rising
Ply/Plies Refers to the
number of singles yarns
twisted together to make a
sewing thread. Most core
and spun sewing threads Improper Loop Formation Proper Loop Formation
have either two or three
ply constructions. The ply
twist is normally a “Z” or
Figure 9.1 Proper Loop Formation
left twist compared to an
“S” or right twist in the
single yarns.

Paragon M 228
 Loading Material Loading Material

Testing for Twisted Thread

Twisting threads can cause thread breakage or skipped stitches during the sewing Skipped Stitches Refers
to malformed stitches that
process. To test for twisting thread, remove the spool from the thread rack and
are caused when a stitch-
pull off approximately three feet of thread from the spool. While holding one end forming device misses its
in each hand, bring your hands together. If the thread does not twist together, or appropriate loop. On chain
stitch machines, skipped
if it makes only two to three twists, the thread is satisfactory. If you see several stitches can unravel
twists, there is probably a manufacturing defect in the thread. Refer to your allowing the seam to fail.

thread supplier. Twist In thread

construction, “twist” refers
to the number of turns
Loading Material around the axis. The
direction of the twist can
The ticking material should feed through the machine in the following order: be an “S” or “Z” direction.
Generally, sewing threads
• Around the spreader bars are made with a “Z” twist
• Under the floater bar because most sewing
machine stitch forming
• Through the pinch rollers devices enter the needle
• Under the spiral-wrapped precompression rollers loop from the right-hand
side and this reduces the
• Into the presser foot plate
unplying of the thread
during sewing.

Figure 9.2 Path of Ticking Material

If the ticking is not feeding through the pinch rollers, the machine cannot evenly
pull the ticking in a backwards motion. Without even motion, pattern distortion
will appear. (See “Adjusting Tension” on page 275 and “Adjusting Patterns” on
page 278 in Chapter 10, “Sewing Adjustments”.)
Fill materials should feed through the machine in the following order:
• Under the floater bar
• Through the pinch rollers
• Under the spiral-wrapped precompression roller
• Into the presser foot plate

229 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Replenishing Material

Under Floater Bar Through Pinch Roller Under Precompression

Roller

Figure 9.3 Path of Fill Material

If the materials are not feeding through the pinch rollers, the machine cannot
evenly pull the materials in a backwards motion. Without even motion, pattern
distortion will appear. (See “Adjusting Tension” on page 275 and “Adjusting
Patterns” on page 278 in Chapter 10, “Sewing Adjustments”.)

Replenishing Material
When operating the machine in batch mode, the machine will notify you of needle
setting and material changes for each job. When the system identifies a material
change, the quilting machine stops and the background of the appropriate icon
changes color to teal. Before the computer can inform you of a material change,
you must ensure that splicing stations and product information are properly
entered. See Chapter 7, “Working with Batches” starting on page 131.
However, the machine does not know when material is low or about to run out.
Therefore, you will need to request a material change.

NOTE: Replenishment procedures must be consistent.

CAUTION: Do not allow material to become low or to move past the

front feed rollers.

To replenish material:
1 If you are in batch mode, the machine will identify the name of the material
on the Main Run screen, that is, the background of the appropriate icon
changes from gray to teal, the name of the new material is under the icon.

Paragon M 230
 Replenishing Material Loading Material

2 The machine will search for and stop at the next available splice point in the
job schedule, typically a panel boundary.
3 If you are in single product mode, touch the icon of the material you wish to
replenish. The background color of the icon changes from gray to blue.
4 Replenish material(s).
5 After changing material, touch the icon to indicate to the machine that the
change was made.
6 Press the start button to resume sewing. The machine will continue sewing
the current schedule.

WARNING: Due to the nature of these materials, static electricity may be

present.

Replenishing Top Material (Ticking)

NOTE: In the following steps, Material A is the current material

(white); Material B is the new material (gray).

To replenish top material:

1 Select the replenishment material.
2 Locate the station for the top material.
3 Position the bag closing attachment to the near side. See “Using the Bag
Closing Attachment to Splice Top Material” on page 234.
4 Adjust the spreader bar to the splice position.
5 Bring the floater bar to the splice position.
6 Bring the material A toward you over the radius of the trough to the Trough A long, narrow,
predetermined splice station (approximately 1 to 2 inches (2.54cm to 5.08cm) generally shallow
below the clamps). receptacle. On the quilting
machine, the trough holds
the ticking.
Material A

clamp

splice station

7 Clamp the material in place. See Figure 9.4 “Clamping Device” on page 233.
8 Cut material A at the splice station (approximately 1 to 2 inches (2.54cm to
5.08cm) below the clamps).

231 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Replenishing Material

9 Unclamp and lift the fabric tail away from the material in the trough.
Material A

10 Release the clamps (or stabilizer plates) in the trough at the near and far
ends.
11 Remove material A from the trough.
12 Place material B in the trough. (This is the new roll of top material.)
Material A

Material B

Leading Edge The edge 13 Bring the leading edge of the material B (the new material) toward you over
of material that unrolls the radius of the trough to approximately 1 to 2 inches (2.54cm to 5.08cm)
from the material roll. The below the clamps.
first edge to enter or exit
the machine. 14 Bring the fabric tail of material A (the fabric tail of the previous material)
toward you over the radius of the trough.
15 Align material ends and secure with the clamps.

Material A
splice with
bag closer
Material B

16 Using the bag closing attachment, splice material ends together.

CAUTION: Do not use metal staples to splice materials, as they may

cause damage to needles.

17 Rotate top material in trough to roll up slack.

18 Replace the clamps (or stabilizer plates) and secure them against the
material in the trough.
19 Return the floater bar to the proper sewing position.

Paragon M 232
 Replenishing Material Loading Material

20 Adjust the spreader bars to apply the correct tension. For details on
adjusting tension, refer to Chapter 10, “Sewing Adjustments” and Chapter
12, “Troubleshooting.”

NOTE: Remember to replenish materials for all of the selected icons.

Figure 9.4 Clamping Device

Magic bar Trough

Figure 9.5 Material Trough with Top Material and Magic Bar

233 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Replenishing Material

Using the Bag Closing Attachment to Splice Top Material

All Paragon M quilting machines include a bag closing attachment. Use this
attachment to splice top material. This attachment, or “bagger,” is connected to
the front of the machine during installation. It is located below the material
trough.

NOTE: We provide detailed information for the Union Special

Portable Bag Closing Machine in a separate manual, which is
included as part of your installation package. Please read
this information carefully before operating the bag closing
machine.

Figure 9.6 Bag Closing Attachment

Paragon M 234
 Replenishing Material Loading Material

Replenishing Fill Material

To replenish fill material:
1 Select the replenishment material.
2 Locate the station for the fill material.
3 Cut the current fill material at the designated cutting and splicing station.

NOTE: At some cutting stations, you may need to allow sufficient

slack to top fill materials so that you can replenish bottom
fill materials. You may also find it necessary to cut top fill
materials to gain access to bottom fill materials.

4 Lift the roller from the holders.

5 Remove the clamp (or stabilizer plate).

NOTE: Some material handling packs have two clamps. If you have
this style, remove the clamp on the side away from the
tension pulley.

6 Remove current fill materials.

WARNING: These materials are generally heavy and may require more
than one person to remove them. Exercise extreme caution.

7 Place the replenishment material on the roller.

8 Replace the clamp (or stabilizer plate) and secure it against the material.
9 Return the roller to the holders.
10 Attach previous material to new replenishment material using a method
approved by your factory. For further assistance, contact a Gribetz
International service technician.

CAUTION: Do not use metal staples to splice material, as they may

cause damage to needles.

11 Rotate fill material to roll up slack.

12 Adjust side-to-side placement of the roll of material as required.
13 Secure and apply tension. Torque The amount of
force you apply to a type of
lever arm, such as a
CAUTION: Do not over torque the tension knobs.
wrench, to produce a
twisting or a rotating
motion.

235 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Replenishing Material

Replenishing Bottom Material (Backing)

To replenish backing material:
1 Select the replenishment material.
2 Locate the station for the backing material.
3 Cut the current backing material at a predetermined splicing station.

NOTE: To gain access to the backing material, you may need to cut
fill materials or allow sufficient slack to fill materials.

4 Remove the current backing material and roller from the station.
5 Lift the material roller from the near and far side.

NOTE: You may need to release the brake on the near side and the
pin on the far side before removing the material roller from
the backing station. See Figure 9.7 and Figure 9.8.

Grip roller

Pin

Figure 9.7 Grip Roller and Pin

Brake

Figure 9.8 Brake

6 Place the material and the roller on the floor.

Paragon M 236
 Replenishing Material Loading Material

7 Slide the current backing material off the roller. If your roller is a grip roller,
rotate the roller until it unlocks, then slide the roller off the material.

WARNING: This procedure may require two people. Exercise extreme

caution.

8 Place the replenishment material on the grip roller.

NOTE: The leading edge of the material unrolls from under the roll
away from the quilting machine.

9 After you position the replenishment material on the grip roller, rotate the
grip roller until it locks.
10 Return the grip roller with the replenished material to the holders.
11 Reset the pin on the far side and lock the brake on the near side.

CAUTION: Do not use metal staples to splice material, as they may

cause damage to needles.

12 After the new bottom material passes under the presser foot, rotate the
tension knob on the brake (near side) to increase or decrease tension.

CAUTION: Do not over torque the tension knob.

237 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Replenishing Material

Loading Material through the Machine

We load a section of material prior to shipping your machine. Splice your material
stock to this material (ticking, fill and backing). You should only have to reload
material for certain maintenance procedures. Should you allow material to
become low and move past the front feed rollers you will need to reload material.

WARNING: Keep hands and loose clothing free from the mechanical
moving parts of the machine. Failure to do this could result
in serious physical injury.

To load material through the machine:

1 Stop the machine by pressing the normal stop button.
2 Load the appropriate material according to the material routing diagram
shown in Figure 9.9, “Material Path”.
3 Press the start button and ensure that the new materials load through the
machine correctly.

Figure 9.9 Material Path

Paragon M 238
 Lacing the Threads Loading Material

Lacing the Threads

Constantly monitor the thread supply. Always replenish thread before it runs out.
The thread detectors signal you only after top thread has run out. The system will
not signal you when bottom thread runs out.
Always cut or trim thread. Do not pull thread to break it or it may bend or break Eyelet A small thread
guide.
the needle. When tying new thread to old thread, manually pull the thread knot
through the needle eyelet to avoid thread breaks.

Lacing the Top Thread

Thread detectors signal you when top thread breaks, or when thread has run out.
We recommend that you constantly monitor the thread supply and replenish
thread before this occurs.
To lace the top thread:
1 Press the stop button.
2 Ensure the needle bar is up in the regular stop position.
3 Ensure that the upper thread rack is properly installed and secure.
4 Place spools on the thread rack.

NOTE: Check tension discs for dust prior to lacing thread. Dust
build-up causes incorrect tension.

5 Facing the spools, bring thread straight off the spool and through the first
eyelet directly in front of the spool. Thread passes through the eyelet directly
toward you.

NOTE: Lace thread through the material handling rack using the
eyelets directly in front of the corresponding spool.
6 Lace thread through the tension disc on the material handling pack. Pass the Tension Disc A metal
thread under the tension disc from left to right. Ensure thread is between the disc specifically designed
discs. Do not wrap thread around the tension spring. to apply tension to thread.

NOTE: Ensure these tension discs have minimal tension.

7 Continue threading the material handling pack.

8 Lace thread through the tension disc on the quilting machine. The thread
must pass over the tension disc from left to right. Ensure thread is between
the discs. Do not wrap thread around the tension spring. (Figure 9.10)

NOTE: For Tack & Jump patterns, use pneumatic-actuated tension

discs.

239 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Lacing the Threads

Figure 9.10 Lacing Top Thread

9 Lace the thread through the thread detector. Thread passes through the top
of the thread detector, through the bail, in front of the clear fishing line, and
through the bottom of the thread detector. (Figure 9.11)

45º min. Light

no light

Bail tension
light adjustment

Bail tension

Light activator
sensitivity adjustment
Side View

NOTE: Be sure to remove the bail (pivot pin) from the rubber band
before threading the thread detector.

Figure 9.11 Lacing the Thread Detector

Paragon M 240
 Lacing the Threads Loading Material

10 Lace thread through the upper butterfly rod and guide bars.

a
b
c NOTE:
d a. Behind guide bar

b. Under rear butterfly rod

Not shown in photo - do not forget!
e
c. Through eyelet on guide bar

d. Over front butterfly guide rod

e. Through eyelet on guide bar

f. Through porcelain eyelet

g. Through needle

Figure 9.12 Lacing Top Thread Through Guide Bars

11 Lace the thread, from top to bottom, through the eyelets. Pneumatic-Actuated
Tension Discs Used
NOTE: Some machines have a porcelain eyelet before the needle. when sewing Tack & Jump
Always lace thread through these eyelets when sewing Tack patterns. During the
& Jump and Pattern Link patterns. “jump,” compressed air is
exerted on a bar behind the
12 Thread the needle. Leave approximately 6 to 8 inches (15.24cm to 20.32cm) discs allowing the bar to
make contact with a pin in
of thread tail. For details on mounting and threading needles, refer to each of these discs, thereby
Chapter 10, “Sewing Adjustments.” releasing all tension
during the “jump”
segment of the pattern.

241 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Lacing the Threads

Lacing the Bottom Thread

The bottom thread rack is positioned beneath the quilting machine in the back
(rear). This thread rack may move during operation. We recommend that you
securely anchor this rack after the quilting machine installation. A Gribetz
International technician can assist you with this procedure.
The machine does not signal you when the thread supply runs out. We
recommend that you constantly monitor the thread supply.
To lace the bottom thread:
1 Press the stop button.
2 Ensure the needle bar is up, in the regular stop position.

NOTE: At this time, you may want to perform any maintenance or

troubleshooting procedures that require the needle bar to be
in the UP position.

3 Ensure that the lower thread rack is properly installed.

4 Place spools on the thread rack.

NOTE: Check tension discs for dust prior to lacing thread. Dust
build-up causes incorrect tension.

5 Facing the spools, bring thread straight off the spool and through the first
eyelet directly in front of the spool. Thread passes through the eyelet directly
toward you. (Figure 9.13.)
6 Lace the thread underneath and behind the 1/4 inch guide rod. (Figure 9.13.)
7 Lace thread in front of the 3/8 inch guide rod, then between the tensioner
assembly. (Figure 9.13.)

NOTE: Use the thread detector threading tool to reach this area.

Actuate To put into 8 From behind the guide bar, lace the thread toward you and through the
mechanical action or eyelet, then through the tension disc. The thread must pass under the
motion. tension disc from left to right. Ensure thread is between the discs. (Figure
9.13. and Figure 9.14)

NOTE: For Tack & Jump patterns, use the pneumatic-actuated

tension discs.

Paragon M 242
 Lacing the Threads Loading Material

Figure 9.13 Lacing Bottom Thread Rack

to thread guide to thread guide

Eyelet

Spring
Tension bar
from thread guide from thread guide

Side View Front View

Figure 9.14 Lacing the Tension Disc (Bottom Thread)

10 Lace thread, from bottom to top, through the next eyelet.

243 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Lacing the Threads

Figure 9.15 Lacing Bottom Thread

11 Lace thread over the 3/8 inch aluminum lower thread guide rod. (Figure
9.15)
12 Lace thread under and behind the 3/8 inch rear butterfly guide rod. (Figure
9.15)
13 Lace thread, from bottom to top, through the next eyelet on the rear butterfly
rod. (Figure 9.15)
14 The next guide rod is a double guide bar and contains two parallel rows of
eyelets. Thread the first (bottom) row of eyelets from bottom to top. Thread
the second (rear) row of eyelets from front to back. (Figure 9.15 and Figure
9.16)

Paragon M 244
 Lacing the Threads Loading Material

Center
Front Note 2
Note 1 Double guide bar
Center
Front Note 2
Note 1 Rear
Center Note 3
Note 2
Front
Rear
Note 1
Note 3

NOTES:
1. Front (or first) needle bar. Lace thread through first and second eyelets.
2. Center (or middle) needle bar. Lace thread through first and second eyelets.
3. Rear (or third) needle bar. Lace thread through first eyelet only. Bypass second
eyelet.

Figure 9.16 Lacing the Double Guide Bar

NOTE: Use the second row only for the front and the middle
loopers. When threading the rear loopers, bypass this eyelet.
See Figure 9.16, Note 3.

15 Thread the looper. Leave approximately 6 to 8 inches (15.24cm to 20.32cm) of

thread tail. For details on how to thread the looper, see Chapter 10, “Sewing
Adjustments”, “Threading Loopers” on page 263.

245 Quilting Machine

 Loading Material Review

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 True or False. If the quilting machine stops and a material station icon
illuminates, replenish the material associated with that icon before resuming
sewing functions.
2 The term ________ identifies a decorative or finished top material.
3 ________ material provides density to the finished product.
4 True or False. Needle (or top thread) is typically three-ply 150 denier.
5 Use ________ tension discs whenever you sew Tack & Jump patterns.
6 True or False. Thread detectors signal you only when the top thread breaks
or has run out.
7 When lacing top thread on the material handling pack, pass the thread:
(Choose one.)
a. under the tension disc from left to right.
b. under the tension disc from right to left.
c. over the tension disc from left to right.
d. over the tension disc from right to left.
8 For Tack & Jump patterns, leave approximately _____ to _____ inches of
thread tail.
9 True or False. Batch mode notifies you only of scheduled material changes.
10 The type of roller that you rotate to unlock is called a _________ roller.

Paragon M 246
 Sewing Adjustments

Sewing Adjustments
10
This chapter provides you with detailed instructions for how to fine tune your
quilting machine. After reading this chapter, you should be able to fully
understand the relationship between needles, loopers, and retainers and their
function.
You will learn:
• How to mount and thread needles.
• How to mount and thread loopers.
• How to set retainers and trimmers.
• How to adjust material tension.
• How to adjust thread tension.
• How to modify a pattern.
• How to correct pattern distortion. Distortion/To Distort
To twist or bend out of
In addition, this chapter answers the following questions:
shape. Occurs when the
1 What is a chain stitch? machine pulls material in
more than one direction, or
2 What is the Needle Setting Code System? when thick material is
used, especially during
3 What is the Pyramid Needle Setting System? changes in pattern
4 What is Loop Take Time? direction.

5 What are loopers, retainers, and trimmers?

247 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments What is a Chain Stitch?

What is a Chain Stitch?

General Services According to the General Services Administration, Federal Standard No. 751a, a chain
Administration One of stitch is defined as a Class 400, Type 401 stitch.
the three central
management agencies in During stitch formation, the needle, laced with thread, penetrates the material in
the Federal Government.
an up and down motion. On the downward motion the needle brings the thread
to the underside of the material. The presser foot also moves to the down position.
The needle then returns to the up position. The presser foot remains in the down
position momentarily before returning to the up position.
Pre-Load A procedure During the period when the needle is on its way up, and the presser foot is still
defining the lateral (left to
down, the thread creates a loop. As this loop is created, the looper moves forward
right) pressure of the
looper against the needle. and catches the loop, bringing the bottom thread into the loop as well. The needle
must be set to the looper with the appropriate pre-load. (See “Adjusting Loopers”
on page 259, “Setting Loop Take Time” on page 266, and “Setting Pre-Load” on
page 269.)
While the looper holds the top and bottom thread, the retainer (or trimmer)
spreads these threads simultaneously into a triangle. After the top and bottom
threads are spread, the needle returns to the down position, penetrating the
triangle. While the needle is in the down position, the looper moves backward
releasing the top and bottom thread and a new stitch is created. The interlooping
created by the top and bottom stitches are then drawn against the underside of
the material. This complex interlacing and interlooping is shown in Figure 10.1,
“Stitch Formation.”
To ensure the carefully balanced relationship between the needle and the looper,
it is important that all needles, loopers, retainers, and trimmers are positioned
correctly, and that proper tension is applied throughout the quilting machine.
You can observe the creation of a stitch from the rear of the sewing box by
slowing the quilting machine to 5 RPM.

Figure 10.1 Stitch Formation

Paragon M 248
 What is the Needle Setting Code System? Sewing Adjustments

What is the Needle Setting Code System?

The Needle Setting Code System is Gribetz International's coding system to
describe needle placement. This section discusses needle placement specific to
Paragon M quilting machine.
Needle codes describe the location of the needles, their placement on the bars, and
the distance between the needles. A combination of characters and numerals
make up these codes. Figure 10.5, “Typical Needle Settings” on page 251, displays
three examples of typical needle setting codes.
The Paragon M quilting machines have three needle bars placed directly behind
one another:
• First (or front) bar
• Second (or middle) bar
• Third (or rear) bar.

The distance between each bar is 3" (7.62cm); that is, 3" (7.62cm) from the front to
middle bar, and 3" (7.62cm) from the middle to rear bar, which makes the distance
from the front to the rear bar 6" (15.24cm). See Figure 10.2, “Needle Bar
Placement”.

Figure 10.2 Needle Bar Placement

249 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments What is the Needle Setting Code System?

The needles on each bar are held in slots (grooves) by a needle screw. These slots
are located 1 inch (2.54cm) apart. This 1-inch (2.54cm) distance is measured from
the center of one slot to the center of the next slot. For a 90-inch machine, each
needle bar holds up to 90 needles; from slot #1 to slot #90. For a 110-inch machine,
each needle bar holds up to 110 needles, from slot #1 to slot #110. Always place
the first needle of any arrangement in slot #3 on the front bar. Place the remaining
needles in the order each code specifies.
The first character of a needle code determines if needles are placed as singles or
pairs. This character is followed by an “x”.
• “s” represents single needle (sx6-3, sx3-1)
• “d” represents pairs directly behind one another (dx3-2, dx6-3)
• numeric (3 or 6) represents pairs that are side by side (3x3-3)
The next character of a needle code indicates the spacing, in inches, between each
single needle or pair.

Figure 10.3 Needle Spacing

The last character indicates in which bar the next single or pair of needles is
placed.
• 1 to the front bar
• 2 to the middle bar
• 3 to the rear bar

Figure 10.4 Determining Needle Spacing

Figure 10.5, “Typical Needle Settings” illustrates three typical needle settings. In
the first illustration, the needle setting sx3-2 indicates a single needle setting with
needles spaced 3" (7.62cm) apart, alternating between the front and middle bars.
In the second illustration, the needle setting dx3-3 indicates pairs placed directly
behind one another on the front and rear bars. Then, the spacing from one pair to

Paragon M 250
 What is the Needle Setting Code System? Sewing Adjustments

the next pair is 3" (7.62cm) apart. In the third illustration, the needle setting 3x3-3
indicates that the spacing between each pair (on the same bar) is 3" (7.62cm). Then
the spacing from one pair to the next pair is 3" (7.62cm) apart, alternating between
the front and rear bars.

Figure 10.5 Typical Needle Settings

251 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments What is the Pyramid Needle Setting System?

What is the Pyramid Needle Setting System?

The Paragon M quilting machines are ideal for customers who quilt the majority
of their materials using the three-inch Pyramid System. The pyramid needle
system consists of three different needle placements: sx6-3, sx3-2-3, and 3x3-3. Use
these three settings to quilt a wide variety of designs from one pattern, simply by
adjusting the length and width of the pattern shape.
Quilting with pyramid needle settings allows you to satisfy production and
marketing needs. Production is more efficient due to limited needle changes, and
marketing demands are satisfied by the ability to quilt many exciting patterns
with the same settings.
With the base setting of sx6-3 in place, add or remove needles to create the
additional needle settings: sx3-2-3 and 3x3-3. By using the pyramid needle
settings, it is possible to quilt at least eight distinctively different designs from one
pattern.

NOTE: Most Class III (360-degree continuous patterns) and Class IV

(Tack & Jump patterns) use the base setting of sx6-3.

For more information on the needle setting code system, call our Pattern
Development and Styling Studio at (954) 846-0300 or (800) 326-4742.

Figure 10.6 Pyramid Needle Settings

Paragon M 252
 What is Loop Take Time? Sewing Adjustments

What is Loop Take Time?

Loop Take Time is a patented synchronization procedure for parts in motion. It
defines the carefully balanced relationship between the needle and the looper.
During the Loop Take Time procedure, the needle drive motor automatically
locks in the Loop Take Time position.

253 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments What are Loopers, Retainers, and Trimmers?

What are Loopers, Retainers, and Trimmers?

The looper's function is to catch the thread loop created by the needle and to bring
the bottom thread into the thread triangle. (See “What is a Chain Stitch?” on
page 248.) It is very important that the looper and its related parts are in
complete alignment with each other. “Setting Loop Take Time” on page 268
discusses these specific “timing” procedures.

Needle
Looper

Figure 10.7 Looper

The retainer's function is to hold and spread the thread into a triangle as part of
stitch formation. Use the retainer for all Class I-III patterns.
The trimmer's function is the same as the retainer, except the trimmer cuts the
thread after the “tack” and during the “jump”. You must use the trimmer for all
Tack & Jump and Pattern Link patterns.

Figure 10.8 Trimmer and Retainer

Paragon M 254
 Checking Supplies Sewing Adjustments

Checking Supplies
You receive the following tool kit (part number J1K0000249) with your quilting
machine. Use these tools for the adjustment and timing procedures discussed in
this chapter.

Table 10.1 Tools List

Part No. Part

J513090990 Beeswax

J513168030 Driver, nut 7/16”

J513168025 Gauge, feeler .024" x 1/2” x 12"

J5P3T0145 Gauge, looper angle

J5P365315T Gauge, retainer, trimmer 115T (timing gauge)

J5P3T0006 Holder, for retainer and trimmer

J5Q16521L Holder, for threading hook, long

J5Q165215 Holder, for threading hook, short (also used with thread detector
threading tool)

J5Q1652 Threading hooks

J5Q1657 Pliers, needle, long nose

J5Q1658 Pusher, thread, 1/8” steel rod

J5Q1656 Screwdriver, Phillips #2

J5P3T0007 Square, for retainer examination, 1-3/4” x 1-3/4” x 3/8”

J5Q16521T Thread detector threading tool

J513168017 Wrench, 3/16” T, hex, 9"

J513168020 Wrench, 3/32” T, hex, 9"

J513168005 Wrench, 5/32” L, hex, short arm

J513168002 Wrench, 5/32” T, hex, 9"

J513168010 Wrench, 7/64” T, hex, 9"

J513168015 Wrench, 9/64” T, hex, 9"

255 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Needles

Adjusting Needles
Needle Size Refers to the This section details the parts of a needle and how to mount and thread it correctly.
diameter of the needle
The Paragon M quilting machines arrive arranged with 180/24 needles, unless
measured at the needle
eye. Today the most otherwise specified when purchased. Use quality 180/24 needles when sewing
common needle sizing heavy (mattress) quilting.
system used around the
world is the metric system. Always verify the condition of the needle. Look at the point of the needle to test if
The metric number
represents the percent of a the end is sharp or broken. You should not be able to see the exact point on a
millimeter. sharp needle. If the point appears to shine, the needle is probably blunt or
Common needle sizes are: damaged.
Light weight, 60-70,
shirts, blouses, tops
To test for burrs within the eyelet:
Medium weight, 75-100,
1 Thread the eyelet.
pants, jackets
Heavy weight, 120-160, 2 Using a slight tension, slide the thread back and forth along all inside edges
jeans, overalls, parkas of the eyelet. The thread should move smoothly.
Burr A rough, metal edge, 3 If the thread snags or frays, there is probably a burr within the eyelet. Select
usually in the eye of a another needle.
needle.
See Chapter 3, “Personal Safety” to learn how to properly dispose of damaged
needles.
Figure 10.9 details the specific parts of the needle. Become familiar with these
parts. Always verify the condition of the needle before mounting to the needle
bar.

Figure 10.9 Parts of a Needle

Paragon M 256
 Adjusting Needles Sewing Adjustments

Mounting Needles
You need the following tools:
• Phillips-head screwdriver #2 (part number J5Q1656)
• Needle-nose pliers (part number J5Q1657)
Needles are held in place by a needle screw on the needle bar. Loosen this screw
prior to mounting needles. Do not remove this screw from the needle bar.

WARNING: Never place your hand under the needle bar. Use the
needle-nose pliers (part number J5Q1657).

To mount the needle:

1 Using the needle-nose pliers, mount the needle into the slot (or groove). The Scarf The curved (or
flat side of the needle faces out towards you. The scarf of the needle faces the grooved) part of the needle
near (or left) side. above the needle eye.

2 Slide the butt of the needle down to approximately 1mm (or ≅ 0.040", just
slightly more than 1/32”) from the top of the needle bar.
3 Verify the position of the needle. See “Setting Loop Take Time” on page 266
for how to verify the position of the needle.
4 Hold the needle in place and carefully tighten the screw.

NOTE: Most needle arrangements for Class III and IV patterns are
set as sx6-3. Lace the porcelain eyelet prior to threading the
needle. This ensures that your thread remains stable during
sewing.

257 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Needles

Threading Needles
You need the following tools:
• Threading hook (part number J5Q1652)
• Long threading hook holder (part number J5Q16521L)
• Short threading hook holder (part number J5Q1658)
• Thread pusher (part number J5Q1658)
When the factory ships the quilting machine, it is threaded with a base setting of
sx6-3, unless otherwise specified. Depending on your pattern, use this setting or
create a new setting. (See “What is the Needle Setting Code System?” on
page 249.) Verify that all needles are securely fastened to the needle bars.
Using the threading hook and the long holder to thread the needles:
1 Pull enough thread to allow for threading.
2 Trim end of thread.
3 Insert threading hook into the needle eyelet from left to right. (See Figure
10.10, “Threading the Needle Using the Threading Tool.”)
4 Loop the thread over the hook and pull the loop of the thread through the
eye of the needle, from right to left. Use the thread pusher tool for hard-to-
reach needles, such as needles on the rear bar. Always thread the needle
eyelet from right to left.
5 Ensure all knots pass through the eyelet.
6 Leave approximately 6" to 8" (15.24cm to 20.32cm) of thread tail. Proper tail
length is necessary to prevent the thread from pulling out of the needle
during threading procedures and when sewing the first stitch.

Figure 10.10 Threading the Needle Using the Threading Tool

Paragon M 258
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

Adjusting Loopers
Always verify the condition of the looper before mounting to the looper base. It is
important to test for burrs on the top and on the inside of the looper. If you feel a
burr on top of the looper, use a fine-grit aluminum oxide Emery paper (for
metals) and rub very gently to remove the burr. Do not use Emery paper on the
looper's point.
To test for burrs on the inside of the looper:
1 Thread the looper.
2 Using a slight tension, slide the looper back and forth. The thread should
move smoothly.
3 If the thread snags or frays, there is probably a burr within the eyelet. Select
another looper.

259 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

Mounting Loopers
The quilting machine arrives with loopers already mounted to the base setting,
unless otherwise specified. Each time you change the needle setting, you will
need to change the looper position.

NOTE: You must position a looper directly under each threaded

needle. Never position a needle above a looper that is not in
use. Damage to material, needle, looper, or machine may
occur.

The looper assembly, Figure 10.11, contains the following parts:

• Looper head (part number J518191600) with a 4-40 x 5/16” socket head cap
screw (SHCS) (part number J500186154)
• Needle guard (part number J5P30275) with a 4-40 x 9/16” socket head cap
screw (SHCS) (part number J500172016)
• Looper holder (part number J5P301781)
• Thread holder (part number J5P3180) with a 4-40 x 1/4” socket head cap
screw.

Looper head
J518191600

Needle guard S.H.C.S.4-40 x 9/16 “

J5P30275 J5172016
S.H.C.S., 4-40 x 5/16”
J500186154

Looper holder S.H.C.S., 4-40 x 1/4”

J5P301781 J500172018
Thread holder
S.H.C.S., 8-32 x 3/4” J5P3180
J500172060

Figure 10.11 Looper Assembly (J518191605)

Paragon M 260
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

The looper base (part number J5P30462) is separate from the looper assembly.
Mount the looper holder to the looper base using a 8-32 x 3/4” socket head cap
screw (SHCS) (part number J500172060). Mount the looper base to the rod using a
10-32 x 1" socket head cap screw (SHCS) (part number J500173044).

S.H.C.S., 8-32 x 3/4” Looper base

J500172060
J5P30462

S.H.C.S., 10-32 x 1”
J5P00173044

Figure 10.12 Looper Base (J5P30462)

You will need the following tools to assemble and correctly mount the looper:
• 5/32” short arm L-wrench (part number J513168005)
• 3/32” nine-inch T-wrench (part number J513168020)
• Looper angle gauge (part number J5P3T0145).
To assemble the looper and position the looper head:
1 Screw the looper head to the looper holder. The looper head must be flat
against the holder.
2 Insert the needle guard and tighten.
3 If necessary, attach the thread holder to the side of the looper holder.
4 After you assemble the looper, verify the position of the looper with the
looper angle gauge (See Figure 10.13, “Looper Angle Gauge” on page 262.)
Ensure that the looper holder, gauge, and screw are clean and free of debris.
5 Firmly attach the looper holder to the looper angle gauge with the 8-32 x 3/
4” SHCS.
6 Loosen the looper head screw and move the point of the looper head to the
gauge.
7 Firmly hold the looper point in this position, and tighten the looper head
screw.
8 Verify appropriate pre-load by trying to insert a piece of paper between the Pre-Load A procedure
looper point and the gauge. You should not be able to insert the paper. defining the lateral (left to
right) pressure of the
9 Press the looper holder away from the gauge. You should see minimal looper against the needle.
movement.
10 After you correctly position the looper head, remove the looper assembly
from the gauge and mount on the looper base with the 10-32 x 1" SHCS.

261 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

11 See “Setting Loop Take Time” on page 266 and “Setting Pre-Load” on
page 269 to correctly position the needle to the looper and needle guard.

Looper angle gauge

J5P3T0145

Looper assembly
J518191605
J5P30146AY

Figure 10.13 Looper Angle Gauge

Paragon M 262
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

Threading Loopers
You need the following tools when threading loopers:
• 5/32” short arm L-wrench (part number J513168005) Beeswax A commercial
wax obtained by
• 5/32” nine-inch T-wrench (part number J513168002)
processing and purifying
• 3/32”nine-inch T-wrench (part number J513168020) the crude wax of the
• Beeswax (part number J513090990) honeybee and used in
making candles, crayons,
and polishes.
CAUTION: Do not use needle threading hooks to thread the loopers.

To thread the loopers:

1 Press the stop button.
2 Open the rear sliding doors to gain access to the loopers.
3 Using a 5/32” L- or T-wrench, remove the looper assembly from the looper
base.
4 Trim ends of thread.
5 Apply a small amount of beeswax to the thread, to form a point.
6 Hold the looper with the hole of the looper head against finger. (See Figure
10.14, “Threading the Looper” on page 264.)
7 Thread the looper from heel to tip.
8 Return the looper to the looper base.
9 Position thread to the right of the looper.

263 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

10 Leave approximately 6 to 8 inches (15.24cm to 20.32cm) of thread tail. Proper

tail length is necessary to prevent the thread from pulling out of the needle
during threading procedures and when sewing the first stitch.

Thread

Thread

Figure 10.14 Threading the Looper

Paragon M 264
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

Using the Looper Thread Holder

A thread holder is located on the side of the looper. By using this thread holder, it Looper Thread Refers to
the bottom thread used on
is not necessary to remove a looper that is not needed for a particular needle
chain stitch machines.
setting. Release a small amount of thread from the looper and attach it to the Looper threads feed
thread holder. When you are ready to use that looper again, release the thread directly off the cone or
spool into the sewing
from the thread holder. It will not be necessary to rethread the looper, saving you machine eliminating
considerable time. bobbin changes.

Figure 10.15 Using the Looper Thread Holder

265 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

Setting Loop Take Time

Loop Take Time is a synchronization procedure for parts in motion. The
procedure includes:
• Positioning the Main Shaft
• Setting Loop Take Time
• Setting Pre-Load
• Setting the Needle Guard
You will need the following tools:
• 3/32” nine-inch T-wrench (part number J513168020)
• 5/32” short arm L-wrench (part number J513168005)
• 5/32”nine-inch T-wrench (part number J513168002)
• 9/64” nine-inch T-wrench (part number J513168015)
• Measuring scale accurate to 1/64” or better (such as a 6-inch ruler)
• Phillips-head screwdriver #2 (part number J5Q1656)

NOTE: Do not loosen the looper head retaining screw at any time
during Loop Take Time procedures.

CAUTION: Do not set retainers or trimmers during Loop Take Time.

Positioning the Main Shaft

Before you can set Loop Take Time, you must rotate the main shaft to the Loop
Take Time position and lock it into place. To do this:
1 Select and run a few yards of a continuous product (Class I or II).
2 Press the stop button.
3 Do not open guards or doors at this time.

Paragon M 266
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

4 From the Main Run screen, touch the Loop Take Time icon.

5 The Loop Take Time screen appears.

6 Touch the Loop Take Time icon to place the machine in Loop Take Time.

7 The Loop Take Time Confirmation screen appears.

267 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

8 Press the start button. The Loop Take Time Confirmation screen remains
on the monitor.
9 The machine activates (latching the doors), then slowly positions the
main shaft to the Loop Take Time position, enabling the brake on the
needle axis, and disabling the servo drives.
10 After the machine is in position, the machine stops, guard door latches
release, and the green start button light goes out.
11 Open the clear sliding guard doors. This is where you will set Loop Take
Time.
12 After you perform Loop Take Time procedures (setting Loop Take Time,
setting pre-load, setting the needle guard), touch the Check Okay icon on
the Loop Take Time screen to reset the machine.
13 Verify the green start button illuminates, then press the start button to
resume sewing.
14 Operate the machine at a low speed (5 - 10 RPM) to verify that all
adjustments are correct.

Setting Loop Take Time

To set Loop Take Time:
1 Using a 3/32” T-wrench, loosen the needle guard retaining screw.
2 Rotate the guard away from the needle. You must move the needle
guard to properly set the looper.

NOTE: Do not loosen the looper head retaining screw.

3 Adjust the position of the needle if necessary. To do this, measure from

the top of the needle eye to the bottom of the looper blade. This
measurement must be between 1/32” and 1/16”. (See Figure 10.16,
“Loop Take Time” on page 269.)
4 Verify the looper's front-to-back position. To do this, feel the point of the
looper with your finger. Align the point of the looper with the “front” of
the needle; that is, the side of the needle facing away from you. (See
Figure 10.16 for correct front-to-back alignment of the looper point to the
needle.)
5 Adjust the front-to-back position of the looper if necessary. To do this,
use the 5/32” L- or T- wrench, and loosen the looper base adjusting
screw.

Paragon M 268
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

6 Rotate the looper into the proper position.

1/32” to 1/16”

Detail

NOTE: To properly position the

the looper, rotate the needle
guard away from the needle.

Figure 10.16 Loop Take Time

Setting Pre-Load
Pre-load is the lateral (left to right) pressure of the looper against the needle.
Limit lateral movement of the needle to approximately .010" - .015" (.025cm to
.038cm).

NOTE: You can perform this procedure at the same time as the
front-to-back adjustment.

To adjust looper pre-load:

1 Using the 5/32” L- or T-wrench, loosen the looper base adjusting screw.

269 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

2 Using your hand, push the looper slightly towards the needle, creating a
slight pressure on the needle. (Figure 10.17)

Figure 10.17 Setting Pre-Load

NOTE: The looper must touch the needle with minimal pressure.

3 Tighten the looper base.

Paragon M 270
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

4 Test for correct pre-load pressure. To do this, press the looper away from
the needle creating a slight space between the needle and looper. This is
called deflection. (Figure 10.18)

Figure 10.18 Testing Pre-Load

NOTE: Do not push directly on the looper head.

Always, check the front-to-back position of the looper to the
needle after this step.

271 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

Setting the Needle Guard

The function of the needle guard is to protect the needle from the looper during
stitch formation. The needle guard holds the needle in the correct pre-load
position. There are two ends to a needle guard; a long end and a short end.
When using #24 needles, always place the short end of the needle guard into the
looper.

CAUTION: The positioning of the needle guard must not create any
additional pre-load on the needle. Do not allow the position
of the needle guard to change when tightening the needle
guard screw.

To position the needle guard:

1 Using the 3/32” T-wrench, loosen the needle guard screw.
2 If required, insert the needle guard.
3 Turn the needle guard in a counter clockwise direction until it gently
touches the needle.
4 Tighten the needle guard screw.

Figure 10.19 Needle Guard Placement

Paragon M 272
 Adjusting Loopers Sewing Adjustments

Setting Retainers and Trimmers

You can use trimmers for all Class patterns. Trimmers are typically installed on all
machines with Class IV capability. It is not necessary to change from the trimmer
to the retainer when using Class I, II, and III patterns. However, you cannot use a
retainer on Class IV, Tack & Jump, or Pattern Link Patterns.
Always verify the condition of the retainer or trimmer before mounting to the
retainer bar. The retainer or trimmer must be square and free of nicks and burrs.
Test retainer or trimmer for burrs. If you feel any nicks or burrs, rub the retainer
or trimmer very gently using fine-grit aluminum oxide Emery paper (for metals).

WARNING: Use care when handling the trimmer blade. Do not use
Emery paper on the trimmer blade. If this area is damaged,
select another trimmer.

Use the retainer examination square (from the tool kit) to verify the squareness of
all planes. (See Figure 10.20.)

Figure 10.20 Retainer Examination Square

273 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Loopers

To set retainers or trimmers:

1 Press the stop button.
2 The needle bar is automatically positioned in the UP position.
3 Open the rear doors to gain access to the retainers and trimmers.

NOTE: Be sure the main shaft position is set at bottom dead center
before adjusting the retainers or trimmers. Bottom dead
center for the main shaft position is 180-degrees when
adjusting the retainers. Do not set retainers or trimmers
while in Loop Take Time.

4 Using a 9/64” T-wrench, remove the looper.

5 Remove any damaged retainers or trimmers if necessary.
(Use a 7/64” T-wrench.)
6 Install the new retainer or trimmer. Using the retainer/trimmer holder, hold
the retainer or trimmer and tighten the screw. (Use a 7/64” T-wrench.)

NOTE: You must use a new screw and a new internal lock washer
on all retainers and trimmers.

7 Verify that retainers or trimmers are not in contact with the bottom of the
needle plate or the top of the looper.
8 Insert the .024" feeler gauge (from the tool kit) between the retainer or
trimmer and the needle plate to verify proper spacing. You should feel
minimal resistance.
9 Re-install the looper. Always verify the condition of the looper before
reinstalling.

NOTE: Ensure that the needle, retainer or trimmer, and the looper
are in proper alignment.

Paragon M 274
 Adjusting Tension Sewing Adjustments

Adjusting Tension
To produce precision patterns without wrinkling and pattern distortion you must
apply the correct amount of tension to several areas. This is especially important
when sewing 360 degree continuous and Tack & Jump® patterns or when there is
a material change from thick to thin (or thin to thick). (See Chapter 9, “Loading
Material.”)
To adjust thread and material tension, you may need to use any or all of the
following:
• Tension discs
• Floater bar (Class III, IV, and Pattern Link only)
• Bow (or spreader) bar
• Magic bar
• Precompression roller

Adjusting Thread Tension

Tension discs assist in controlling stitch tension. There are two types of tension
discs:
• Regular
• Pneumatic-actuated
A pneumatic-actuated tension disc is indicated by a knurled nut. A regular
tension disc is indicated by a hex nut. Adjust the pneumatic-actuated tension disc
by hand. Adjust the regular tension disc by hand or using the 7/16” nut driver
(part number J513168030).

hex nut for regular tension discs knurled nut for pneumatic-actuated
discs

There are two rows of tension discs:

• On the front of the quilting machine, above the upper butterfly bar. Controls
tension to the top thread.
• On the rear of the quilting machine, below the clear sliding doors. Controls
tension to bottom thread.
The optional Material Handling Package may also contain a row of tension discs,
which provide additional stability to top thread. For additional information on
thread tension discs see Chapter 9, “Loading Material”.

275 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Tension

Adjusting Floater Bar Tension

The floater bar is located directly below the top material trough. Its function is to
provide stability to the top material, specifically for 360-degree continuous,
Tack & Jump, and Pattern Link patterns.
The Floater Bar icon, shown on the Main Run screen, allows you to set the floater
bar into the up (stationary) position, or to set it so that it floats in the down
position.

Floater Bar in Down Position Floater Bar in Up Position

NOTE: The Floater Bar icon displays the current position of the bar.
The arrow indicates the position it will move to when the
icon is pressed - up or down.

Use the up position for all Class I and II continuous patterns. Use the down
position for Class III (360-degree), Tack & Jump, and Pattern Link patterns.

Adjusting Top Material Tension Using the Magic

Bar
Occasionally, top material may require additional tension. This is usually when
the top material is near the end of the roll. Your machine arrives with a long white
bar called a “magic” bar. This bar is made of steel and is covered with a protective
coating. Place the magic bar in the trough on the material at the point where it
unrolls. This will provide slight continuous tension, allowing the material to feed
smoothly through the machine. (To apply additional tension to top material, see
“Adjusting Bow Bar Tension” on page 277.)

Paragon M 276
 Adjusting Tension Sewing Adjustments

Adjusting Bow Bar Tension

The bow bar is also referred to as the spreader bar. Its function is to apply tension
to top material to prevent wrinkling. The bow bar is located directly above the top
material trough. There is a T-handle on each side of the bow bar.
To adjust top material tension using the bow bar:
1 Turn the T-handles to loosen the bow bar.
2 Move the bow bar back and forth to adjust tension. Different top materials
require different amounts of tension. To determine the correct amount of
tension, experiment with each type of material you use.
3 Re-tighten the T-handles.

CAUTION: Do not over tighten the T-handles.

Adjusting Precompression Roller Tension

The precompression roller, located in the front of the presser foot plate, guides the
material from side to side with the carriage motion. The tension knobs farthest
from you adjust the precompression roller.
To adjust the precompression roller:
1 Rotate the tension knobs clockwise to increase compression.
2 Rotate the tension knobs counter clockwise to decompress.
3 Apply enough tension so that the space between the precompression roller
and the apron is reduced to approximately 50 to 75% of combined material
density.
4 Apply equal tension to both knobs. Do this to maintain a level bar.

CAUTION: Do not over tighten the precompression roller.

277 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Adjusting Patterns

Adjusting Patterns
Due to pattern and material selection, there may at times be pattern distortion,
which requires you to make slight modifications to your product. You can make
these minor adjustments through the software program. These adjustments are
made to the length and width on all pattern classes, and to the feed and carriage
compensation on Tack & Jump and 360-degree continuous patterns. Adjust a
current product to correct pattern distortion, then save these adjustments
permanently from the Pattern Compensation screen.
The following list describes types of distortion that may occur with Tack & Jump
and 360-degree patterns:
• Double sewing paths are offset instead of lines falling close to or on top of
other lines
• Pattern may appear “squashed”, “skewed” or “lopsided”
• Start and end points are not meeting
• Finished pattern dimensions vary greatly from programmed dimensions
• Pattern definition is non-existent.
If you experience any of these types of distortion while sewing, please check the
following:
1 Ensure that the presser foot plate measures 1/4 inch in the down position
and 7/16 inch in the up position.
2 Verify the condition of all chains. They should be tight.
3 Verify proper tension to thread and all materials running through the
machine.
4 Verify appropriate pattern compensation for the product.
To modify a pattern:
1 From the Main Run screen, touch either the Pattern icon or the Stitch Density
icon.

Paragon M 278
 Adjusting Patterns Sewing Adjustments

2 The Pattern Compensation screen appears.

pattern length feed compensation

pattern width

carriage
compensation

current
pattern stitch density

English or metric modified pattern cancel

measurement

Figure 10.21 Pattern Compensation Screen

3 Modify pattern length and width, feed and carriage compensation, or stitch
density by intervals of ± 10%, and the number (5-10) of stitches per inch
(English) or stitch length in millimeters (Metric). To do this, touch the up or
down Arrow icons or touch the bar. A digital field under or next to each bar
displays the selected measurement. Touch any icon to return to the default
value for that icon.

CAUTION: Do not exceed over travel limit. The quilting machine has a
maximum carriage travel of 12" (30.48cm).

Tack & Jump Pattern in English Continuous Pattern in Metric

4 Touch the modified Pattern icon to accept the modifications.

NOTE: Touch the Cancel icon or current Pattern icon at any time to
disregard modifications. The Main Run screen reappears.

279 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Further Adjustments to Material

5 A dialog box appears, prompting you to save the new data. Depending on
your revision level, touch the green I icon or Yes to save the modification.
Touch the red O icon or No to use the modifications for this job only. Touch
the Cancel icon to cancel the request.

CAUTION: Touching the red O

icon will not save the
modifications. It will use the
modifications for this job only.
You must select the green I icon
or Yes to save the modifications.
Neither will the red O icon cancel
the request. It will use the
modifications on the current job
and then revert to the previous
settings.

6 The Main Run screen reappears.

NOTE: Selecting “yes” to the save dialog box will apply the
modifications to future selections of the product.

Further Adjustments to Material

Drag Occurs when If after making tension and pattern adjustments you still experience pattern
something is pulled or
distortion, check the following areas.
drawn along or over a
surface, causing slow or
difficult motion. Top Material Fill Material Backing Material
Floater bar in down Tighten tension on Increase tension on the
position precompression roller backing material
Loosen spreader bars Tighten tension on pinch Use a heavier material
Rotate spreader bar roller
towards trough Verify that foam does not
Modify pattern exceed the backing or
compensation ticking edges

NOTE: Use feed NOTE: Excess foam NOTE: Using cheap or

compensation to adjust extending beyond the thin backing when sewing
for minimal distortion in backing and ticking on the with thick or dense fill
the feed direction, such as ends of the machine will material combinations
twisting, drooping, or drag under the presser may not provide enough
lopsidedness. foot plate, causing the support to carry the fill
Use carriage machine to track and ticking through the
compensation to adjust incorrectly and machine.
for minimal width inconsistently. This
distortion, such as lines “drag” may cause pattern
not matching, and starting distortion and wrinkling.
and ending points not
meeting.

Paragon M 280
 Review Sewing Adjustments

Review
The activities in this section help you master the knowledge and skills introduced
in this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 To create a perfect stitch the following must be positioned correctly:
a. Needles
b. Loopers
c. Trimmers or retainers
d. All of the above
2 A _______ _______describes the location of needles, needle placement on the
bars, and the distance between needles.
3 True or False. The last character of a needle code determines if needles are
placed as single or pairs.
4 The needle code sx6-3 is also called the base setting of the _______ needle
setting system.
5 True or False. “Loop Take Time” is a term that describes a synchronization
procedure for parts in motion. It identifies the carefully balance relationship
between the needle and the looper.
6 Would you use a retainer or trimmer when sewing a Class III pattern?
_________________
7 A chain stitch is identified when both top and bottom threads loop:
a. in middle of the material
b. on the underside of the material
c. on the top of the material
d. on both top and bottom of material
8 One function of the looper is to: (Choose one.)
a. Spread the thread into a triangle.
b. Catch the thread loop created by the needle.
c. Cut the thread.
d. Protect the needle.
9 Identify the following parts of the needle: blade, butt, cone, eye, point,
reinforced blade, scarf, and shank.

281 Quilting Machine

 Sewing Adjustments Review

10 Use the ________ ________ and ________ ________ when threading needles.
11 The scarf of the needle always faces the:
a. middle needle bar
b. front of the machine
c. near (or left) side of the machine
d. eyelet
12 True or False. Pre-load is the lateral pressure of the looper against the
needle.
13 When threading needles, always leave ___ to ___ inches of thread tail.
a. 7-8
b. 6-8
c. 4-6
d. 5-10
14 True or False. During sewing, the floater bar provides stability to top
material, specifically 360-degree continuous and Tack & Jump patterns.
15 The spreader bar provides tensions to _______ material.
16 Use the looper gauge to:
a. mount the looper and needle guard
b. position the looper head and verify pre-load
c. verify pre-load and mount the looper
d. insert the needle guard and tighten the looper
17 True or False. The precompression roller guides the materials side to side
with the carriage motion.
18 True or False. Do not use threading hooks to thread loopers.
19 After threading loopers, always position thread to the right or left of the
looper. _____________
20 There are two types of tension discs. They are: __________ __________ and
_______.
21 The row of tension discs above the upper butterfly bar controls tension to
_______ thread.
22 True or False. Before you can set Loop Take Time you must run a few yards
of a continuous Class I or II product.
23 True or False. The needle guard protects the looper during stitch formation.
24 For Class III (360-degree), Tack & Jump, and Pattern Link patterns, place the
floater bar in the ____ position.
25 A _______ _______ is placed in the material trough to provide tension to the
top material.
26 To prevent top material from wrinkling, apply tension using the _______
______.

Paragon M 282
 Safety Procedures for Cleaning and Maintaining the Paragon M General Maintenance

General Maintenance
11
This chapter discusses the proper care and maintenance of your quilting machine.
The Paragon M quilting machines have many mechanical parts, which require
cleaning, lubrication, and occasional maintenance. This section is for trained
maintenance personnel. The following pages describe each area in detail. For any
maintenance procedures not listed in this chapter notify a Gribetz International
service technician.
You will learn:
• About parts in motion.
• How to perform regular inspections of the machine
• Where and how to clean and lubricate the quilting machine.
• How to replace fluorescent and indicator lights.
• How to maintain the air-isolator pads.

Safety Procedures for Cleaning and

Maintaining the Paragon M
Review the safety procedures in Chapter 2, “Safety Features” and Chapter 3, Precision Parts
Components with
“Personal Safety” before performing any maintenance work on the quilting
accurate, calibrated
machine. measurements or
positions.
WARNING: Do not attempt to adjust electronic parts. The machine
contains high voltages that can cause serious injury or death.

Follow the safety precautions below while cleaning or performing maintenance

on the quilting machine.
• Always wear appropriate personal safety items.
• Observe proper lockout and tagout procedures.
• Always turn off the Paragon M to clean or lubricate.
• Do not touch control system components, except where indicated.
• Do not attempt to adjust precision parts.
• Always properly store and dispose of cleaning and lubrication materials.

283 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Safety Procedures for Cleaning and Maintaining the Paragon M

Lockout Safety Reminder

This section reviews the lockout safety procedure to use when performing
maintenance on the Paragon M quilting machine. Proper safety awareness
involves the following:
• Protective Material and Hardware
• Proper Lockout Procedures

Protective Material and Hardware

The lockout and tagout system has three types of protective materials to use
when preparing the Paragon M for maintenance work:
• A card to warn others not to remove the locks or start the Paragon M.
(Only the person named on the card is authorized to remove the lock.)
• A hasp to secure the card to the locked-out area.
• A lock to secure an electrical or pneumatic disconnect.

Card Hasp Lock

Figure 11.1 Example of a Lockout Equipment

Proper Lockout Procedure

The Paragon M uses a dangerous electrical current and pneumatic pressure
which can cause serious personal injury or death in the event of an accident.
Lockout procedures are necessary for disconnects, especially when electrical
current is wired directly to the machine. To indicate that the Paragon M is being
serviced, locks are attached to the ends of the disconnects that output from the
main power or air supply.

WARNING: Only the person named on the tag is authorized to remove

the tag and reconnect power and air to the machine.

Paragon M 284
 Preparing the Paragon M for Maintenance General Maintenance

Preparing the Paragon M for Maintenance

Only fully trained maintenance technicians should attempt to clean or service the
Paragon M; however, it is the operator's job to prepare for the technician's visit.
This section describes what the operator must do to prepare the machine for
cleaning and service.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust electronic parts; touching these

parts can void the warranty. Always contact a Gribetz
International service technician for adjustments.
Only qualified service technicians must perform service to
the electrical system.

• Observe proper isolation and lockout procedures where appropriate.

• Disconnect power from the unit before performing maintenance or before
opening any panels.
• Do not service any of the pneumatic components until you relieve the air
pressure going to the unit. Always wear a mask or turn your face away from
the regulator when releasing air pressure. Oil, residue, and debris from the
floor can spray with force into the air.
• Do not use an air hose on any body parts or point it at another person.

Inspecting the Paragon M

In addition to the safety tasks you perform while operating the Paragon M, it is a
good idea to set up a schedule for inspecting and maintaining the machine. You
might perform some tasks daily, and others weekly, monthly, quarterly or
annually.

Daily Maintenance Tasks

Take a look at the following parts every day:

doors and gates Walk around the Paragon M and verify that all
doors and gates are securely closed.

pneumatic air pressure Verify that the air pressure gauge is between 60 -
80 PSI.

power panel fan filters Remove the fan filter cover and check the filter.
Look for tears or other signs of wear.

precompression and outfeed Remove large pieces of waste material and use
rollers an air hose to clear away dust and small
particles from the area around rollers.

285 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Inspecting the Paragon M

Weekly Maintenance Tasks

Take a look at the following parts each week:

touch screen Verify that the screen is clean. For more

information about cleaning, refer to, “Cleaning the
Touch Screen” on page 304.

precompression and outfeed Inspect the rollers and verify that they are clean
rollers and that there are no threads wrapped around the
outfeed rollers. For more information, refer to ,
“Cleaning Precompression and Outfeed Rollers”
on page 305.

Monthly Maintenance Tasks

Take a look at the following parts once a month:

power panel filters If the filters are dirty, replace the fan filters. If the
filters appear to be clean, check them again next
month.

precompression and outfeed Inspect the precompression and outfeed rollers for
rollers signs of wear. If the edges appear to be frayed,
order replacements.

test E-Stop buttons Test all E-Stop buttons and verify that they work
correctly. For more information, see “Emergency
Stop (E-Stop) Buttons” on page 16 and “Testing
the Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons” on page 23.

Annual Maintenance Tasks

An annual checkup can help to keep the machine operating smoothly. It should
include removal of all guards so that you can thoroughly clean all areas and
inspect for wear and tear. It is a good idea to have a factory-authorized technician
inspect the Paragon M quilting machine at least once a year. A technician can
check the condition of bushings, bearings and any moveable parts.

Paragon M 286
 Maintaining the Shafts General Maintenance

Maintaining the Shafts

The Paragon M has three types of shafts:
• Main shaft
• Two upper rocker shafts

Main Shaft
The main shaft connects the needle drive motor to three oscillating shafts. The
main shaft is located on the front of the machine, lying horizontally from the near
side to the far side. The main shaft is attached to the top of the table. Access this
area from the rear of the quilting machine. The grease fittings on the main shaft
must be lubricated manually. (See Figure 11.6, “Needle Drive Eccentric” on
page 292 for location of the main shaft and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on
page 311.)

Upper Rocker Shafts

A rocker shaft moves in a rocking motion. This rocking motion of the shaft drives Bridge A crosswise
platform that provides
the needles and the presser foot up and down. Two upper rocker shafts are
reinforcement and
located on the front of the machine, lying horizontally from the near side to the far distribution of stress. The
side, above the needle bars. The left and the right upper rocker shafts are attached bridge on this quilting
machine supports the
to the bridge. Two needle drive eccentrics drive the upper rocker shafts. Access upper sewing mechanism.
this area from the front of the quilting machine. Manually lubricate the bearings.
(See Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

287 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Plates

Maintaining the Plates

The quilting machine has three types of plates:
• Automatic adjustable presser foot plate
• Needle plate
• Riser plate
From time to time, you may need to clean debris between the presser foot plate
and the needle plate. This requires removal of materials from between the needle
and presser foot plates, and should only be done by qualified maintenance
personnel.

Figure 11.2 Front Sewing Box

Paragon M 288
 Maintaining the Plates General Maintenance

Automated Adjustable Presser Foot Plate

The automated adjustable presser foot simplifies the mechanical task of adjusting
the presser foot to proper sewing heights whenever you need to change material
thickness and density. This adjustment is made manually or preprogrammed into
a product profile. See Step of “Creating a Product”on page 83 and “Adjusting the
Presser Foot Height” on page 185.
The presser foot plate is located above the needle plate. It compresses the material
that flows under it. The presser foot plate is attached to the presser foot plate
bridges, which are attached to the presser foot guide rods. This assembly is driven
by the upper rocker shafts. See “Presser Foot Drive Assembly” on page 297.
Access this area from the front of the quilting machine.
Needle guide rod
J5Q113C341

Presser foot drive shaft

Bearing housing
Lever assembly J513192483
J513192440 Presser foot drive lever (one piece)
J513192426
Upper rocker shaft
J5P10000231
Guide rod bracket

Presser foot drive link

J513192447

Needle
guide rod
J5Q113C341
Needle drive link
Needle bar lever J5P302064
J513192421
Presser foot plate
Presser foot bridge
Needle plate

Needle drive connecting rod

J5P30214

Needle drive eccentric assembly

J513170921
Main shaft
J513170936 (left)
J513170937 (right)

Figure 11.3 Adjustable Presser Foot Plate

289 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Plates

Needle Plate
The needle plate is located above the riser plates. It provides support to material
as it is sewn. The needle plate is attached to the riser plates. Access this area from
the front of the quilting machine.

Needle drive link

J5P302064

Guide rod bracket

Needle bar
(back)
Needle guide rod
J5Q113C341
Needle bar
(middle)
Presser foot bridge
Needle bar
(front)

Presser foot plate

Needle plate

Figure 11.4 Needle Plate

Paragon M 290
 Maintaining the Plates General Maintenance

Riser Plate
A riser plate is the vertical part or section of the machine which supports the
looper shafts, the retainer bars, and the needle plate. The needle plate is
supported by all of the riser plates. There are several components of the riser
plates that require maintenance.

Nylatron Window Bearings

There are three Nylatron® window bearings in the top of each riser plate. These Nylatron A lightweight
“windows” allow the retainer bars to move freely, while maintaining vertical durable mechanical plastic
polymer used in place of
stability. Access this area from the rear of the quilting machine. Manually metal. Contains solid
lubricate the tops of the retainer bars, inside these windows. (See Table 11.3, lubricants, thereby
“Lubrication Table” on page 311.) reducing lubrication
requirements. Also
improves wear resistance
Nyliner Bearings and provides noise
There are three looper shaft nyliner bearings located in the middle of each riser reduction.
plate. These bearings allow the looper shafts to move freely and to maintain Nyliner Bearings
axial stability. Access these bearings from the rear of the machine. Manually Precision molded bearings
lubricate this area weekly by placing one drop of oil on each nyliner bearing. from polymers. Allowing
smooth linear, rotary, and
oscillating motion. Offers a
CAUTION: Make sure the air supply and the power supply are turned low friction, long life,
OFF before accessing the Nylatron or nyliner bearings. smooth and quiet
operation, and is corrosion
resistance.

Nylatron window bearings

Nyliner bearings

Figure 11.5 Riser Plate

291 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Eccentrics

Maintaining the Eccentrics

The quilting machine has three types of eccentrics:
Butterfly Drive Gives • Needle drive eccentric
motion to the butterfly
• Looper drive eccentric
assembly.
• Rear butterfly drive eccentric

Needle Drive Eccentric

Two needle drive eccentrics drive the upper rocker shafts. They are located on the
exterior side of the side frames; one on the near side, one on the far side. Both
needle drive eccentrics are attached to the main shaft. Access this area from inside
the near and far side guards. The auto-lubrication system lubricates the grease
fittings on these eccentrics. (See Figure 11.6, “Needle Drive Eccentric” on page 292
and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

CAUTION: Carefully monitor the auto-lube system. Under-greasing or

over-greasing causes the eccentrics to overheat.

Lever assembly
J513192440
Presser foot drive shaft

Stop eccentric Presser foot drive link

J513192475 J513192447

Presser foot eccentric Upper rocker shaft

J513192445
J5P10000231

Fork lever stud Needle drive rod eye

J513170930 J5P302125

Fork lever stud Needle drive connecting rod

J513170930
J5P30214

Needle bar lever

J513192421

Main shaft
J513170936 (left)
J513170937 (right)
Auto-lube system

Needle drive eccentric assembly

J513170921 Set screws
1/2”-13 x 3/4

Figure 11.6 Needle Drive Eccentric

Paragon M 292
 Maintaining the Eccentrics General Maintenance

Presser foot drive shaft Upper rocker shaft

J5P10000231

Presser foot eccentric lever

J513192440 Presser foot drive lever assembly
Cylinder J513192426

Guide rod bracket

Stop eccentric
J513192475
Retaining ring
J513192453

Presser foot
drive assembly
Fork lever stud J513192428
J513170930
Retaining ring
J5P30428 Presser foot
drive lever
Needle bar lever J5P302161
J513192421

Needle drive link

Fork lever stud J5P302064
J513170930
Retaining ring
J5P30428

Needle drive rod eye

J5P30215 Needle guide rod
J5Q113C341

Needle drive connecting rod

J5P30214

Figure 11.7 Needle Drive Eccentric (Detail)

293 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Eccentrics

Looper Drive Eccentric

The machine has two looper drive eccentrics. These eccentrics drive the looper
shafts. They are located on the interior side of the side frames; one on the near
side, one on the far side. Both looper drive eccentrics are attached to the main
shaft. Access this area from the rear of the quilting machine. The auto-lube system
lubricates the grease fittings on these eccentrics. (See Figure 11.8, “Looper Drive
Eccentric” on page 294 and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

CAUTION: Carefully monitor the auto-lube system. Under-greasing or

over-greasing causes the eccentrics to overheat.

Retainer for rocker lever

J5P30375 Driven levers
(on back, not shown) J5P30166

Looper drive lever Looper drive link

J5P30167ASSY
J5P301681L (left)
J5P301681R (right) Plate
J5P30321MR(right)
Link stud J5P30321ML (left)
J5Q1208ASSY J5P30321M (center)
Rod connecting shuttle
J5P800231ASSY

Nut (right) Auto-lube line

J5Q12041R

Looper drive eccentric

J5P30382

Figure 11.8 Looper Drive Eccentric

Paragon M 294
 Maintaining the Eccentrics General Maintenance

Rear Butterfly Eccentric

The machine has two looper-thread butterfly eccentrics. These eccentrics drive the
rear butterfly. Both butterfly eccentrics are attached to the main shaft. They are
located near the center of the quilting machine, between the looper drive
eccentrics. Access this area from the rear of the quilting machine. The auto-lube
system lubricates the grease fittings on these eccentrics. (See Figure 11.9, “Rear
Butterfly Eccentric” and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

CAUTION: Carefully monitor the auto-lube system. Under-greasing or

over-greasing causes the eccentrics to overheat.

Butterfly bridge stand assembly

J5P30345AY
Rear butterfly shaft
J5P3031190 Socket head cap screws
1/4-20X1-1/4”
J500172102
Lever
J5p100005N
Butterfly bracket
J5P30020M

Plate

Link stud assembly

Nut J5Q1208ASY
5/8-18 right hand
J5Q12041R
End rod assembly
J5Q1205ASSY
Nut
Main shaft 5/8-18 left hand Connecting rod
J5Q12041L J5Q12043

Rear butterfly eccentric

J5P30385

Figure 11.9 Rear Butterfly Eccentric

295 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Mechanical Drives

Maintaining the Mechanical Drives

The quilting machine has three types of drives:
• Needle drive connecting links
• Presser foot drive lifting heads
• Upper butterfly drives
The number of each drive depends on your machine model.

Needle Drive Connecting Link (Dog Bone)

Needle drive connecting links move the needle bars up and down. They are
located between the needle guide rod brackets and the presser foot guide rod
brackets, and are attached to the drive levers, located on the upper rocker shafts.
Access to this area is from the front of the quilting machine. Manually lubricate
the grease fittings on the needle bar connecting link. (See Figure 11.10, “Needle
Drive Connecting Link”and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

Needle drive link (dog bone)

J5P302064

Figure 11.10 Needle Drive Connecting Link

Paragon M 296
 Maintaining the Mechanical Drives General Maintenance

Presser Foot Drive Assembly

Presser foot drive lifting heads enable the presser foot plate to move up and
down, compressing material. They are located on each presser foot guide rod. All
presser foot drive assemblies are attached to the upper rocker shaft. Access to this
area is from the front of the quilting machine. Manually lubricate the grease
fittings on the presser foot plate lifting assembly. The auto-lube system lubricates
the upper and lower bushings on the presser foot guide rods. (See Figure 11.11,
“Presser Foot Drive Assembly” and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

Presser foot drive lever

J513192426

Presser foot
guide rod
J5Q113C341

Figure 11.11 Presser Foot Drive Assembly

297 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Mechanical Drives

Upper Butterfly Drive

The upper butterfly takes up thread and gives thread to the stitch. The lower
levers are attached to the upper rocker shafts and the upper levers are attached to
the upper butterfly shafts. The upper rocker shafts drive and the upper butterfly
shafts are driven. Access to this area is from the front of the quilting machine.
Manually lubricate the grease fittings on the upper butterfly drive on the
connecting link. There is one pair on the near side and one pair on the far side.
(See Figure 11.12, “Upper Butterfly Drive” and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on
page 311.)

Upper butterfly lever

J513190098 Upper butterfly shaft
1” diameter
J5Q1138604
J5Q113864

Socket head cap screw

1/4-20x1-1/2”
J500172104

Upper butterfly drive link assembly

J5P1000402ASSY

Grease fitting Upper rocker shaft

J5P100023
Hex head cap screw
3/8-16x1-3/4”
J500203728

Hex head cap screw

3/8-16x1-3/4”
J500203728

Grease fitting
Socket head cap screw
1/4-20x1-1/2”
J500172104 Lower butterfly lever
J513190097

Figure 11.12 Upper Butterfly Drive

Paragon M 298
 Maintaining the Mechanical Drives General Maintenance

Upper Butterfly Support Bracket

Three upper butterfly support brackets support the upper butterfly. They are
located on the bridge. Access this area from the front of the quilting machine.
Manually lubricate the three upper butterfly support brackets. (See Figure 11.13,
“Upper Butterfly Support Bracket” and Table 11.3, “Lubrication Table” on
page 311.)

Socket head cap screw, 1/4-20 Shaft

(1-1/2” long) J5Q113864
J5Q1138604
Front rod, 3/8 Rear rod, 3/8
J5Q1140493
J5Q1140535
right side (2 pieces)
left side (2 pieces)

Butterfly bracket
J5Q1135M
(shown in upper and lower position)

Sock head
17” cap screw
8-32x1/2”
Up position

15-3/4”
Down position

Top of needle plate

Butterfly center support

J5P100043M

Figure 11.13 Upper Butterfly Support Bracket

299 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Mechanical Drives

Front Retainer Drive

Drive Shaft A long, The main shaft drives the front retainer drive shafts. The front retainer drive
generally cylindrical bar
shafts drive the retainer bars through brackets. The front retainer drive is located
that rotates and transmits
power from a motor or an in the front of the machine, on the riser plates. Access this area from the rear of the
engine to the rest of the quilting machine. Clean this area weekly. Use compressed air and an industrial
machine.
vacuum.

NOTE: Do not allow the retainer drive belt to become soiled or to

come in contact with grease or oil.

Remove loose threads from belt or pulley. Lubricate the grease fitting on the
retainer-drive belt idler-tension bearing regardless of whether or not you have an
auto-lube system. (See Figure 11.14, “Front Retainer Drive” and Table 11.3,
“Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

Riser plate bearing stand Retainer

J5P30321M drive shaft
J5P302772
Bushing (2 per machine)
J5P30445 Coupler
J5P304462

Timing pulley
J5P30450
Assembly plate belt tension
J5P30582ASSY Timing
*See note belt
J5P304431
Hex head
screw
3/8”-16x1-1/2”
(2X)

Main shaft
Timing pulley Bushing J5P00833X
J5P30450 J5P30445

*NOTE: This bearing has a grease fitting. Lubricate 1/2-1

strokes weekly. Do not allow the retainer drive to
become soiled or to come in contact with grease or
oil. Check for build-up on top and lower pulley.
Clean weekly with compressed air.

Figure 11.14 Front Retainer Drive

Paragon M 300
 Maintaining the Mechanical Drives General Maintenance

Retainer Bar Assembly

The retainer bar assembly includes three drive levers which are driven by three
gear boxes. These are located under the apron, on the front of the riser plates. The
drive levers are attached to the retainer drive eccentric and the retainer bars.
Access this area from the rear of the quilting machine. Clean the retainer bars
daily using compressed air. (See Figure 11.15, “Retainer Bar Assembly” and Table
11.3, “Lubrication Table” on page 311.)

Far Side Front Near Side

Front retainer drive lever assembly

J5P1000292A
Gear box drive Front retainer bar
J536000000 J513192115
Retainer bar end bracket
Left-Right J5P305551
adjustment Bracket adjustment J5P301741

Retainer or Trimmer
In-Out adjustment
Retainer bar spacer
J513192110 A

Hex head, 1/4-20x3/4”

Socket head, 1/4-20x3/4” J500201412
J500172096 Middle and rear retainer bars Lockwasher, 1/4”
Lockwasher, 1/4” J513192116 End riser plate J500430014
J500430014 J513190405 Flat washer, 1/4”
J504400014
Dimension “X”
Far Side Rear .351’
Needle

Trimmer
Trimmer bar Dimension “Y”
NOTES: 1-7/32”
1. Setting shown with needles at bottom of stroke.
2. Dimension X measured from the inside edge of the
needle to the outside edge of the trimmer/retainer.
3. Dimension Y measured from the center of the needle Detail A - Needle Bars Down
to the inside of the trimmer/retainer bar.

Figure 11.15 Retainer Bar Assembly

301 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Maintaining the Mechanical Drives

Looper Drive Link Assemblies

The looper drive link assemblies connect the three looper shafts. This enables the
looper shafts to be driven simultaneously. The looper drive link assemblies are
located at each end of the connected looper shafts. You access these parts from the
back of the machine. Open the rear sewing box sliding doors to reach the three
bronze bushings. Lubricate the bushings weekly by placing one drop of oil on
each. Vacuum this area weekly.

CAUTION: Make sure the air supply and the power supply are turned
OFF before accessing the looper drive link assemblies.

Paragon M 302
 Cleaning the Paragon M and Work Area General Maintenance

Cleaning the Paragon M and Work Area

To get the best performance from the Paragon M, it is important to keep the
machine and the surrounding work area clean. How often you clean depends on
your workplace. If the Paragon M runs 24 hours a day, it is probably a good idea
to perform cleaning tasks during and at the end of every shift.

Cleaning the Paragon M

Keep all surfaces clean, especially the touch screen and the slide.
Clean the quilting machine daily. Use these supplies:
• Lint-free rags or shop towels
• Soap and water
• Compressed air
• Vacuum
Clean all outside surfaces of the quilting machine with soap, water and lint-free
rags.
Clean fan filters on the main cabinet. There is one exhaust fan on top and one
intake filter on the bottom. It is important to clean these areas daily or the
computer may overheat. To clean the filters:
1 Disconnect main power from the quilting machine.
2 Lift the filter covers off the cabinet.
3 Rinse with warm water and dry with lint-free rags.
4 Remove the filters and shake dust off or vacuum.
5 Replace the filters when they become soiled.
6 Snap the filter covers back into place.
Use compressed air to clean the following:
• Retainer bars
• Between the needle plate and presser foot plate
• Between and behind thread tension discs

CAUTION: Do not use compressed air inside the main cabinet.

303 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Cleaning the Paragon M and Work Area

With power off, vacuum inside the near and far side guards. Open the rear sliding
doors and vacuum all debris. Disconnect main power and vacuum inside the
main cabinet.

CAUTION: The computer components are very sensitive. Do not

vacuum near or on the components.

Figure 11.16 Computer Filter

Cleaning the Touch Screen

To clean the touch screen:
1 Turn off the main electrical power switch.
2 Use a clean, soft, dry, lint-free cloth to wipe away fingerprints and other
marks.
3 If the dry cloth does not remove all the soil, you can moisten some cotton
gauze with a little ethyl alcohol and apply it gently to the soiled area.

CAUTION: Do not use any spray cleaner on the touch screen. Also
avoid abrasive cleaners.

Paragon M 304
 Cleaning the Paragon M and Work Area General Maintenance

Cleaning Precompression and Outfeed Rollers

Check the precompression rollers on the front of the Paragon M and the outfeed
rollers on the back of the Paragon M every day. Remove any thread build-up
and inspect the rollers for signs of soil or wear.
To clean the rollers:
1 Make sure that the Paragon M is shut down before you inspect or clean
the precompression and outfeed rollers.
2 Remove any material scraps by hand. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove
dust from the rollers and the surrounding areas.
3 Use a moist cloth and a mild detergent to remove soil or lubricant
drippings from the rollers.

Cleaning the Work Area

Following is a list of things you should do to keep your work area clean and free
of debris:
• It is important to keep track of the amount of material that gathers behind
the machine. Remove cut panels immediately.
• Remove all the scraps and use a vacuum cleaner to remove any lint, thread
or tiny scraps that might remain.
• Use an air hose to clear away small pieces of material and lint from the areas
around the precompression rollers and the slide.

305 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

To keep the Paragon M operating smoothly, it is important to follow a regular
schedule for lubricating the moving parts.

CAUTION: Use only the recommended lubricants on Paragon M parts.

Oiling the machine lubricates moving parts, helps to prevent wear and reduces
the risk of rust. Rust forms rapidly with any dampness, especially in humid
climates. Surface rust can act like loose sand granules and cause excess wear on
machine parts.
Many of the bearings on the Paragon M are sealed; only a factory-trained
technician is authorized to inspect and lubricate these machine parts. If you
suspect that these parts require lubrication, contact a Gribetz International service
technician.
The Paragon M quilting machines have an automatic lubrication (auto-lube)
system. Properly monitored, this system reduces maintenance time and increases
the life of your machine. The following sections briefly explain the system's
internal operation, and provides procedures to test the system. For additional
information on the auto-lube system, see the XGS Robertshaw-Interlube Service and
Maintenance Manual (part number J513199080) and Gribetz International Service
Bulletin (part number J512800021).
Reservoir A receptacle or During machine operation, the software program sends periodic electric pulses to
chamber for storing fluid.
two solenoid air valves. Each air valve, in turn, sends an air pulse to its associated
reservoir. The reservoir requires 15 pulses for the cam to make one revolution.
The cam has only one lobe; therefore, for each revolution of the cam, every grease
tube gets a pulse of grease. Not all tubes are lubricated at the same time, or with
the same amount of lubricant.
The Paragon M quilting machines require the following lubricants:
• For the reservoir located furthest from the motors we recommend Shell
Alvania® EP00 grease.
• For the reservoir located closest to the motors we recommend Shell Alvania
EP-1 grease.
• Always use a chain lubricant on chains.

CAUTION: These lubricants are not interchangeable. Filling the

reservoirs with the incorrect lubricant will cause damage to
the machine.

Paragon M 306
 Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine General Maintenance

Table 11.1 Typical Properties of Shell Alvania EP00 Grease

Product Code 72307

NLGI Grade 000

Mineral Oil Viscosity:

cSt at 40°C 45
SUS at 100°F 235

Color Tan

Unworked Penetration 455

Worked Penetration (60 strokes) 457

Worked Penetration (60,000 strokes) 445

Dropping Point, °F 287

NOTE: Product typical properties are current as of the date of publication.

These properties are determined by averaging actual batch data
provided by the manufacturing locations over a period of time.
These typical data cannot be guaranteed to be identical to the
products produced at any specific time. The data provided in this
table are presented as a guide to Shell Lubricant users. Check with
your local Shell Representative for the latest information.

307 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

Table 11.2 Typical Properties of Shell Alvania EP-1 Grease

Product Code 71124

NLGI Grade 1

Color Brown

Thickener Identity Lithium Soap

Thickener Average, % wt. 6

Sulfur, % wt. 0.9

Zinc, % wt. 0.4

Water Washout, % wt. Loss @ 175°F ---

Mineral Oil Viscosity:

cSt at 40°C ---
SUS at 100°F 14

Worked Penetration (60 strokes) @ 77°F 330

Flash Point, PMCC, °C 221

Dropping Point, °F 363

Timken OK Load, lbs. 45

Corrosion Test 1,1,1

Bomb Oxidation, @ 210°F Pressure Drop @ 100 hrs, psi ---

NOTE: Product typical properties are current as of the date of publication.

These properties are determined by averaging actual batch data
provided by the manufacturing locations over a period of time.
These typical data cannot be guaranteed to be identical to the
products produced at any specific time. The data provided in this
table are presented as a guide to Shell Lubricant users. Check with
your local Shell Representative for the latest information.

Paragon M 308
 Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine General Maintenance

Maintaining the Automatic Lubrication System

Inspect all tubing on a periodic basis for cracks or grease dripping and replace if
necessary.
The life expectancy for the flexible tubing has not been determined, and may vary
depending on climate, work conditions, and other factors. Inspect it regularly
since it is subjected to rigorous movement.

NOTE: This tubing supplies lubrication to the moving bearings,

including all eccentrics.

To test the auto-lube system:

1 Looking through the back enclosure doors of the machine, locate either
grease reservoir to the extreme left or right, then look for the metal paddle
near the bottom and against the wall of the reservoir. (The paddle may be
difficult to locate depending on its position.) See Figure 11.17, “Grease
Reservoir and Paddle.”
2 Mark the location of the paddle on the transparent wall.
3 From the Main Run screen, touch the Tools icon.
4 The Tools screen appears. You may require a passcode to access this screen.
5 Touch the User Configuration icon. The User Configuration screen appears.
(You may require a passcode to access this screen.)
6 Select one of the Prime Auto-Lube Lines icons. A keypad appears.

NOTE: The top icon indicates Shell Alvania EP00 light (tan) grease;
the bottom icon indicates Shell Alvania EP-1 dark (brown)
grease.

7 Enter 5.00 to set the pulse time to five minutes.

NOTE: Keep the pulse time set at five minutes unless you
experience indications of excessive lubrication.

8 Touch the icon to the right of the Prime Auto-Lube Lines icon to start the
test.

NOTE: The international symbol I indicates ON; O indicates OFF.

9 Listen for the actuation of the air solenoid valve. Observe the motion of the
paddle.
10 Disconnect one of the grease tubes at the end opposite the reservoir (or at
top of the eccentric, if preferred) and tape it to the side to secure the tube.
11 Activate test mode for five minutes, then check the tube for a pulse of grease.
12 Perform steps 3 through 11 on the other reservoir.

309 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

Paddle

Figure 11.17 Grease Reservoir and Paddle

Please contact the Gribetz International Customer Service Department

immediately if you experience any of the following situations:
• Air solenoid does not operate.
• Paddle does not turn.
• Lubricant does not come out of the end of the tube.
For manual lubrication use Almagard® 3751 Vari-Purpose grease and a non-
detergent lubricant light oil, such as Mobil® DTE® light. Avoid darker oils as they
may stain. Always wipe off excess oil. (See Table 11.5, “Typical Properties of
Almagard 3751 Vari-Purpose Grease” on page 314 and Table 11.4, “Typical
Properties of Mobil DTE Light Oil” on page 313 for typical properties.)

CAUTION: Do not over lubricate or under lubricate any component in

the machine.

Paragon M 310
 Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine General Maintenance

Table 11.3 Lubrication Table

Part to
Lubricate Quantity Frequency Lubricant
(27) Retainer bar, top and 1 drop daily oil
bottom support (on
top of each Nylatron
window)

(8) Lower bushing for automatic --- oil

needle guide rod lubrication
system

(8) Lower bushing for automatic --- oil

presser foot guide rod lubrication
system

(8) Upper bushing for automatic --- oil

needle guide rod lubrication
system

(8) Upper bushing automatic --- oil

presser foot lubrication
guide rod system

(8) Middle of presser foot automatic --- oil

guide rod bracket lubrication
system

(21) Nyliner bearing (on 1 drop weekly oil

riser plates)

(6) Looper drive 1 drop bi-weekly oil

connecting link on
dowel pin (3 on near,
3 on far)

(9) Linear bearing shaft *see below monthly oil

(Thompson shaft)

Chains light spray monthly chain lubricant

only

(6) Grease fittings on automatic --- grease

eccentrics lubrication
2 - needle drive eccentric system
2 - looper drive eccentric
2 - looper thread
butterfly eccentric
CAUTION: Under or over-
greasing eccentrics will
cause them to heat up.

311 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

Part to
Lubricate Quantity Frequency Lubricant
(16) Grease fittings on 1/4 stroke weekly grease
presser foot
connecting plate

(16) Grease fittings on 1/4 stroke weekly grease

needle bar
connecting link
(dog bones)

(1) Grease fitting on 1 full stroke weekly grease

retainer drive tension
bearing

(4) Grease fittings on 1/4 stroke weekly grease

upper butterfly drive
on connecting link (1
pair on near, 1 pair on
far side)

(1) Grease fittings on ball 1 stroke quarterly grease

screw bearing
(support lower)

(5) Grease fittings on idler 1 stroke monthly grease

sprocket
NOTE: Wherever
there is a chain, there
is an idler sprocket.

(6) Grease fittings on rear 1/4 stroke monthly grease

butterfly support
bracket

(5) Upper butterfly 1/4 stroke monthly grease

support bracket

Grease fittings on 1 stroke quarterly grease

Sealmaster includes:
pillow block bearings
2-bolt flange bearings
4-bolt flange bearings

Daily = each 8 hour shift

Weekly = 40 operating hours
Monthly = every 150 operating hours
Quarterly = every 450 operating hours
Semi-Annually = every 1000 operating hours
* = Soak a piece of material with a few drops of light oil, then wipe over shaft to clean
and lubricate. Always dispose of soiled material properly.

Paragon M 312
 Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine General Maintenance

Table 11.4 Typical Properties of Mobil DTE Light Oil

Product Number 60014-B

Specific Gravity .867

Pour Point °C (°F) -7 (20)

Flash Point °C (°F) 204 (400)

Viscosity
cSt at 40°C 30.4
cSt at 100°C 5.1
SUS at 100°F 158
SUS at 210°F 44

Viscosity Index 95

ISO VG 32

Color, ASTM D 1500 1.5

Neut. No. 0.20

Rust Protection, ASTM D 665 A&B pass

Demulsibility, ASTM D 1401, min, to 0 ml emulsion

at 54°C (130°F) after 30 min. pass
at 82°C (180°F) after 1 hour ---

313 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Lubricating the Paragon M Quilting Machine

Table 11.5 Typical Properties of Almagard 3751 Vari-Purpose Grease

NLGI Grade #2

Penetration, worked 265-295

Thickener Type Li 12 OH

Oxidation PSI Loss 100 hours 5 max

Timken #OK Load 50

Rust D-1743 1,1,1

Dropping Point °F, D-2265 375

Water Spray D-4043 max. 40%

Viscosity
SUS at 100°F 1400-1600
SUS at 210°F 105 Typical

Viscosity Index 100

Pour Point °C (°F) -18 (0)

Flash Point °C (°F) 221 (430)

Fire Point °C (°F) 243 (470)

Texture Fibrous

Paragon M 314
 Replacing Fluorescent and Indicator Lights General Maintenance

Replacing Fluorescent and Indicator Lights

You may need to periodically replace worn or damaged lights. The Paragon M CE Compliant/EC
quilting machines use CE compliant lights that you can purchase from your local Compliant Meets the
standards required to sell
hardware store. Maintain a reserve supply. products in Europe. “CE”
is an abbreviation of the
Your machine arrives installed with: French term, “Conformite
Europeene.”
• F20T9WW fluorescent light bulbs.
• 757 light bulbs for the main power indicator and the control power button.
• 2AV/50mA ALBA for the start button.
• KM53 red indicator light bulbs (if you have the optional thread detection
system).

Replacing Fluorescent Lights

To replace the fluorescent lights:
1 Press the stop button and disconnect main power.
2 Open the rear sliding doors to gain access to the fluorescent lights.
3 Lift the plastic cover off the fluorescent lights.
4 Rotate the fluorescent bulb so that the pins align with the indentations
(slots).
5 Lift straight up to remove the bulb.
6 Position the new fluorescent bulb and rotate to lock in place.
7 Replace the plastic cover.
8 Close the sliding doors.

Replacing Main Power Indicator Light

To replace the main power light:
1 Press the stop button.
2 Disconnect all power from the quilting machine.
3 Locate the main power ON button on the main cabinet.
4 With the key, open the front panel of the main cabinet.

WARNING: This is a high voltage area. Always disconnect the main

power before accessing this area.

5 Locate the light holder. It is inside the cabinet on the left.

6 Push the lever on top of the light holder to unlock it.
7 Tip the light holder back.

315 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Replacing Fluorescent and Indicator Lights

8 Remove and replace the bulb.

9 Reposition the light holder and push the lever to lock it.
10 Restore power to the quilting machine.

NOTE: Always close and lock the panel before restoring power.

Replacing Control Power Button Light

The operator presses the control power button to enable the Paragon M to
operate. The button illuminates to signal that the machine is enabled for
operation. The button might not light up if the bulb is damaged, defective, or
incorrectly installed. A broken light bulb does not affect the operation of the
Paragon M quilting machine.

NOTE: Replace the control power button bulb from inside the main
cabinet. A key is required to open the cabinet.

To change the light bulb, do the following:

1 Turn the main power electrical switch to the OFF position.
2 Unlock and open the main cabinet.
3 From the back of the control button, move the locking lever on the top of the
switch.
4 Remove the back assembly of the switch. This assembly holds the light bulb.
5 Gently remove the bulb and replace it with a new one.
6 Replace the back assembly of the switch.
7 Snap the locking lever back into place.
8 Close the main cabinet doors and lock them.

Replacing Thread Detector Indicator Lights

To replace the thread detector indicator lights:
1 Press the stop button.
2 Disconnect all power from the quilting machine.
3 Remove thread detector.

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove thread from the detector.

4 Remove and replace the bulb.

5 Reposition the thread detector.
6 Restore power to the quilting machine.

Paragon M 316
 Maintaining the Isolator Pads General Maintenance

Maintaining the Isolator Pads

Locate the isolator pads under each leg of the Paragon M quilting machines.
These pads reduce vibration during high-speed quilting. As you determine air
pressure levels for each pad, mark the air pressure amount above that pad for
easy reference. Air pressure levels may vary from pad to pad, as you may also use
these pads for minor leveling adjustments.
Check the air pressure and condition of the isolator pads at least one time each
month. Add air as needed. If pressure decreases substantially, check the valve
stem assembly and the main body of the isolator. Rinse these areas with mild
soapy water to determine the location of possible leaks. If a leak is found in the
main body, replace the isolator. If a leak is found in the valve stem assembly,
either tighten the valve or replace the valve. The valve can be purchased at any
tire sales or service center.

NOTE: Always maintain the area surrounding the isolator pads.

Keep this area clear of debris and sharp objects. Keep the
area clean at all times.

317 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Review

Review
The questions in this section can help you to review the information presented in
this chapter. The answers are in Appendix E, “Answers to Review Questions”
starting on page 395.
1 True or False. Before cleaning or lubricating the Paragon M make sure that it
is turned off.
2 True or False. Only the person named on the tag is authorized to remove the
tag and reconnect power and air to the machine.
3 What is needed to properly clean the touch screen?
a. lint-free cloth
b. soap
c. vacuum cleaner
d. isopropyl alcohol
e. all of the above
4 True or False. The main shaft and upper rocker shafts require manual
lubrication.
5 The presser foot plate is located _______ .
6 The _______ system lubricates the eccentrics.
7 Under-greasing or over-greasing the eccentrics causes them to _______ .
8 Needle drive connecting links move the _______ up and down.
9 True or False. Presser foot drive assemblies are attached to the main shaft.
10 True or False. The upper butterfly takes up thread and gives thread to the
stitch.
11 The term “dog bone” is also called the (Choose one.):
a. Retainer
b. Looper drive link
c. Needle drive link
d. Presser foot guide rod
12 Clean the area associated with the front retainer drive: (Choose one.)
a. Weekly
b. Monthly
c. Bimonthly
d. Yearly
13 True or False. You do not have to manually lubricate the quilting machine
when using the auto-lubrication system.
14 True or False. The two types of grease used in the auto-lube system, Shell
Alvania EP00 (light) and Shell Alvania EP-1 (dark), are not interchangeable.
15 True or False. All grease fittings are lubricated one stroke monthly.
16 Check the air pressure in the isolator pads (Choose one.):

Paragon M 318
 Review General Maintenance

a. Weekly
b. Bimonthly
c. Monthly
d. Yearly
17 When changing the main power indicator light, always disconnect the
_______ before opening the main cabinet.

319 Quilting Machine

 General Maintenance Review

Paragon M 320
 Asking Questions to Solve Problems Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
12
This chapter contains a list of common problems that might occur while operating
the Paragon M. The following sections contain a description of a problem, the
likely cause of the problem, and some suggestions for fixing the problem.

Asking Questions to Solve Problems

If a problem occurs with the Paragon M, try to understand what happened to
cause the problem. Review the following questions and decide which sections in
this chapter might help you find an answer.

Does the Paragon M have Table 12.1, “Electrical and Control System
electrical power? Are indicator Problems” on page 322
lights illuminated?

Is the touch screen on? Are light Table 12.1, “Electrical and Control System
bulbs lit? Problems” on page 322

Will the Paragon M start if you Table 12.1, “Electrical and Control System
press the start button? Problems” on page 322

Are there sounds coming out of Table 12.3, “Mechanical Problems” on page 329
the Paragon M that you have not
heard before?

Are there new smells coming Table 12.3, “Mechanical Problems” on page 329
from the Paragon M?

Are there any marks on the Table 12.5, “Other Problems” on page 339
material coming from the
Paragon M?

Does the touch screen look the Table 12.5, “Other Problems” on page 339
same or are there changes in the
way it looks?

321 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Electrical and Control System Problems

Electrical and Control System Problems

Table 12.1 Electrical and Control System Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Main power does not turn 1 Main electrical 1 Turn the main
on. power switch is in electrical power
the OFF position. switch to the ON
position. “I” is ON;
“O” is OFF.
2 Faulty electrical 2 Notify an electrician
connection or the Gribetz
InternationalGribetz
International Service
Department.
3 Unknown cause 3 Notify an electrician
or the Gribetz
International Service
Department.
Quilting machine does 1 No product is 1 Select a product.
not start. selected
2 Loose power or 2 Notify an electrician
communication or the Gribetz
connection International Service
Departments.
3 Incorrect air 3 Check air pressure.
pressure Adjust to 80 to 90
PSI (5.5 to 6.2 bars).
4 Doors are open. One 4 Close doors.
of the Guard Doors
Fault icons appear
on the Main Run
screen.
Quilting machine turns 1 E-Stop pressed in 1 Reset E-Stop button.
off DURING operation. error
2 Over Travel Limit 2 Notify the Gribetz
activated or International Service
damaged. Department.
3 Guard door is open. 3 Close guard door
and recycle main
power.

Paragon M 322
 Electrical and Control System Problems Troubleshooting

Table 12.1 Electrical and Control System Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Computer does not turn 1 Control power 1 Press the control
on or is not functioning button was not power button
pressed. inward.
properly.
2 E-Stop buttons are 2 Reset the E-Stop
not reset. buttons.
3 Computer is
overheating. 3 Clean computer fans
and filters.
Over Travel Limit icon is 1 Over Travel Limit 1 Notify the Gribetz
displayed when the switch is activated International Service
or damaged. Department. Correct
computer is turned on,
this immediately.
but the computer does not
function.
Over Travel Limit switch 1 Pattern of more than 1 Notify the Gribetz
is activated or damaged. 6.5 inches (16.5cm) International Service
or 12.5 inches (30cm) Department. Correct
was chosen, or a size this immediately.
adjustment of this
dimension was
done.
Files do not copy from the 1 CompactFlash card 1 Replace with a new
computer to the is full, write- CompactFlash card.
protected, or
CompactFlash card.
damaged.
Files do not copy from the 1 CompactFlash card 1 Replace with new
CompactFlash card to the is damaged. CompactFlash card.
computer. 2 CompactFlash card 2 Make sure you have
does not contain any correctly copied the
data. appropriate data on
the CompactFlash
card.
3 Computer cannot 3 Notify the Gribetz
hold any additional International Service
data. Department.

323 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Electrical and Control System Problems

Table 12.1 Electrical and Control System Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Icon does not respond to 1 May be a display- 1 Select another icon.
touch. only icon
2 Screen may be dirty. 2 Clean surface of
operator console.
3 Cable or control 3 Notify your
system error or supervisor or the
damage to touch Gribetz
screen International Service
Department.
4 May be a future 4 Select another icon.
feature icon
5 Finger slides off 5 Lift finger directly
icon. off icon.
6 May need 6 Notify the Gribetz
calibration International Service
Department.
7 Fault icons are 7 Correct fault.
shown.
Help icon does not 1 Inactive icon; this is 1 Call the Helpline.
respond to touch. a future feature.

Cannot access certain 1 These icons are 1 Notify your

icons; system reverts to passcode protected. supervisor or the
Gribetz
Main Run screen
International Service
Department.
Passcode malfunction 1 Passcode has been 1 Notify your
changed. supervisor for
assistance or contact
the Gribetz
International Service
Department.

Paragon M 324
 Electrical and Control System Problems Troubleshooting

Table 12.1 Electrical and Control System Problems

Problem Cause Solution

No Air icon appears. 1 No air pressure 1 Check the air
pressure. Adjust to
80 to 90 PSI (5.5 to
6.2 bars).
2 Air is not turned on. 2 Turn on the air.
3 Air lines are 3 Notify a supervisor
damaged. to check air lines.
Repair or replace the
air lines, if
necessary.
Drive Fault icon appears. 1 Error in one of the 1 Clear any
three axis drive mechanical binding
systems in the machine. If
this does not correct
the problem, notify
the Gribetz
International Service
Department.
Motion System Controller 1 Internal 1 Notify the Gribetz
Fault icon appears. communications International Service
error Department.

Carriage Fault icon 1 Error in carriage 1 Notify the Gribetz

appears. axis motor International Service
Department.

Feed Fault icon appears. 1 Error in feed axis 1 Notify the Gribetz
motor. International Service
Department.

325 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Electrical and Control System Problems

Table 12.1 Electrical and Control System Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Guard Door Fault icon 1 Front far-side guard 1 Close guard doors.
appears. doors are open.
2 Switches are out of 2 Notify the Gribetz
alignment. International Service
Department.

Guard Door Fault icon 1 Front home-side 1 Close guard doors.

appears. guard doors are
open. 2 Notify the Gribetz
2 Switches are out of International Service
alignment. Department.

Guard Door Fault icon 1 Feed roller guard 1 Close guard door.
appears. door is open.
2 Switches are out of 2 Notify the Gribetz
alignment. International Service
Department.

Guard Door Fault icon 1 Front clear door 1 Close guard door.
appears. guard is open.
2 Switches are out of 2 Notify the Gribetz
alignment. International Service
Department.

Guard Door Fault icon 1 Rear guard doors 1 Close guard doors.
appears. are open.
2 Switches are out of 2 Notify the Gribetz
alignment. International Service
Department.

Guard Door Fault icon 1 Rear far-side guard 1 Close guard doors.
appears. doors are open.
2 Switches are out of 2 Notify the Gribetz
alignment. International Service
Department.

Paragon M 326
 Electrical and Control System Problems Troubleshooting

Table 12.1 Electrical and Control System Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Guard Door Fault icon 1 Rear home-side 1 Close guard doors.
appears. guard doors are
open. 2 Notify the Gribetz
2 Switches are out of International Service
alignment. Department.

Needle Fault icon 1 Error in needle axis 1 Notify the Gribetz

appears. motor. International Service
Department.

Product Identification 1 No jobs in queue. 1 Add jobs to queue

icon appears. or select a job and
sew in Single
Product mode.

No Panel Cutter icons 1 System does not 1 Panel cutter must be

appears. recognize a programmable type
connection with a (Pro I or Pro ME).
panel cutter. 2 Turn panel cutter on
first, then quilting
machine.

PLC Fault icon appears. 1 Error with panel 1 See panel cutter
cutter. operations manual
or notify the Gribetz
International Service
Department.

327 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Touch Screen Problems

Touch Screen Problems

Table 12.2 Touch Screen Problems

Problem Cause Solution

System is not set 1 System is set for 1 Set measurements to Metric
in Metric English from the Tools screen.
measurements.
measurements.
System is not set 1 System is set for 1 Set measurements to English
in English metric from the Tools screen.
measurements.
measurements.
Icon on the screen 1 The icon might 1 Touch another icon to see if it
does not respond be a display- responds.
only icon.
to touch.
2 Finger slides off 2 Lift finger directly off icon.
icon.
3 Screen might be 3 Clean the surface of the touch
dirty. screen.
4 Touch screen 4 Notify a supervisor or the
might need Gribetz International Service
adjustment. Department.
5 Damaged touch 5 Notify a supervisor or the
screen Gribetz International Service
Department.
Touch screen is 1 Main electrical 1 Check the main electrical power
blank. power switch is switch. If it is OFF, turn the
in the OFF switch to the ON position. “I” is
position. ON; “O” is OFF.
2 Computer 2 Press computer power button
power button is beneath the monitor.
not activated.
3 Loose power 3 Notify the Gribetz International
connection Service Department.
Computer does 1 Emergency (E- 1 Reset E-Stop button.
not turn on or is Stop) buttons
are not reset.
not working
properly. 2 Loose power 2 Notify the Gribetz International
connection service Department.

Paragon M 328
 Mechanical Problems Troubleshooting

Mechanical Problems
Table 12.3 Mechanical Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Guard Door Fault 1 Guard doors are 1 Close guard doors securely.
icon appears. open.
2 Switches are out 2 Notify the Gribetz International
of alignment. Service Department.
No Air icon 1 No air pressure 1 Check the air pressure. Adjust to
appears. 80 to 90 PSI (5.5 to 6.2 bars).
2 Air is not 2 Turn on the air.
turned on.
3 Air lines are 3 Notify a supervisor to check air
damaged. lines. Repair or replace the air
lines, if necessary.
Eccentrics are 1 Over-lubricated 1 See Chapter 11, “General
overheating. or under- Maintenance” for proper
lubricated lubrication procedures.
Needles do not 1 Needle drive 1 Notify the Gribetz International
stop in the UP Easy Zero is Service Department.
misadjusted.
position.
2 Drive system 2 Notify the Gribetz International
error Service Department.
Fluorescent lights 1 Light bulbs are 1 Replace bulbs.
do not function. worn or
damaged.
2 Power is not 2 Turn on power.
turned on.
3 Switch on light 3 Turn on switch.
unit is not on.

329 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Mechanical Problems

Table 12.3 Mechanical Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Indicator lights 1 Light bulbs are 1 Replace bulbs.
do not function. worn or
damaged.
2 Power is not 2 Turn on power.
turned on.
3 Lighting unit is 3 Replace unit.
worn or
damaged.
4 Individual 4 Replace thread detector.
thread detector
is worn or
damaged.

Paragon M 330
 Sewing Problems Troubleshooting

Sewing Problems
Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Pattern length is 1 Feed 1 Adjust Feed Compensation from
distorted. See also compensation the Point & Sew screen.
needs
“Material
adjustment.
wrinkles or
2 Incorrect length 2 Change length of pattern.
puckers.” on
is entered in
page 337 in this program.
table.
Pattern width is 1 Carriage 1 Adjust carriage compensation
distorted. See also compensation from the Point & Sew screen.
needs
“Material
adjustment.
wrinkles or
2 Incorrect width 2 Change width of pattern.
puckers.” on
is entered in
page 337 in this program.
table.
Needle breaks or 1 Bent or 1 Too much pre-load on the
is bent. damaged needle. Correct pre-load.
needle
2 Operator pulls 2 Do not pull thread. Always cut
thread to break thread.
it.
3 Too much 3 Correct thread tension.
thread tension
4 Thread is 4 Check thread for knots. Replace
knotted. thread spool, if necessary.

5 Incorrect needle 5 Use #24 for all heavy quilting.

size
6 Retainer is bent. 6 Replace retainer.
7 Incorrect looper 7 Check looper and correct.
adjustment
8 Incorrect 8 Check presser foot plate
presser foot adjustment.
plate
adjustment
9 Materials are 9 Change materials.
too thick.

331 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Sewing Problems

Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Looper does not 1 Top thread 1 Correct tension.
catch loop. tension is too
tight or too
loose.
2 Bottom thread 2 Correct tension.
tension is too
tight or too
loose.
3 Damaged 3 Check looper and thread.
looper or thread Replace if necessary.
4 Loopers, 4 Perform Loop Take Time
needles, procedures.
retainers, or
needle guards
are not correctly
aligned.
5 Twisted thread 5 Replace thread spool.
Not cutting top 1 Improper 1 Correct tension and replace
thread (tail) tension or dull trimmer.
trimmer
during Tack &
Jump

Paragon M 332
 Sewing Problems Troubleshooting

Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Thread breaks. 1 Thread tension 1 Adjust thread tension.
is too tight.
2 Needle or 2 Rethread needle or looper.
looper is
improperly
threaded.
3 Thread is 3 Test thread.
twisted.
4 Excessive knots 4 Check thread condition.
in thread
5 Burrs on needle, 5 Check needles, retainers, and
retainer, or loopers for nicks and burrs.
looper Replace as necessary.
6 Thread is 6 Check thread path.
tangled around
tension spring.
7 Tension disc is 7 Clean tension disc.
not clean.
8 Thread path is 8 Check thread path. Re-lace
not laced in a thread, if necessary.
straight line.
9 Retainer or 9 Check retainer or trimmer
trimmer is position.
positioned
incorrectly.
10 Using wrong 10 Use correct thread. See “Types
thread for of Thread” on page 228.
application.
11 Too much 11 Reduce stitches per inch.
elongation.
12 Worn or 12 Replace worn or damaged
damaged sewing machine parts.
sewing machine
parts.

333 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Sewing Problems

Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Material becomes 1 Precompression 1 Correct tension.
caught under roller is
adjusted
presser foot plate.
incorrectly. 2 Tighten material tension.
2 Material tension
is too loose.
3 Fill materials 3 Adjust top, bottom, and fill
extend beyond material alignment.
edges of top
and bottom
materials
4 Too much 4 Readjust presser foot to
material for compensate for thickness of
presser foot material.
adjustment

Paragon M 334
 Sewing Problems Troubleshooting

Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Skipped stitches 1 Bent or worn 1 Check needle. Replace if
needle. necessary.
2 Damaged 2 Check thread condition.
thread
3 Top thread 3 Correct tension.
tension is too
tight or too
loose.
4 Bottom thread 4 Correct tension.
tension is too
tight or too
loose.
5 Retainers or 5 Replace retainers or trimmers.
trimmers are
not square.
6 Loopers, 6 Perform Loop Take Time
needles, or procedures.
needle guards
are not correctly
aligned.
7 Burrs on looper 7 Replace looper or retainer.
or retainer
8 Burrs in thread 8 Change thread path.
path
9 Worn looper 9 Notify the Gribetz International
shafts Service Department.
10 Worn looper 10 Notify the Gribetz International
drive link Service Department.
assemblies
11 Front to back 11 Notify the Gribetz International
play in loopers Service Department.
Material does not 1 Tension is too 1 Correct tension.
move from side to loose on
precompression
side.
roller.
2 Top and bottom 2 Correct tension.
material tension
is too loose.

335 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Sewing Problems

Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Material does not 1 Tension is too 1 Correct tension.
move forward loose on front
feed rollers
and backward
during Tack & 2 Tension is too 2 Correct tension.
loose on rear
Jump.
feed rollers.
Trailing edge of 1 Material was 1 Re-thread material.
material has not replenished
at splicing
moved past the
station.
in-feed guard.

Paragon M 336
 Sewing Problems Troubleshooting

Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Material wrinkles 1 Too many 1 Reduce stitches per inch. Puckers/Puckering
stitches per inch Refers to the wrinkled
or puckers.
appearance of a seam,
2 Floater bar is in 2 Floater bar must float freely which can be caused by a
the UP position when sewing 360-degree and number of factors.
when sewing Tack & Jump patterns. Release
360-degree and floater bar.
Tack & Jump
patterns.
3 Fill materials 3 Adjust top, backing, and fill
extend beyond material alignment.
edges of top or
backing
materials,
causing the
material to
“drag” as it
moves through
the quilting
machine.
4 Tension is too 4 Correct tension.
loose or too
tight:
- on front feed
rollers
- on rear feed
rollers
- on
precompression
roller
- on the bow bar
- at top material
station
- at backing
station
- at fill station

5 Presser foot 5 Notify the Gribetz International

plate is not Service Department.
aligned
properly.

337 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Sewing Problems

Table 12.4 Sewing Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Tack & Jump does 1 Thread is not 1 Lace through pneumatic tension
not function laced through discs.
pneumatic
properly.
tension discs.
2 Tension discs 2 Clean tension discs.
are not clean.
3 Thread is not 3 Lace through porcelain eyelet.
laced through
porcelain eyelet.
4 Low air 4 Check air pressure. Adjust to 80
pressure to 90 PSI (5.5 to 6.2 bars).

5 Looper, needle, 5 Check adjustments.

or trimmer is
not adjusted
properly.
6 Thread tension 6 Correct tension.
is incorrect.
7 Thread tail 7 Correct Pattern Information tail
length is set too length to 0.75 (19mm).
small.
8 Presser foot 8 Check presser foot plate
plate adjustment.
adjustment is
incorrect.
9 Pattern 9 Make sure settings are correct
Compensation for the product.
settings are
incorrect.

Paragon M 338
 Other Problems Troubleshooting

Other Problems
Table 12.5 Other Problems

Problem Cause Solution

Material becomes 1 Quilting 1 Clean the machine.
soiled when machine is
dirty.
sewing.
2 Machine is 2 Check lubrication. See Chapter
over-lubricated. 11, “General Maintenance” for
proper lubrication procedures.

339 Quilting Machine

 Troubleshooting Other Problems

Paragon M 340
 Glossary of Terms

A
Glossary of Terms
Appendix A lists all of the terms introduced in each chapter along with additional
terms that are found throughout the manual. We hope these terms are useful,
especially when translating to languages other than English.

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
activate To put a device into an operational state. To supply control power
or the voltage which allows movement of electro-mechanical
components.

actuate To put into mechanical action or motion.

actuator power Electricity supplied to a mechanical device for moving or

controlling equipment.

anti-static Apparel that reduces the discharge of static electricity. Usually

clothing having a fiber content of at least 50% cotton.

appendix Plural “appendices.” Supplementary material usually attached at

the end of a book.

attire Dress; items to cover the body such as clothing, headgear, eye
wear, etc.

automated A mechanism that works by itself without direct human

lubrication intervention to provide lubrication as a surface coating to specific
system moving parts. Also called auto-lube.

backing Any fabric or sheeting material that is used during quilting to

anchor stitches.

backtacking Refers to the reverse feed sewing at the beginning and ending of
the seam to prevent the thread from unraveling.

bars A metric unit of pressure equal to one million dynes (a unit of

force) per square centimeter.

batch mode A mode in which the quilting machine is scheduled to produce a

group or series of products in a specific order.

beeswax A commercial wax obtained by processing and purifying the crude

wax of the honeybee and used in making candles, crayons, and
polishes.

341 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
bottom thread Refers to the under thread in a stitch formation, usually called a
looper thread on chain stitch machines. Looper threads feed
directly off the cone or spool into the sewing machine eliminating
bobbin changes

bridge A crosswise platform that provides reinforcement and distribution

of stress. The bridge on this quilting machine supports the upper
sewing mechanism.

butterfly A part of the machine that takes up thread and gives it to the
stitch. At the end of the stitch, the butterfly mechanism tightens
the thread with a quick pull through a toggle motion.

butterfly drive The means by which the butterfly assembly is given motion.

burr A rough, metal edge, usually in the eye of a needle.

carriage A feature that corrects pattern distortion in the carriage direction

compensation (side to side).

catwalk A narrow, elevated walkway.

CE compliant To be in accordance with regulations and standards pertaining to

products sold in Europe, which are regulated by European health,
safety, and environment protection legislation (product
directives). The letters “CE” are an abbreviation of the French
phrase “Conformite Europeene.”

clamp A device placed against the side (or sides) of a material roll in
either a material trough or a material handling pack to keep the
roll of material from moving side to side.

components An essential group of parts of a larger piece of equipment.

cone/spool Threads are wound on spools or cones with a precision wind.

Most cones today are made of plastic that can be recycled.
Industrial sewing threads are generally wound on larger cones
with 6,000 yards, 12,000 yards, or more

continuous Refers to synthetic fibers of an indefinite length.

filament

control switch A device or mechanism used to regulate or guide the operation of

the machine.

CRT Cathode Ray Tube

crop/crop-out The short section of waste material that is cut, removed, and
discarded, usually where two different panel patterns meet or
material is spliced together.

current product The product currently selected to be sewn, or that is being sewn.

Paragon M 342
 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
damask Woven ticking produced on a loom. The design is woven into the
fabric rather than printed on the surface.

debris An accumulation of loose material, trash, garbage, litter, or junk.

This may include, but is not limited to, waste material, and boxes.

denier Denotes the size, the weight, and the strength of the thread. Refers
to a sizing system used for continuous filaments. Denier is the
gram weight of 9000 meters of sewing thread.

density A measure of weight per cubic volume, usually expressed in

pounds per cubic foot. Often referred to when discussing foam.

disable/enable To prevent operation / to cause to operate.

distortion/to To twist or bend out of shape. Occurs when the machine pulls
distort material in more than one direction, or when thick material is
used, especially during changes in pattern direction.

DOS Disk Operating System

drag Occurs when something is pulled or drawn along or over a

surface, causing slow or difficult motion.

drive The means or apparatus for transmitting motion of a machine or a

machine part.

drive shaft A long, generally cylindrical bar that rotates and transmits power
from a motor or an engine to the rest of the machine.

EC compliant To be in accordance with regulations and standards pertaining to

products sold in Europe, which are regulated by European health,
safety, and environment protection legislation (product
directives). The letters “CE” are an abbreviation of the French
phrase “Conformite Europeene.”

eccentric A disk or wheel with its axis of revolution displaced from its
center so that it is capable of imparting back and forth motion.

e Plus Series A multi-needle chain stitch quilting machine introduced in 1995

that is capable of high speed quilting up to 1500 RPM.

e Series A multi-needle chain stitch quilting machine introduced in 1993

that is capable of high speed quilting up to 1200 RPM.

e-stop Emergency stop

enable/disable To prevent operation / to cause to operate.

eyelet A small thread guide.

far side The “Far Side” is the area of the machine that is farthest from the
main cabinet, and usually the farthest from where the operator
stands.

343 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
fabric tails The back edge of material. The edge of material that enters or exits
the machine last. Also called the “trailing edge.”

feed A feature that corrects pattern distortion in the feed direction

compensation (forward or backward movement).

field/fields Specific information areas typically associated with a database. In

the Point & Sew system, these areas are displayed on the screen for
information, data entry, and selection.

General One of the three central management agencies in the Federal

Services Government.
Administration

grip roller Grips the inside of the cardboard material tube to prevent the
material from unrolling. Usually used for backing material and
with the Material Wind-up option.

hearing A device worn to reduce the level of sound where exposure to

protection loud noise is expected, such as ear plugs, ear muffs, and hearing
bands.

home Also known as “home position.” A designated starting position for

specific components.

horseplay Rough or boisterous play; roughhousing.

initialize The machine’s search for its “home” parameter; the machine
moves or sews to the pattern’s start position.

input Information put into a communications system for transmission or

into a data processing system for processing.

job/jobs Work order or product schedule. A job will include a product, the
mode, and the number of panels, to be sewn for that product.

jog A steady forward or backward movement of material.

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

leading edge The edge of the material that unrolls from the material roll. The
first edge to enter or exit the machine.

load/download Computing transfer (data) from one storage device or system to

another (especially a remote one).

looper A stitch forming device used on chain stitch sewing machines to

form a stitch. Assists with making loops as part of stitch formation.

looper thread Refers to the under thread in a stitch formation on chain stitch
machines. Looper threads feed directly off the cone or spool into
the sewing machine eliminating bobbin changes. Also called
bottom thread.

Paragon M 344
 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
main electrical This device, either a switch or a lever, is located on the main
disconnect cabinet. It controls all electrical power to the machine by making
and breaking the contact between the equipment and the main
power supply.

Main Run The screen that appears after the computer is turned on and the
screen system completes the diagnostic tests. You can gain access to
additional function screens from this screen.

mattress A manufactured product to sleep on, consisting of various resilient

materials covered with an outer ticking. Comes from the Arabic
term “matrah” meaning to throw down. Early Arabs traveled with
their bedding and threw it down on the ground or floor at night.

menu Screen display that prompts you to select options and enter
specifications.

metatarsal/ The top of the foot between the ankle and the toes.
metatarsus

mode A method or way of performing a specific task.

monitor A computer display similar to a television screen.

move to start An event that happens when the quilting machine changes from
one pattern to another; the carriage moves to the start position.

multi-tap A device that converts power from one circuit to another at the
transformer same frequency but at a changed voltage and current.

near side The “Near Side” is the area of the machine that is nearest the main
cabinet and typically where the operator stands.

needle The primary stitch forming device used on all sewing machines to
carry thread through a seam. See Figure 10.9, “Parts of a Needle”
on page 260

needle bar The upright mechanical bar that holds the needle in the correct
position.

needle size Refers to the diameter of the needle measured at the needle eye.
Today the most common needle sizing system used around the
world is the metric system. The metric number represents the
percent of a millimeter. Common needle sizes are:
Light weight, 60-70, shirts, blouses, tops
Medium weight, 75-100, pants, jackets
Heavy weight, 120-160, jeans, overalls, parkas

needle spacing A term that refers to the distance between the needle or the
distance between the rows of stitch where more than one row of
stitch is being produced simultaneously

345 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
Nylatron® A lightweight durable mechanical plastic used in place of metal. It
contains solid lubricants, thereby reducing lubrication
requirements. It also improves wear resistance and provides noise
reduction

nyliner bearing Precision molded bearings from polymers. Allowing smooth

linear, rotary, and oscillating motion. Offers a low friction, long
life, smooth and quiet operation, and is corrosion resistance.

obstruction Something that hinders action or progress.

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration, a U.S.

government agency.

output Information taken out of a communications system for

transmission or out of a data processing system for processing.

panel The layers of material that constitutes the top or bottom of the
mattress.

Panel Tracker The area on the Main Run screen that displays the most recent
panels in queue for the quilting machine and all sewn panels in
queue from the quilting machine to the panel cutter.

Paragon M A multi-needle chain stitch quilting machine introduced in 2002.

Paragon Series A multi-needle chain stitch quilting machine introduced in 1996

that is capable of high speed quilting up to 1500 RPM. This series
replaced the e, and e Plus series and includes the Paragon 4,
Paragon 3, and Paragon 2.

parameter A constant element or factor, especially serving as a limit or

boundary.

passcode A word, or a sequence of letters or numbers, that allows access to

all, or part of, a computer’s screen.

permit to work Also known as “lockout and tagout.” Refers to special safety
system procedures that the operator uses to secure the parts of the quilting
machine before beginning service or maintenance.

plate A rolled, thin, usually rigid sheet of metal with an even surface
and uniform thickness; often part of a mechanism.

pneumatic Refers to pneumatic power, which provides energy for the

machine’s parts using compressed air.

ply/plies Refers to the number of singles yarns twisted together to make a

sewing thread. Most core and spun sewing threads have either
two or three ply constructions. The ply twist is normally a “Z” or
left twist compared to an “S” or right twist in the single yarns.

Paragon M 346
 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
pneumatic- Used when sewing Tack & Jump patterns. During the “jump,”
actuated compressed air is exerted on a bar behind the discs allowing the
tension discs bar to make contact with a pin in each of these dices, thereby
releasing all tension during the “jump” segment of the pattern.

polyester A synthetic fiber made from a chemical composition of diethyl

terephthalate and ethylene glycol.

precision parts Components with accurate, calibrated measurements or positions.

pre-load A procedure defining the lateral (left to right) pressure of the

looper against the needle.

presser foot A device that applies pressure to a product in manufacturing. The

presser foot on Gribetz International quilting machines
compresses material as it is being sewn.

programmable A high speed panel cutter where the control system of the cutter
panel cutter receives the requested size data through communication with a
quilting machine or by manual entry from the operator.

psi Pounds per square inch; a measure of air pressure.

pucker/ Refers to the wrinkled appearance of a seam, which can be caused

puckering by a number of factors.

queue A sequence of stored data or programs awaiting processing, such

as an ordered list of jobs.

quilting The surface treatment in which the cover, foam and/or other fibers
are sewn together, using various stitch patterns on quilting
machinery, including scroll or panel quilters (single needle) and
multi-needle quilters.

railroad A distinctive pattern which allows the operator to achieve results

pattern similar to specific Class I and Class II patterns.

Ready Mode A product is selected, no fault indications are present, and the Start
icon is shown on the Main Run screen, indicating that the machine
is ready to begin sewing.

reservoir A receptacle or chamber for storing fluid.

retainer A device that holds and spreads the thread into a triangle as part
of stitch formation.

run, running To control the functioning of a machine. To be in action or

operation.

safety glasses Impact-resistant eye wear. Lenses should be clear, not tinted.

scarf The curved (or grooved) part of the needle above the needle eye.

347 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
sensor A device that receives a signal or a stimulus (such as heat,
pressure, light, motion, etc.) and responds to it.

sewing box Central section of the machine where all sewing activity takes
place. It is visible from the front or the back.

skipped Refers to malformed stitches that are caused when a stitch-forming

stitches device misses its appropriate loop. On chain stitch machines,
skipped stitches can unravel allowing the seam to fail.

splice, splicing To join together; the act of joining together.

spool/cone Threads are wound on spools or cones with a precision wind.

Most cones today are made of plastic that can be recycled.
Industrial sewing threads are generally wound on larger cones
with 6,000 yards, 12,000 yards, or more

station The place or position where a person or thing stands or is assigned

to stand or operate from, such as a cutting station.

step/steps A product within a Pattern Link product.

stitches per Refers to the number of stitches made in one inch of seam, starting
inch (spi) at a needle penetration and measuring the lengths of thread
between needle penetrations.

tenacity A term relating to the strength per size of thread and is generally
measured in grams per denier. Threads made from continuous
filament fibers are stronger and have a higher tenacity than thread
made from staple fibers.

tension disc A metal disc specifically designed to apply tension to thread.

thread break Caused by a number of variables. See Chapter 12,

“Troubleshooting”

tick/ticking A strong, tightly woven, decorative or finished fabric for covering

mattresses and foundations. It is also known as “top material.”
Common types include: damask, knit, print, woven stripe, and
non-woven.

timing A procedure to ensure synchronization of moving parts.

toggle To alternate between two types of operations.

top material A strong, tightly woven, decorative or finished fabric for covering
mattresses and foundations. It is also known as “tick” or “ticking.”
Common types include: damask, knit, print, woven stripe, and
non-woven.

torque The amount of force you apply to a type of lever arm, such as a
wrench, to produce a twisting or a rotating motion.

Paragon M 348
 Glossary of Terms

Table A.1 Terms and Descriptions

Term Description
touch screen A display screen on which the user selects options (as from a
menu) by touching an icon on the screen.

trimmer Functions like the retainer, but also cuts the thread after the “tack”
and during the “jump” for Tack & Jump patterns.

trough A long, narrow, generally shallow receptacle. On the quilting

machine, the trough holds the ticking.

twist In thread construction, “twist” refers to the number of turns

around the axis. The direction of the twist can be an “S” or “Z”
direction. Generally, sewing threads are made with a “Z” twist
because most sewing machine stitch forming devices enter the
needle loop from the right-hand side and this reduces the
unplying of the thread during sewing.

349 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Terms

Paragon M 350
 Glossary of Screens

Glossary of Screens
B
Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.1 Splash Screen Introductory screen. Identifies that systems
are operating correctly.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
autoschedule ON, autoschedule OFF,
database okay, no panel cutter, panel cutter,
panel cutter status, quality control, servo
okay, view system log

Figure B.2 Main Run Screen The Main Run screen appears after the Splash
screen. The screen to your left shows a
machine during batch mode operation.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
backing material, control power on, elapsed
time or wait, fill#1, fill#2, fill#3, fill#4, fill#5,
fill#6, floater bar - down, floater bar - up, help,
idle, info, I/O functions okay, job schedule,
panel tracker, jobs low in que, jump, last job in
que, look ahead, machine throughput counter,
needle setting, number, panel cutter
communicating, panel length, panel width,
pattern, product identification, presser foot
(HI), presser foot (LOW), product yield
counter, running, servo bus power on, servos
okay, set loop take time, speed graph, start,
start later, start loop take time, start now,
stitch density, stop at end of product, time,
top material, tools, yield factor
This screen will also show various fault icons
should an error occur.
carriage fault, control power off, feed fault,
guard door faults, I/O fault, no air, no jobs in
que, no power, over travel limit fault, panel
cutter faults, servo bus power off, servo fault,
thread detector fault

351 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.3 Jobs Schedule Set Up Access to this screen is from the Jobs Schedule
Screen icon on the Main Run screen. Use this screen
to create or edit the job schedule. From this
screen you can also edit panel width and
length, enter job quantity, select the mode to
wind-up material or cut panels, or access the
Pattern Selection screen to further edit the
selected product.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
add, arrow down, arrow up, check okay,
check select, help, info, insert job, delete,
mode, move, number, panel length, panel
width, product identification, quantity, search

Figure B.4 Jobs Schedule Set Up Access to this screen is from the Mode icon on
Screen - Type of Mode the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen. Touch the
keyboard to enter the type of mode, W for
Wind-up or P for Panel, then touch Enter to
accept entry.
See Figure B.3, “Jobs Schedule Set Up Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.5 Jobs Schedule Set Up Access to this screen is from the Panel Length
Screen - Panel Length icon on the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen.
Touch the numbers on the keypad to enter the
panel length, then touch Enter to accept entry.
See Figure B.3, “Jobs Schedule Set Up Screen”
for icon definitions.

Paragon M 352
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.6 Jobs Schedule Set Up Access to this screen is from the Panel Width
Screen - Panel Width icon on the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen.
Touch the numbers on the keypad to enter the
panel width, then touch Enter to accept entry.
See Figure B.3, “Jobs Schedule Set Up Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.7 Jobs Schedule Set Up Access to this screen is from the left Number
Screen - Quantity icon on the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen.
Touch the numbers on the keypad to enter the
job quantity, then touch Enter to accept entry.
See Figure B.3, “Jobs Schedule Set Up Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.8 Help Screen This is a future feature.

353 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.9 Pattern Compensation Access to this screen is from the Product
Search screen.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
cancel, carriage compensation, feed
compensation, help, info, modify pattern,
pattern length compensation, pattern width
compensation, stitch density

Screen
Figure B.10 Point & Sew Look Access to this screen is from the Look Ahead
Ahead Screen icon on the Main Run screen.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
add, arrow down, arrow up, arrow go to first
page, arrow go to last page, backing material,
check okay, check select, fill#1, fill#2, fill#3,
fill#4, fill#5, fill#6, help, info, insert job,
delete, mode, move, number, panel length,
panel width, product identification, quantity,
search, top material

Figure B.11 Product Information Access to this screen is from the Product icon
Screen on the Main Run screen. A sequence of
screens will appear over this screen to prompt
you for input. This screen reappears after all
Product Entry screens are completed.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons””.
add, arrow down, arrow up, arrow go to first
page, arrow go to last page, backing material,
carriage compensation, check okay, clone,
description, feed compensation, fill#1, fill#2,
fill#3, fill#4, fill#5, fill#6, help, info, insert job,
machine speed, delete, needle setting, panel
length, panel width, pattern, pattern type,
product identification, search, set presser foot,
stitch density, unit
The following icons appear on Tack & Jump
products only:
feed jump, number of tacks, tack type, tack
modify, tail length

Paragon M 354
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.12 Product Information - This is the last of a sequence of screens that
Completed Screen, Continuous appears when creating a product for
continuous patterns. Access to this screen is
also from the Product icon on the Main Run
screen of a completed product created using a
continuous pattern.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.13 Product Information - This is the last of a sequence of screens that
Completed Screen, Tack & Jump appears when creating a product for Tack &
Jump patterns. Access to this screen is also
from the Product icon on the Main Run screen
of a completed product created using a Tack
& Jump pattern.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: When creating a Tack & Jump
product, four additional screens appear
during the product entry sequence, they are:
Feed Jump, Number of Tacks, Tack Modify,
and Tail Length.

Figure B.14 Product Entry #1 This is the first of a sequence of screens that
Screen - Product Identification appears when creating a product. Touch the
keyboard to enter the product identification,
up to 15 characters, then touch Enter to accept
the entry. Access to this screen is also from the
Product Identification icon on the Product
Entry screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

355 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.15 Product Entry #2 This is the second of a sequence of screens that
Screen - Description appears when creating a product. Touch the
keyboard to enter the product description, up
to 30 characters, then touch Enter to accept
entry. Access to this screen is also from the
Product Description icon on the Product Entry
screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.16 Product Entry #3 This is the third of a sequence of screens that
Screen - Type of Pattern appears when creating a product. Touch the
keyboard to enter the pattern type, C for
Continuous or T for Tack & Jump, then touch
Enter to accept entry. Access to this screen is
also from the Pattern Type icon on the
Product Entry screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.17 Product Entry #4 This is the fourth of a sequence of screens that
Screen - Product Selection appears when creating a product. Touch any
Pattern icon to select that pattern. Pattern
icons are listed in numeric, then alphabetic
order. Use the Arrow Up and Arrow Down
icons to scroll to the previous or next row. Use
the Arrow Go To First Page and Arrow Go To
Last Page icons to go to the beginning or end
of the product list. Access to this screen is also
from the Pattern icon on the Main Run screen
and on the Product Entry screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Paragon M 356
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.18 Product Entry #5 This is the fifth of a sequence of screens that
Screen - appears when creating a product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.19 Product Entry #6 This is the sixth of a sequence of screens that
Screen - appears when creating a product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.20 Product Entry #7 This is the seventh of a sequence of screens

Screen - Machine Speed that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keypad to enter the speed up to 1500 RPM
for Class IV, Tack & Jump, and Pattern Link
products and 1200 RPM for Class I-III. Then,
touch Enter to accept entry. Access to this
screen is also from the Machine Speed icon on
the Main Run screen.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

357 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.21 Product Entry #8 This is the eighth of a sequence of screens that
Screen - Stitch Density appears when creating a product. Touch the
keypad to enter the number of stitches per
inch (5-10), then touch Enter to accept entry.
Access to this screen is also from the Stitch
Density icon on the Pattern Compensation
screen and on the Main Run screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.22 Product Entry #9 This is the ninth of a sequence of screens that
Screen - Needle Setting appears when creating a product. Touch the
keyboard to enter the needle setting
description, number of needles, and needle
setting, then touch Enter to accept entry.
Access to this screen is also from the Needle
Setting icon on the Main Run screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.23 Product Entry #10 This is the tenth of a sequence of screens that
Screen - Feed Compensation appears when creating a product. Touch the
keypad to enter a + or - number value in 5%
intervals to adjust pattern length in the feed
direction, then touch Enter to accept entry.
Access to this screen is also from the Feed
Compensation icon on the Pattern
Compensation screen and on the Main Run
screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Paragon M 358
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.24 Product Entry #11 This is the eleventh of a sequence of screens
Screen - Carriage Compensation that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keypad to enter a + or - number value in
5% intervals to adjust pattern width in the
carriage direction, then touch Enter to accept
entry. Access to this screen is also from the
Carriage Compensation icon on the Pattern
Compensation screen and on the Main Run
screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.25 Product Entry #12 This is the twelfth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Panel Width that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keypad to enter the panel length, then
touch Enter to accept entry. Access to this
screen is also from the Panel Length icon on
the Main Run screen, Point & Sew Look
Ahead screen, and Jobs Schedule Set Up
screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.26 Product Entry #13 This is the thirteenth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Panel Width that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keypad to enter the panel width, then
touch Enter to accept entry. Access to this
screen is also from the Panel Width icon on
the Main Run screen, Point & Sew Look
Ahead screen, and Jobs Schedule Set Up
screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

359 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.27 Product Entry #14 This is the fourteenth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Backing Material that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keyboard to enter the name of the backing
material up to 15 characters, then touch Enter
to accept entry. Access to this screen is also
from the Backing Material icon on the Main
Run screen and Point & Sew Look Ahead
screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.28 Product Entry #15 This is the fifteenth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Fill Material #1 that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keyboard to enter the name of fill material
#1 up to 15 characters, then touch Enter to
accept entry. Access to this screen is also from
the Fill#1 icon on the Main Run screen and
Point & Sew Look Ahead screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: Touch Enter to bypass this screen if no
fill will be placed in this position.

Figure B.29 Product Entry #16 This is the sixteenth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Fill Material #2 that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keyboard to enter the name of fill material
#2 up to 15 characters, then touch Enter to
accept entry. Access to this screen is also from
the Fill#2 icon on the Main Run screen and
Point & Sew Look Ahead screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: Touch Enter to bypass this screen if no
fill will be placed in this position.

Paragon M 360
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.30 Product Entry #17 This is the seventeenth of a sequence of
Screen - Fill Material #3 screens that appears when creating a product.
Touch the keyboard to enter the name of fill
material #3 up to 15 characters, then touch
Enter to accept entry. Access to this screen is
also from the Fill#3 icon on the Main Run
screen and Point & Sew Look Ahead screen of
a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: Touch Enter to bypass this screen if no
fill will be placed in this position.

Figure B.31 Product Entry #18 This is the eighteenth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Fill Material #4 that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keyboard to enter the name of fill material
#4 up to 15 characters, then touch Enter to
accept entry. Access to this screen is also from
the Fill#4 icon on the Main Run screen and
Point & Sew Look Ahead screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: Touch Enter to bypass this screen if no
fill will be placed in this position.

Figure B.32 Product Entry #19 This is the nineteenth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Fill Material #5 that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keyboard to enter the name of fill material
#5 up to 15 characters, then touch Enter to
accept entry. Access to this screen is also from
the Fill#5 icon on the Main Run screen and
Point & Sew Look Ahead screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: Touch Enter to bypass this screen if no
fill will be placed in this position.

361 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.33 Product Entry #20 This is the twentieth of a sequence of screens
Screen - Fill Material #6 that appears when creating a product. Touch
the keyboard to enter the name of fill material
#6 up to 15 characters, then touch Enter to
accept entry. Access to this screen is also from
the Fill#6 icon on the Main Run screen and
Point & Sew Look Ahead screen of a
completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: Touch Enter to bypass this screen if no
fill will be placed in this position.

Figure B.34 Product Entry #21 This is the twenty-first of a sequence of

Screen - Top Material screens that appears when creating a product.
Touch the keyboard to enter the name of the
top material up to 15 characters, then touch
Enter to accept entry. Access to this screen is
also from the Top Material icon on the Main
Run screen and Point & Sew Look Ahead
screen of a completed product.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.35 Product Entry Screen Access to this screen is from the Delete icon on
- Remove Selection the Product Entry screen, Jobs Schedule Set
Up screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen,
and Product Search screen. Touch the Minus
icon, then Check Okay icon to remove the
selected product from the database. Touch the
Cancel icon to exit the screen without making
changes.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
for icon definitions.

Paragon M 362
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.36 Product Search Access to this screen is from the Search icon
Screen on the Product Entry screen or Jobs Schedule
Set Up screen. Touch the keyboard to enter
the number, letter, or known name of a
product in the text box, then touch Enter to
accept the entry. The screen will display the
requested item or similarly names items.
See Figure B.11, “Product Information Screen”
and Jobs Schedule Set Up screen for icon
definitions.

Figure B.37 Product Selection Access to this screen is from the Pattern icon
Screen on the Main Run screen and Product Entry
screen#4. This screen also appears when
searching for a product from the Product
Search screen. Pattern icons are listed in
numeric, then alphabetic order. Use the
Arrow Up and Arrow Down icons to scroll to
the previous or next row. Use the Arrow Go
To First Page and Arrow Go To Last Page
icons to go to the beginning or end of the
product list. Touch a Pattern icon on this
screen to select a product.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
arrow down, arrow up, arrow go to first page,
arrow go to last page, check okay, help,
pattern, search

Figure B.38 Stop Codes Pop-up Access to this pop-up screen is only from the
Screen Main Run screen, Jobs Schedule Set Up
screen, and Tools screen.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons””.
arrow down, arrow up, check okay, number,
description
See also Figure B.2, “Main Run Screen”,
Figure B.3, “Jobs Schedule Set Up Screen”,
and Figure B.40, “Tools Screen”.

363 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.39 System Information Access to this screen is from most screens.
Screen Touch this icon to view the machine’s model
and serial numbers, software revision level,
maximum carriage travel, maximum speed,
Loop Take Time default, Tack & Jump,
Pattern Link, or Batch Mode capability,
maximum and total available system memory
and storage, and maximum and total
available on any CompactFlash card that is
inserted into the drive.

Figure B.40 Tools Screen Access to this screen is from the Tools icon on
the Main Run screen. Use this screen to set
system utilities.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
check okay, control status, cutter status, help,
info, modem, prime auto-lube lines (dark
grease), prime auto-lube lines (light grease),
thread detector on, thread detector off, set
auto-lube time interval (dark grease), set auto-
lube time interval (light grease), set time and
date, update cutter, update products, view
system log

Figure B.41 Tools Screen - Access to this screen is from the Modem icon
Modem Session Request on the Tools screen. Touch the Start icon to
initiate modem connection or touch the
Cancel icon to exit the screen and return to the
Tools screen.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
cancel, modem, start

Paragon M 364
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.42 Tools Screen - Set Access to this screen is from the Set Time and
Time and Date Date icon on the Tools screen. Touch the
arrows icons to increase or decrease a digit by
one.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons””.
arrow down, arrow up, cancel, date, info, time

Figure B.43 Quilter Control Status Access to this screen is from the Motion
Monitor Screen System Monitor icon on the Tools screen.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
cancel, carriage torque position, feed torque
position, help, info, needle torque position,
needle torque actual speed

Figure B.44 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the User
Screen Configuration icon on the Tools screen. Use
this screen to set system parameters.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
check okay, crop-out fill, crop-out product,
easyzero, help, info, lock, machine info, panel
cutter, passcode, reset program, unit, user
configuration - set backing distance, user
configuration - set fill distance, user
configuration - set panel cutter distance

365 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.45 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the Passcode icon
Screen - Set Passcode on the User Configuration screen. Touch the
keyboard to set a passcode security code in
the text box, then touch Enter to accept the
entry. The system accepts numbers or letters.
See Figure B.44, “User Configuration Screen”
for icon definitions.
NOTE: Once a passcode is entered and you
try to access a passcode protected screen with
an incorrect passcode, the following icon will
appear:

Figure B.46 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the User
Screen - Change Backing Station Configuration - Set Backing Distance icon on
on the User Configuration screen. Touch the
keypad to enter or change backing material
distance, then touch Enter to accept the entry.
See Figure B.44, “User Configuration Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.47 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the EasyZero icon
Screen - EasyZero on the User Configuration screen.
See the following icons in Appendix C,
“Glossary of Icons”.
cancel, help, initialize, needle initialize
See , “easy zero logo” on page 373 and Figure
B.44, “User Configuration Screen” for
additional icon definitions.

Paragon M 366
 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.48 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the User
Screen - Change Fill Station Configuration - Set Fill Distance icon on the
Distance User Configuration screen. Touch the upper
right icon on fill station numbers 1-6 to enable
or disable each station. Touch the upper left
icon to enter the fill distance for each material
station then touch the Check Okay icon to
accept the entry.
See Figure B.44, “User Configuration Screen”
for additional icon definitions.

Figure B.49 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the Lock icon on
Screen - Lock the User Configuration screen. Touch any
icon to lock or unlock a system feature, then
touch the Check Okay icon to accept all
entries.
See the following lockable icons in Appendix
C, “Glossary of Icons”.
auto-lubrication icons: prime auto-lube lines
and set auto-lube time interval (light and dark
grease), check okay, copy to card, copy from
card, fill1, floater bar - down, floater bar - up,
help, info, job schedule, look ahead, machine
speed, control status on, modem, panel width,
panel cutter status, product, product yield
counter, set loop take time, stitch density,
time, thread, tools, user configuration

Figure B.50 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the User
Screen - Change Panel Cutter Configuration - Set Panel Cutter Distance icon
Distance on the User Configuration screen. Touch the
keypad to enter or change the distance from
the quilting machine to the panel cutter, then
touch Enter to accept the entry.
See Figure B.44, “User Configuration Screen”
for icon definitions.

367 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Screens

Table B.1 Glossary of Screens

Screen Definition
Figure B.51 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the User
Screen - Update Software Configuration screen. Use this screen to
update system software, patterns, products,
job schedules, or the Autoschedule system.

Figure B.52 User Configuration Access to this screen is from the User
Screen - Change Top Material Configuration - Set Top Material Distance
Distance icon on the User Configuration screen. Touch
the keypad to enter or change top material
distance, then touch Enter to accept the entry.
See Figure B.44, “User Configuration Screen”
for icon definitions.

Figure B.53 Wait Screen Shown while the machine transitions from the
Tools Screen to User Configuration Screen or
when the system is busy.
NOTE: Do not touch any portion of the screen
during this time.

Paragon M 368
 Glossary of Icons

Glossary of Icons
C
There are three types of icons to help you monitor the quilting machine and
operate it.

Active An active icon appears as a button and

responds to touch. Most active icons respond
to a single touch (tap and release).
Display The main purpose of a display icon is to show
information about the current status of the
machine.
Fault A fault icon displays an error condition. They
are typically identified by the “no” symbol (a
red circle with a line dissecting the center of
the circle).

This list of icons appears in alphabetical order by icon description. For more
information about the screens, refer to the following chapters:
Appendix 6, “Working with Patterns and Products”
Appendix 8, “Utilities”
Appendix B, “Glossary of Screens”

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
add Active icon. Shown on the Product Entry Screens, Jobs Schedule
Set Up screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen, and Product
Search screen. Touch this icon to add selected product to job list.

arrow up Active icon. Shown on Product Entry Screen, Product Search

screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen, Set Time and Date screen.
Touch this icon to scroll to the previous entry or to decrease a digit
by one, such as when setting the time and date.

369 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
arrow down Active icon. Shown on Product Entry Screen, Product Search
screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen, Set Time and Date screen.
Touch this icon to scroll to the next entry or to increase a digit by
one, such as when setting the time and date.

arrow go to Active icon. Shown on Product Entry Screen, Product Search

first page screen, and Point & Sew Look Ahead screen. Touch this icon to
scroll to the first page in the list.

arrow go to Active icon. Shown on Product Entry Screen, Product Search

first page screen, and Point & Sew Look Ahead screen. Touch this icon to
scroll to the last page in the list.

prime auto- Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to prime
lube lines the auto-lubrication lines.
(dark grease) Dark brown icon indicates Shell Alvania® EP-1 dark grease.

prime auto- Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to prime
lube lines the auto-lubrication lines.
(light grease) Light brown icon indicates Shell Alvania EP00 light grease.

set auto-lube Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to set the
time interval time interval for auto-lubrication cycle. A text box below the icon
(dark grease) indicates the current time interval.
Dark brown icon indicates Shell Alvania EP-1 dark grease.

set auto-lube Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to set the
time interval time interval for auto-lubrication cycle. A text box below the icon
(light grease) indicates the current time interval.
Light brown icon indicates Shell Alvania EP00 light grease.

autoschedule Active icon. Shown on the Splash screen.

OFF Splash screen - indicates that the database is incorrectly loaded.

Paragon M 370
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
autoschedule Active icon. Shown on the Splash screen and User Configuration -
ON Update Software screen.
or database Splash screen - indicates that the database is correctly loaded.
okay User Configuration - Update Software screen allows you to update
the software package.

backing Active/Display icon. Shows the current backing material. Shown

material on the Main Run screen, Product Entry Screens #14, Point & Sew
Look Ahead screen, and Product Search screen.
Product Entry Screen - touch icon to enter or change backing
material information. Enter 1-15 characters.
low Main Run screen - icon changes color when backing material is
low and again when material must be replenished.

replenish

batch Active icon. Shown on Product Selection screen only if the

machine is in Single Product Mode. Touch the icon to place the
machine in Batch Mode.

cancel Active icon. Shown on most screens. Touch this icon to exit a
screen without making changes.

carriage Active icon on Product Entry Screen #11 and Pattern

compensation Compensation screen. Display icon on Product Search screen.
Product Entry Screen #11 - in the text box next to this icon, enter +
or - 5% to adjust pattern width in carriage direction.
Pattern Compensation screen - touch this icon to compensate
pattern width in carriage direction + or - 5%.

carriage fault Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. The Carriage Fault
icon indicates that an error has occurred in the carriage axis motor.

371 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
carriage jump Active icon on Product Entry Tack & Jump screen and Pattern
Compensation screen. (Pattern Link only). Use to set width of
jump in carriage direction.
Display icon on Product Search screen.

carriage torque Active icon. From the Tools screen, touch the Motion System
position Monitor icon to access the Quilter Control Status Monitor screen.
Then, touch the Carriage Torque Position icon to show the torque
graph of the carriage axis.

carriage start Active icon. Shown on the Product Add Update screen. Use to set
carriage start position. (Pattern Link only)

check okay Active icon. Appears on most screens. Touch this icon to accept
changes entered on the current screen.

check select Active icon. Shown on the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen. Touch this
icon to select a job in the job list.

clone Active icon on Product Entry Screen and Display icon on Product
Search screen. Use to duplicate product information. (NOTE: Does
not copy Product ID or Product Description.)

control power Display only. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates that control
on power is connected correctly.

control power Fault icon. Display only. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates
off that control power is not connected correctly.

Paragon M 372
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
control status Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to access
the Quilter Control Monitor screen.

copy from card Active icon. Shown on the Copy to Card screen. Access this icon
from the Tools screen to backup files from computer to
CompactFlash card.

copy to card or Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen and Copy to Card screen.
update Touch this icon on the Tools screen to access the Copy to Card
products screen to enter new files into the computer. The Help function
identifies this as the Update Products icon.

crop-out Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen.

product

cutter status Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to access
the Panel Cutter Status screen.

crop-out fill Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen.

delete Active icon. Shown on the Product Entry Screens, Jobs Schedule
Set Up screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen, Product Search
screen, and Remove Product pop-up screen. Touch this icon to
remove selected product from job list.

easy zero logo Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen. Touch this
icon to set the needle axis position to UP and the carriage axis
position to home.

373 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
elapsed time or Display only. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates the elapsed
wait time of the current job being sewn.
This icon may also appear on your screen to tell you to wait while
the system performs a function. The system is busy. Please wait.
NOTE: Do not touch any portion of the screen at this time.

feed Active icon on Product Entry Screen #12 and Pattern

compensation Compensation screen. Display icon on Product Search screen.
Product Entry Screen #12 - in the text box next to this icon, enter +
or - 5% to adjust pattern length.
Pattern Compensation screen - touch this icon to compensate
pattern length + or - 5%.

feed jump Active icon on Product Entry Tack & Jump screen and Pattern
Compensation screen. (Pattern Link only) Use to set length of
jump.
Display icon on Product Search screen.

feed fault Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. The Feed Fault icon
indicates that an error has occurred in the feed axis motor.

feed torque Active icon. From the Tools screen, touch the Motion System
position Monitor icon to access the Quilter Control Status Monitor screen.
Then, touch the Feed Torque Position icon to show the torque
graph of the feed axis.

fill#1 Active/Display icon. Shows the current fill material for positions
1-6. Shown on the Main Run screen, Product Entry Screens #15-
#20, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen, and Product Search screen.
Product Entry Screens - touch icon to enter or change fill material
information. Enter 1-15 characters.
low
Main Run screen - icon changes colors to warn when fill material is
low and again when material must be replenished.

replenish

Paragon M 374
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
floater bar - Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Floater bar is
down currently in the DOWN position. Touch this icon to move the
floater bar up. (NOTE: This icon changes to display which position
the bar will move when the icon is pressed - up or down.)

floater bar - up Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Floater bar is
currently in the UP position. Touch this icon to move the floater
bar down. (NOTE: This icon changes to display which position the
bar will move when the icon is pressed - up or down.)

g_logo Display icon. Gribetz International logo. Appears on the Main Run
screen when no product is selected.

guard door Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault - feed feed roller guard door is open.
rollers

guard door Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault - front front door guard door is open.

guard door Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault - front far front far-side guard door is open.
side

375 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
guard door Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault -front front home-side guard door is open.
home side

guard door Display icon. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates that the rear
fault - rear guard doors are open.

guard door Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault - rear far rear far-side guard door is open.
side

guard door Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault - rear rear home-side guard door is open.
home side

help Active icon. Shown on most screens. Future feature. Touch this
icon to view additional information about the current screen.

idle Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen when the machine is
first initialized or when no products are selected. Indicates that the
machine is in an idle or sleeping mode.

info Active icon. Shown on most screens. Touch this icon to show the
System Information screen.

Paragon M 376
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
initialize Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration - EasyZero screen.

insert job Active icon. Shown on the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen. Inserts a
job above currently selected job.

job schedule Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Touch this icon to
access the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen.
NOTE: This icon is not active in Autoschedule.

job panel Active and Display icon. Shown on the Jobs Schedule Set Up
width screen. Indicates panel width.
Jobs Schedule Set Up screen- Touch the icon to set panel width.

jobs low in Display icon. Shown on Main Run screen. When background
queue changes to yellow it indicates that the job queue is low on jobs.

jump (Tack & Active and Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen and
Jump) Product Entry Screen.
Main Run screen - appears in the upper-right hand corner when
the quilting machine is jumping to the next pattern repeat.

keyboard Active icon. Shown on the Single Product Selection screen.Touch

this icon to access a keypad pop-up screen. Products are listed in
numeric order followed by alphabetical order. To go directly to the
product, type the name of the product you want to search and
touch Enter.

last job in Display icon. Shown on Main Run screen. When background
queue changes to red it indicates that the job queue is on the last job.

377 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
lock Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen and Lock
screen. Indicates that select security features are locked. Touch this
icon to access the Lock screen to lock or unlock security functions.

loop take time Display only. Shown on the Main Run screen. Touch the icon to
star t the Loop Take Time procedures.
NOTE: The gray background changes to green whenever the
machine is initialized.

look ahead Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Touch this icon to
access the Point & Sew Look Ahead screen.

machine info Active icon. Shown on User Configuration screen. This is a future
feature for service technicians only.

machine speed Active icon. Shown on the Product Entry Screen #7 and Product
Search screen.
Product Entry Screen #7 - in the text box next to this icon, enter the
machine speed for a specific product.

machine Display icon. Shown on Main Run screen. This yield counter
throughput indicates the total yardage sewn, including all products, for each
counter specified period. May be reset (with passcode) so that you can
record shift, day, week, month, period, or year.

mode Display icon. Shown on the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen. In the
text box next to this icon, enter P for Panel or W for Wind-up.

Paragon M 378
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
modify pattern Display icon. Shown on the Pattern Compensation screen. The left
icon indicates the current pattern without modification. The right
icon indicates the pattern as modified using pattern length and
width compensation and feed and carriage compensation.

move to start Display only. Shown in the upper-right hand corner of the Main
Run screen when the machine is moving to the start position of a
job.

move Active icon. Shown on the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen.

1 Touch a job to move from the job list
2 Touch the Move icon
3 Touch another job in the list. The job you are moving will be
entered above this job.

needle fault Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that an
error has occurred in the needle axis.

modem Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to initiate
modem communication.
NOTE: The machine will not function during modem operations.

needle Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration - Easy Zero screen.
initialize

needle torque Active icon. Shown on the Quilter Control Status Monitor screen.
position From the Tools screen, touch the Motion System Monitor icon to
access the Quilter Control Status Monitor screen. Then, touch the
Needle Torque Position icon to show the torque graph of the
needle.

379 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
needle torque Active icon. Shown on the Quilter Control Status Monitor screen.
actual speed From the Tools screen, touch the Motion System Monitor icon to
access the Quilter Control Status Monitor screen. Then, touch the
Needle Torque Actual Speed icon to show the actual speed of the
needle axis.

needle setting Active/Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen, Product
screen, and Product Entry Screen #9.
Product screen - Touch this icon to access the Product Entry Screen
#9 to enter or change needle setting information.
Product Entry Screen #9 - in the text boxes next to this icon, enter
needle setting description (1-12 characters), number of needles,
and needle setting.
Main Run screen - for batch mode patterns, the background
changes color from gray to teal to request a change of needle
settings. The text box below this icon indicates the current needle
setting.

no air Display/Fault icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that
there is low or no air pressure. The air compressor is not receiving
air.

no card Display icon. Shown on the Copy to Card screen and Copy from
Card screen. This pop-up icon indicates that no card is in the drive
slot or that the card is not inserted completely. Insert a card to
copy or load files.

no jobs in Active fault icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that
queue there are no jobs in queue. Touch this icon to access the Product
Selection screen and select a job.

no lock Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration - Lock screen.

Indicates that select security features are unlocked. Touch this icon
to access the Lock screen to lock or unlock security functions.

Paragon M 380
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
no panel cutter Display icon. Shown on the Splash screen to indicate that the
system does not recognize a connection with a panel cutter.

number Active/Display icon. Two number icons are shown on the Main
Run screen, Jobs Schedule Set Up screen, and Tools screen. The left
icon indicates the quantity for the listed product. The right icon
lists stop codes to identify reasons for stopping the machine
during that product. A report of these codes may be generated as
an effective tool in quality control.
Main Run screen, Tools screen, Jobs Schedule Set Up screen - touch
the number icon to access a pop-up screen. This screen allows you
to select a code number when stopping the machine for looper
maintenance, machine cleaning, unplanned splice, thread
replenish, lunch, break time, shift change, or other reason not
specified in list.
Jobs Schedule Set Up screen - in the text box next to this icon, type
the quantity for the selected product.

number of Display icon. Product Entry Tack & Jump screen and Product
tacks Search screen.
Product Entry Tack & Jump screen - in the text boxes next to this
icon, enter the number of tacks, (typically 4 or 5), at the end of the
product.

on/off symbol - Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen and several
off, no, or save pop-up screens. Also on main electrical disconnect switch.
(red) On User Configuration screen - indicates that the station is
disabled and is not used as a splice point.
On pop-up screens - touch this icon to indicate “no” or “save for
this product only”.
On main electrical disconnect - indicates power is off.

on/off symbol - Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen and several
on, or yes pop-up screens. Also on main electrical disconnect switch.
(green) On User Configuration screen - indicates that the station is enabled
as a splice point for only that station.
On pop-up screens - touch this icon to indicate “yes” or “save”.
On main electrical disconnect - indicates power is on.

on/off symbol - Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen. Also on
on (yellow) main electrical disconnect switch.
On User Configuration screen - indicates that not all stations are
enabled or more than one splice point is at that station.
On main electrical disconnect - indicates power is on.

381 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
over travel Display/Fault icon. Shown on Main Run screen. Travel is beyond
limit fault the normal limit and has tripped the over travel limit switch.

panel cutter Display icon. Shown on the Splash screen to indicate that the
system has identified a valid panel cutter connection.

panel length Active/Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen, Product
Entry #13 screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen, Product Search
screen, and Jobs Schedule Set Up screen. Indicates the panel length
to be cut.
Product Entry Screen #13 - in the text box next to this icon, enter
the panel length.

panel tracker Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates the current
job schedule being processed by the machine. Jobs before 0 (in
purple) are in queue waiting to be processed by the quilter. Jobs at
0 are currently being sewn by the quilter. Jobs after 0 (in blue) are
currently being processed by the panel cutter.

panel width Active/Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen, Product
Entry #13 screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen, Product Search
screen, and Jobs Schedule Set Up screen. Indicates the panel width
to be cut.
Product Entry Screen #13 - in the text box next to this icon, enter
the panel width.

passcode (key) Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen. Touch this
icon to access the Change Passcode keypad.
NOTE: A pop-up screen will notify you should you enter an
incorrect passcode.

Paragon M 382
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
pattern Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen, Product Selection
screen, Product Entry Screen #4, Product Search screen. This icon
indicates the current product’s pattern name, length, width, and
shape.
Main Run screen - touch this icon to modify the current product.
Product Entry Screen #4 - touch this icon to access the Product
Selection screen.
Product Selection screen - touch this icon to select the pattern.
Product Search screen - touch this icon to access the Product search
screen and search for a specific pattern.

pattern length Active icon on Pattern Compensation screen. Display icon on

compensation Product Search screen.
Pattern Compensation screen - touch this icon to compensate
pattern length.

pattern width Active icon on Pattern Compensation screen. Display icon on

compensation Product Search screen.
Pattern Compensation screen - touch this icon to compensate
pattern width.

pattern type Active/Display icon in Product Entry Screen #3 and Product

Search screen.
Product Entry Screen #3 - in the text box next to this icon, enter
pattern type: continuous (C) or Tack & Jump (T).

pds Active icon. Pattern Development System (PDS). Shown on the

User Configuration - Update Software screen. Touch this icon to
update Patterns from CompactFlash card or modem.

panel cutter Active icon. Shown on the Splash screen, Tools screen, and User
status or type Configuration screen.
Splash screen - indicates that the panel cutter is communicating
correctly.
Tools screen - touch this icon to view the Panel Cutter Status
screen.
User Configuration screen - touch this icon to select panel cutter
type.

383 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
post jump Active icon. Shown on the Pattern Link Product Information
screen. Touch this icon to set the number of inches (centimeters) to
jump after the pattern repeat for the current step only.

pre jump Active icon. Shown on the Pattern Link Product Information
screen. Touch this icon to set the number of inches (centimeters) to
jump before the pattern repeat for current step only.

product Active and Display icon. Shown on Product Entry Screen #2.
description Product Entry Screen #2 - in the text boxes next to this icon, enter
or change product description (1-30 characters).

product Active icon. Shown in Main Run screen and Product Entry Screen
identification #1, Jobs Schedule Set Up screen, Point & Sew Look Ahead screen,
and Product Search screen.
Main Run screen - the text box below this icon shows the name of
the product that the machine is processing. Touch this icon to
access the Pattern Selection screen to change the pattern or select a
new pattern.
product update Product Entry Screen - touch this icon to enter or change
information.

presser foot Display/Active icon. Shown on Main Run screen and Product
high (up) Information screen. Indicates the presser foot is in the HI or up
position.
Main Run screen - indicates current position of presser foot.
Product Information screen - touch this icon to toggle between HI
(up) or LOW (down).
NOTE: The machine will automatically respond to the preselected
presser foot position with each job. Default position is HI (up).

presser foot Display/Active icon. Shown on Main Run screen and Product
low (down) Information screen. Indicates the presser foot is in the LOW or
down position.
Main Run screen - indicates current position of presser foot.
Product Information screen - touch this icon to toggle between HI
(up) or LOW (down).
NOTE: The machine will automatically respond to the preselected
presser foot position with each job. Default position is HI (up).

Paragon M 384
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
product Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to access
the Product Information screen.

product yield Active and Display icon. Shown on Main Run screen and Tools
counter screen.
Main Run screen - text box below icon indicates actual yardage
sewn for the current product.

Tools screen - shown with a yellow background. Touch this icon to

reset the counter to zero.

quality control Display icon. Shown on the Splash screen to indicate system
functions are operating correctly.

quantity Active icon. Shown in Product Entry Screen, Jobs Schedule Set Up
screen, and Point & Sew Look Ahead screen. The text box below
this icon indicates the number of panels to be quilted for the
current Product Identification name.
Product Entry Screen - touch this icon to enter or change quantity
of panels.

quantity Active icon. Shown on the Pattern Link Product Information

screen. Touch this icon to enter the number of pattern repeats for
the current step only.

reset program Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to access
the Reset Program screen.
NOTE: This feature is for authorized personnel only.

385 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
run allowed Display only. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
from panel Main Run screen on the panel cutter is in ready mode.
cutter

run not Display only. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
allowed from Main Run screen on the panel cutter is not in ready mode.
panel cutter

running Display only. Shown on the Main Run screen. The quilting
machine is in running (sewing) status.
NOTE: This can be true even if the sewing speed is set to 0.

search Active icon. Shown on the Product Entry Screens, Jobs Schedule
Set Up screens, and Product Search screen. Touch this icon to
access the Product Search screen and search for a specific product.
Enter a number, letter or known name of a product in the text box,
then touch Enter to accept entry. The screen will display the
requested item or similarly named items.

servo bus Fault icon. Display only. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates
power off that there is a fault in the servo bus.

servo bus Display only. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates that the servo
power on bus is operating correctly.

servo fault Diplay only. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that there is
an error in the servo motors.

Paragon M 386
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
servo okay Display icon. Shown on the Splash screen and Main Run screen to
indicate that the servo motors are operating correctly.

or

set loop take Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. This icon can be seen
time only when the machine is not sewing. Touch this icon to activate
Loop Take Time.

set presser foot Active icon. Shown on Product Entry Screen and Product Search
screen. Touch this icon to toggle between high or low settings.

The gray background indicates that the presser foot is in the

DOWN position.

The green background indicates that the presser foot is in the UP

position.

set time and Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to access
date Set Time and Date screen.

speed graph Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. While the machine is
processing a job, touch the left or right arrows increase or decrease
speed by intervals of 5 or slide the bar left or right. The black
display box indicates the current speed.

387 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
start Display only. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates that the
the machine is in the Start (Ready) mode. Press the start buttons to
begin sewing.

start later or Active icon. Shown when selecting a product to sew. Touch this
wait icon to hold and sew the product later, such as in batch mode.

start loop take Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Touch Looper icon to
time start Loop Take Time.

stitch density Active/Display icon. Shown in Main Run screen, Product screen,
Product Entry Screen #8, and Pattern Compensation screen.
Main Run screen - in the text box below indicates the stitches per
inch for the job that the machine is processing.
Product screen - Touch this icon to access Product Entry Screen #8
to enter or change stitch density.
Product Entry Screen #8 - in the text box next to this icon, enter the
number of stitches per inch.
Pattern Compensation screen - touch this icon to change number
of stitches per inch. touch the left or right arrows increase or
decrease stitches per inch or slide the bar left or right. The center
number indicates the current stitches per inch.

stop at end of Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. This icon replaces the
product Loop Take Time icon while the machine is sewing. Touch this icon
to stop the machine at the end of the product currently being sewn.

Paragon M 388
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
tack type Display icon. Future feature. Product Entry Tack & Jump, Product
Entry Pattern Link, and Product Search screens.

tack modify Active icon. Product Entry Tack & Jump, Product Entry Pattern
Link, and Product Search screens.
Touch this icon to enter the tack modification number from 0-10.
Use a smaller number (0-5) for thinner materials and a larger
number (6-7) for thicker materials.

tail length Display icon. Show on the Product Entry Tack & Jump screen and
Product Search screen. Indicates the length of the thread that
remains in the needle after a tack is sewn. Touch the keypad to
enter the thread length, then touch Enter to accept entry.
NOTE: The length of the thread is from the needle and not the
thread remaining on the panel.
CAUTION: Do not set the length to 0. This indicates that no thread
remains in the needle and may activate the thread break detectors.

terminator I/O Display icon. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates that computer
functions okay is communicating correctly with the quilting machine.

I = input
O = output

or

terminator I/O Display icon. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault computer is not communicating with the quilting machine.

I = input
O = output

thread detector Display/Fault icon. Shown on Main Run screen. Indicates that the
fault thread detection system does not recognize thread in a needle. A
light at a thread detector indicates which needle is affected.

389 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
thread detector Active icon. Shown on Tools screen. Indicates that the thread
off detection system is disabled. A text box below the icon indicates
OFF.

thread detector Active icon. Shown on Tools screen. Indicates that the thread
on detection system is enabled. A text box below the icon indicates
ON.

time Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen and on the Set Time
and Date screen.
Main Run screen - the text box below this icon identifies the start
time of the product the machine is currently processing.
Set Time and Date screen - use the up and down arrow icons
below this icon to set the time.

top material Active/Display icon. Shows the current top material. Shown on
the Main Run screen, Product Entry Screens #21, Point & Sew
Look Ahead screen, and Product Search screen.
Product Entry Screen - touch icon to enter or change top material
information. Enter 1-15 characters.
low
Main Run screen - icon changes color when top material is low and
again when material must be replenished.

replenish

thread Active icon. Shown on User Configuration - Lock screen. Touch

this icon to lock or unlock this feature.

tools Active icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Touch this icon to
access the Tools screen.

Paragon M 390
 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
unit Active icon. Shown on the User Configuration screen, Product
Entry Screens, and Product Search screen. Touch this icon to set
the default for unit measurements. This icon toggles between
English and Metric units.

update cutter Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to update
the panel cutter with current information from the quilter. The
Wait screen appears during the update. The Tools screen
reappears when the update is finished.

user Active icon. Shown on the Tools screen. Touch this icon to access
configuration the User Configuration screen (also known as the Set Parameters
screen). Use this screen to change the passcode protection number,
set security locks, and set units in English or Metric.

user Active icon. This two-button icon appears on the User

configuration - Configuration screen. Touch the upper right icon to enable or
set backing disable the station. Touch the upper left icon to enter the backing
distance distance for the Backing Material Station.

user Active icon. This two-button icon appears on the User

configuration - Configuration screen. Touch the upper right icon to enable or
set fill distance disable the station. Touch the upper left icon to enter the fill
distance for Fill Material Stations #1 though #6.

user Active icon. This two-button icon appears on the User

configuration - Configuration screen. Touch the upper right icon to enable or
set panel cutter disable the station. Touch the upper left icon to enter the distance
distance from the quilting machine to the panel cutter.

391 Quilting Machine

 Glossary of Icons

Table C.1 Glossary of Icons

Icon Definition
user Active icon. This two-button icon appears on the User
configuration - Configuration screen. Touch the upper right icon to enable or
set top disable the station. Touch the upper left icon to enter the top
material material distance for the Top Material Station.
distance

view system Active icon. Shown on the Splash screen and Tools screen.
log Splash screen - indicates that the system has loaded correctly.
Tools screen - touch this icon to view the system during operation.

yards produced Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. The text box below
this icon shows the number of yards produced for the current
product that the machine is processing.

yield factor Display icon. Shown on the Main Run screen. Indicates the current
yield of the product. This figure is calculated automatically by the
system, it indicates the percentage of yards per minute (or meters
per minute).

Paragon M 392
 Safety and Maintenance
Checklist

D
Safety and Maintenance
Checklist
1 Are you trained and qualified to operate this machine?
2 Have you read all warning and caution decals?
3 Is the machine properly lubricated?
4 Is the work area clean and dry?
5 Is the work area clear of unauthorized personnel?
6 Are aisles and passageways near the work area clear of obstructions?
7 Are all loose bars, tools, and parts moved away from the machine?
8 Are all cables and hoses secured?
9 Do you know the location of the plant's fire fighting equipment?
10 Do you know how to operate the plant's fire fighting equipment?
11 Are you wearing appropriate personal safety items, such as safety glasses?
12 Are you wearing appropriate clothing?
13 If you have long hair, is it tied back and secured?
14 Are all guards and guard doors closed?
15 Are all hinges and safety screws on guards and guard doors securely
attached?
16 If performing maintenance, is the main power disconnected before opening
any secure areas?
17 If performing maintenance, have you observed proper lockout and tagout
procedures?

393 Quilting Machine

Safety and Maintenance
Checklist

Paragon M 394
 Chapter 1 Answers to Review
Questions

E
Answers to Review Questions
Printed here are the answers to review questions found at the ends of the
chapters. The answers are found in bold type.

Chapter 1
1 True or False. This manual is intended for operators, maintenance
technicians, and supervisory personnel who are familiar with industrial
sewing machines and basic sewing principles.
2 True or False. This manual is organized into chapters.
3 What type of information is identified by a triangle? Warnings and cautions
are identified by a triangle.
4 True or False. This manual is organized into six major sections.
5 True or False. Book titles are printed in italic type.
6 A caution reminds you to be aware of safety risks and to follow good safety
procedures.
7 Choose all of the ways to get answers to questions about the machine: d. All
of the above
a. Training at the Technical Training Center
b. Telephone the Gribetz International Helpline
c. Read the manual
d. All of the above
8 Before calling Gribetz International for help, you must have: d. All of the
above
a. Customer identification number
b. Model and serial number of the machine
c. A working telephone located near the machine
d. All of the above

Chapter 2
1 True or False. A safety feature is a specific visual or acoustic guarding and
warning device.
2 Name a safety feature of the multi needle quilting machine.

395 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 3
Questions

• Warning and Caution Decals

• Guards
• Emergency Stop (E-Stop) Buttons
• Electrical Disconnect Devices
• Interlock System
• Pneumatic Disconnect Devices
• Security Isolation and Lockout System
3 Safety features are designed to protect you from injury.
4 The main cabinet contains a hazardous voltage area.
5 Test each E-Stop button monthly to verify that it is functioning properly.
Choose one:
a. Daily
b. Weekly
c. Monthly
d. Yearly
6 True or False. A special key is required to open the high voltage area.
7 E-Stop buttons are located on both sides of the quilting machine in the
front and in the rear.
8 Interlock switches are located on guard doors that do not require a tool for
entry.
9 The correct setting for pneumatic air pressure is between 60 - 80 PSI. Choose
one:
a. 40 to 50 PSI
b. 60 to 80 PSI
c. 80 to 90 PSI
d. 90 to 110 PSI
10 True or False. Press the E-Stop buttons on either the programmable panel
cutter or the quilting machine in an emergency.

Chapter 3
1 To ensure safe operation of your quilting machine you must be
_______________. Choose one: d. All of the above
a. Appropriately attired
b. Fully trained
c. Able to reach all emergency stops
d. All of the above
2 Safety glasses and sturdy shoes or boots protect you from injury.
3 True or False. Do not allow unauthorized personnel near the machine.
4 True or False. Keep operations and maintenance manuals near the machine.
5 True or False. Secure all guards before operation.

Paragon M 396
 Chapter 4 Answers to Review
Questions

6 Locate and read all warning and caution decals.

Chapter 4
1 True or False. The Paragon M series quilting machines are fully
computerized, high speed, chain stitch quilting machines.
2 The sewing box is located at the central area of the machine where the
sewing functions take place.
3 Another word for the touch-sensitive device used on the Paragon M series
quilting machines is a touch screen.
4 True or False. The normal stop buttons are used to turn off the computer.
5 The Paragon M series quilting machines have the ability to sew up to 1500
RPM.
6 The near side of the quilting machine is also known as the main cabinet
side. Choose one:
a. Sewing box
b. Material station
c. Main cabinet side
d. Back canopy
7 True or False. Never operate the quilting machine with guard doors and
panels open or removed.
8 True or False. A display (status) icon does not respond to touch.
9 A device which requires intervention on the part of the operator is called a
control switch.
10 True or False. The main electrical power switch (or lever) connects electrical
power from the switch (or lever) to the machine.

Chapter 5
1 To stop the quilting machine in an emergency press any of the E-Stop
buttons.
2 When breaking in the machine, keep the machine speed below 1000.
a. 1500
b. 1000
c. 800
d. 500
3 The two operating modes are Single Product and Batch.
4 True or False. If your quilting machine is connected to a panel cutter, turn
the panel cutter on first.
5 Press the start button to start sewing.
6 Operating multiple products in a specific order is called Batch Mode.

397 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 6
Questions

7 You cannot change the product size or design when operating in Single
Product Mode.
8 True or False. If the machine loses power, the computer will not save the
current position.
9 When you see the Idle icon you must:
a. wake up the system
b. touch the Idle icon to continue
c. touch the Batch Mode icon to enter Batch Mode
d. record the time.
10 When activating the computer, the progress bar on the Splash screen will
indicate what the error is by a red icon next to system icon with the error.
11 A green icon on the Splash screen indicates that area of the system is
functioning correctly.
12 A method or way of performing a specific task is called a mode.
13 True or False. “Move to start” is an event that happens when the quilting
machine changes from one pattern to another; the carriage moves to the start
position.
14 To stop the quilting machine temporarily at any time during operation,
press any of the normal stop buttons located to the left and right of the
sewing box in the front or back.
15 True or False. To disconnect power from the computer, first stop the
machine, then rotate the main electrical power switch clockwise to the OFF
position.

Chapter 6
1 True or False. Patterns are defined as drawing files and must be converted to
ODE shape files.
2 Class I and Class II designs are Continuous patterns.
3 Class III designs can sew up to 360 degrees.
4 True or False. Carriage compensation is a feature that corrects pattern
distortion in the carriage direction (side to side).
5 A “product” includes all the necessary information to manufacture a
finished item. Select the item that is not part of the product.
a. Pattern shape file
b. Machine speed
c. Stitches per inch
d. Raw materials
e. Number of panels. A “job” includes a product and the number of
panels to be sewn for that product.
6 The pattern class that can sew up to a maximum angle of 90-degrees is
Class II.

Paragon M 398
 Chapter 6 Answers to Review
Questions

7 A Pattern icon with a blue background is a __________ pattern.

a. Continuous
b. Pattern Link
c. Tack & Jump
d. Class III
8 The pattern class that includes segmented or independent designs is
Class IV.
9 True or False. The purpose of the railroad pattern is to reduce materials and
save production time.
10 True or False. The pattern class III can sew 360-degree and Tack & Jump
patterns. Only Class IV patterns can sew Tack & Jump patterns.
11 True or False. When creating a product, the Tail Length entry is the length of
the thread left in the needle after a tack is sewn.
12 The maximum number of characters for the product identification name is:
a. 30
b. 15
c. 6
13 True or False. The database lists patterns and products in numeric, then
alphabetic order.
14 True or False. There is no “back” button during the product creation
sequence.
15 Each product must have a unique identification name.
16 Use the Arrow icons or the Search icon to search for a product.
17 The following Product Information screen displays a Continuous,
Tack & Jump, or Pattern Link product.

399 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 7
Questions

18 Match the following icons:

Pattern

Product Identification

Clone

Batch Mode

Product

19 The individual products within a Pattern Link product are called steps.

Chapter 7
1 Ticking is a strong, tightly woven fabric used especially to make pillow and
mattress coverings.
2 Crop-outs are necessary to cut and discard unusable quilted portions
containing pattern change-overs and material splices.
3 The term batch describes a group or series. (Choose one.)
4 The listing of two or more jobs in a specific order is called a job schedule.
5 A job includes:
a. a product, number of panels, and ODE file
b. the number of panels
c. a product, number of panels, and mode
d. a batch, a product, and mode
6 The first step to creating a job schedule is to:
a. access the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen
b. determine splice stations, crop-out values, and panel cutter distance
c. list the products, the number of panels, and the mode
d. Enter each product and number of panels into the computer

Paragon M 400
 Chapter 7 Answers to Review
Questions

7 When measuring the panel cutter distance, do not allow the accumulator bar
to active the sensor.
8 True or False. Gribetz International offers an Advanced Training Course to
help you become proficient in batch mode quilting.
9 The Paragon M has 6 fill stations.
10 This icon, with a green background, displays the top material splice point. Is
it enabled or disabled? Enabled

11 True or False. This icon, shown with a yellow background, identifies that the
fill material station distance is measured for several stations.

12 Match the following icons with the correct name:

Start

Product Identification

User Configuration

Look Ahead

Job Schedule

Insert Job

Check Select

401 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 7
Questions

13 The following icon indicates that 7.20 yards or meters have sewn for the
current product.

7.20
14 True or False. Material station distances must be measured separately for
each station.
15 True or False. Splice station measurements are from the splice station to the
middle needle bar.
16 Splice station measurement is from the splice station to the:
a. material trough
b. panel cutter
c. middle needle bar
d. material handling pack
17 This Main Run screen shows that the machine is operating in Single Product
mode.

18 True or False. You must stop the machine before modifying a job schedule.
19 True or False. When creating a new job schedule, you must delete old jobs
before entering the new jobs or the old jobs will become part of the new job
schedule.
20 True or False. The second column in the Jobs Schedule Set Up screen
indicates the number of cut panels or the yards (or meters) of wound rolls.

21 True or False. Jobs are always listed in the order that they will be sewn.
22 When moving a job back into the job schedule you will always move the job
above a selected job.
23 True or False. Once jobs are past the splice point, they cannot be moved.
24 Which icon is used to insert a job back into the job schedule.

Paragon M 402
 Chapter 7 Answers to Review
Questions

a.

25 True or False. Deleting a job from the job schedule will also delete the
product of that job from the product database.
26 Before sewing a job schedule always verify to see if the system is set to batch
mode. This is done from the:
a. Product Selection screen
b. User Configuration screen
c. Jobs Schedule Set Up screen
d. Panel tracker
27 In which mode will you not see panels in queue for the panel cutter.
a. Batch mode
b. Single product mode
c. Idle mode
d. A la mode
28 Touch the arrows on the speed graph to increase or decrease speed by
intervals of 5.
29 When in batch mode quilting, the system notifies you of material and needle
changes.
30 When the system identifies a material change, the background of the icon
changes color to teal.
31 When you request a material change, the background of the icon changes
color to blue.
32 All panels shown on the panel tracker are committed and cannot be
changed.
33 Panels waiting in queue to be sewn are shown in the color purple.
34 Panels sewn and waiting in queue to be cut are shown in the color blue.
35 Crop-outs are shown in green.
36 Identify the panels on following panel tracker.

Second job, Starry Night TS, in queue to be sewn.

Third, fourth, fifth and six sewn panels
Next job, Starry Night (3 panels), in of Slumber Swan in queue for panel cutter.
queue to be sewn.

crop-out crop-out

Purple jobs in queue to be sewn. Crops-outs in green. Blue jobs in queue to be cut or wound.

403 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 8
Questions

37 True or False. The colored arrows below the graph identify the
predetermined splice stations.
38 True or False. The colored arrows at the bottom of the panel tracker
coordinate with the colors under each material icon, unless there are more
there is more than one splice station at the at location.
39 The number zero (0) indicates the middle needle bar.

Chapter 8
1 To make sure that the thread detectors are activated, access the Tools screen
and verify that the Thread Detector icon indicates the ON status.
2 Which of the following icons toggle between two choices:
a. Thread detector

b. Presser foot

c. Units

d. All of the above

3 Easy Zero is feature used to set the needle axis position to UP and the
carriage axis position to home.
4 True or False. Copying Pattern Shape (*.ode) files from a CompactFlash card
may overwrite existing files.
5 To set system parameters, you must first have access to the system passcode.
6 Store back-up files in a separate location.
7 True or False. Save Pattern Shape (*.ODE) files and Product Database (*.DB)
files on separate CompactFlash cards.
8 True or False. Do not connect the modem through your PBX or digital phone
system.
9 True or False. Do not operate the quilting machine while performing
modem operations.
10 The Tools screen is where you set system utilities.
11 When priming the auto-lubrication system, the machine will continue to
prime the lines until you do what? Press the Prime Line icon again.
12 The auto-lubrication cycle can be set for 1-10 minutes. What is the
recommended setting.
a. 3

Paragon M 404
 Chapter 9 Answers to Review
Questions

b. 5
c. 7
d. 10
13 The adjustable presser foot default is set to:
a. HI
b. LOW
14 True or False. If you loaded pattern shape files, make sure you build a
product file or the pattern will not be represented with an icon on the
Product Selection screen.
15 True or False. The Machine Throughput Counter can be used to track
employee performance.
16 The Quilter Control Status screen displays the operational state of the
machine.
17 The View System Log screen displays the history of the machine.
18 True or False. Insert or remove the CompactFlash card only when the
machine is turned off.
19 The Lock screen is accessed from the User Configuration screen.
20 True or False. Each time the machine stops, the system tracks the idle time.

Chapter 9
1 True or False. If the quilting machine stops and a material station icon
illuminates, replenish the material associated with that icon before resuming
sewing functions.
2 The term ticking identifies a decorative or finished top material.
3 Fill material provides density to the finished product.
4 True or False. Needle (or top thread) is typically three-ply 150 denier.
5 Use pneumatic actuated tension discs whenever you sew Tack & Jump
patterns.
6 True or False. Thread detectors signal you only when the top thread breaks
or has run out.
7 When lacing top thread on the material handling pack, pass the thread:
under the tension disc from left to right.
c. under the tension disc from left to right.
d. under the tension disc from right to left.
e. over the tension disc from left to right.
f. over the tension disc from right to left.
8 For Tack & Jump patterns, leave approximately 6 to 8 inches of thread tail.
9 True or False. Batch mode notifies you only of scheduled material changes.
10 The type of roller that you rotate to unlock is called a grip roller.

405 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 10
Questions

Chapter 10
1 To create a perfect stitch the following must be positioned correctly:
a. Needles
b. Loopers
c. Trimmers or retainers
d. All of the above
2 A needle code describes the location of needles, needle placement on the
bars, and the distance between needles.
3 True or False. The last character of a needle code determines if needles are
placed as single or pairs. The last character indicates in which bar the next
single or pair of needles is placed.
4 The needle code sx6-3 is also called the base setting of the pyramid needle
setting system.
5 True or False. “Loop Take Time” is a term that describes a synchronization
procedure for parts in motion. It identifies the carefully balance relationship
between the needle and the looper.
6 Would you use a retainer or trimmer when sewing a Class III pattern?
Retainer or trimmer. You can use retainers for Class I, II, or III and
trimmers for all classes.
7 A chain stitch is identified when both top and bottom threads loop:
a. in middle of the material
b. on the underside of the material
c. on the top of the material
d. on both top and bottom of material
8 One function of the looper is to:
a. spread the thread into a triangle
b. catch the thread loop created by the needle
c. cut the thread
d. protect the needle
9 Identify the following parts of the needle: blade, butt, cone, eye, point,
reinforced blade, scarf, and shank.

10 Use the threading hook and long holder when threading needles.

Paragon M 406
 Chapter 10 Answers to Review
Questions

11 The scarf of the needle always faces the:

a. middle needle bar
b. front of the machine
c. near (or left) side of the machine
d. eyelet
12 True or False. Pre-load is the lateral pressure of the looper against the
needle.
13 When threading needles, always leave 6 to 8 inches of thread tail.
a. 7-8
b. 6-8
c. 4-6
d. 5-10
14 True or False. During sewing, the floater bar provides stability to top
material, specifically 360-degree continuous and Tack & Jump patterns.
15 The spreader bar provides tensions to top material.
16 Use the looper gauge to:
a. mount the looper and needle guard
b. position the looper head and verify pre-load
c. verify pre-load and mount the looper
d. insert the needle guard and tighten the looper
17 True or False. The precompression roller guides the materials side to side
with the carriage motion.
18 True or False. Do not use threading hooks to thread loopers.
19 After threading loopers, always position thread to the right or left of the
looper. Right
20 There are two types of tension discs. They are: pneumatic-actuated and
regular.
21 The row of tension discs above the upper butterfly bar controls tension to
top thread.
22 True or False. Before you can set Loop Take Time you must run a few yards
of a continuous Class I or II product.
23 True or False. The needle guard protects the looper during stitch formation.
It protects the needle.
24 For Class III (360-degree), Tack & Jump, and Pattern Link patterns, place the
floater bar in the down position.
25 A magic bar is placed in the material trough to provide tension to the top
material.
26 To prevent top material from wrinkling, apply tension using the bow (or
spreader) bar.

407 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 11
Questions

Chapter 11
1 True or False. Before cleaning or lubricating the Paragon M make sure that it
is turned off.
2 True or False. Only the person named on the tag is authorized to remove the
tag and reconnect power and air to the machine.
3 What is needed to properly clean the touch screen? lint free cloth
e. lint-free cloth
f. soap
g. vacuum cleaner
h. isopropyl alcohol
i. all of the above
4 True or False. The main shaft and upper rocker shafts require manual
lubrication.
5 The presser foot plate is located above the needle plate.
6 The auto-lube system lubricates the eccentrics.
7 Under-greasing or over-greasing the eccentrics causes them to overheat .
8 Needle drive connecting links move the needle bars up and down.
9 True or False. Presser foot drive assemblies are attached to the main shaft.
10 True or False. The upper butterfly takes up thread and gives thread to the
stitch.
11 The term “dog bone” is also called the needle drive link.
a. Retainer
b. Looper drive link
c. Needle drive link
d. Presser foot guide rod
12 Clean the area associated with the front retainer drive weekly.
a. Weekly
b. Monthly
c. Bimonthly
d. Yearly
13 True or False. You do not have to manually lubricate the quilting machine
when using the auto-lubrication system.
14 True or False. The two types of grease used in the auto-lube system, Shell
Alvania EP00 (light) and Shell Alvania EP-1 (dark), are not interchangeable.
15 True or False. All grease fittings are lubricated one stroke monthly.
16 Check the air pressure in the isolator pads monthly.
a. Weekly
b. Bimonthly
c. Monthly

Paragon M 408
 Chapter 12 Answers to Review
Questions

d. Yearly
17 When changing the main power indicator light, always disconnect the main
power before opening the main cabinet.

Chapter 12
There are no review questions for this chapter.

409 Quilting Machine

 Answers to Review Chapter 12
Questions

Paragon M 410
 Index

Index
Numerics air pressure
180/24 needle size, 256 isolator pads, 317
24-hour clock settings, 186 pneumatic regulator, 285
400 class of stitch, 248 recommended setting, 18
401 seaming stitch, 248 residual air hazard, 62
751a, Federal Standard No., 248 what to do if there is none, 325, 329
800-326-4742, phone number for toll free help, 7 aisles, minimum distance, 29
954-846-0300, phone number for help, to order parts, amps, 17
for training, for pattern studio, or for sales, 7 annual cleaning, 286
A arrow icons
accumulator bar, 135 increase or decrease machine speed, 387
activating on Look Ahead screen, 161
emergency stop buttons, 16, 48 searching for a job, 151
Loop Take Time, 266, 387, 388 searching for a product, 92
machine, 59 searching for Pattern Link steps, 102
start button, 47 setting time and date, 186
active icons, 50, 369 types of, 369, 370
adding a job to job schedule, 150 arrows, on panel tracker, 160
additional publications, 1, 2 attire, safety, 28
address, Gribetz International, 8 automatic
adjustable presser foot adjustable presser foot, 83, 185, 219
adjusting height, 185 lubrication system, 306, 309
identifying position, 185, 219, 384 notification of material change, 58, 80
adjusting product sorting, 53
bow bar, 277 autoscheduling system, 35
floater bar, 276 autoshedule software, 53
precompression roller, 277 axis
tension to top material, 276, 277 carriage, 210, 211
thread tension, 275 drive fault, 325
air fault icon, 325, 327
disabling, 24, 45 monitoring, 190
enabling, 24 needle, 210
fault icon, 4, 325, 329, 380 B
interlock system, 19 backtacking, 88, 341
isolator pads, 317 bag closing attachment
location of pneumatic devices, 18 manual, 234
pneumatic regulator, 45 operating, 231
pneumatic supply valve, 45 bar
pressure, 18, 22, 24, 325 accumulator, 135
recommended setting, 18 bow, 277
reduction in, 45 magic, 276
reduction in on isolator pads, 317 middle needle
turning on, 59 determining system measurements, 134

411 Quilting Machine

 Index

on panel tracker, 161 axis fault, 325

Pattern Link patterns, 202 monitoring axis, 190
needle, 249 motion, 277
needle spacing, 37 setting axis, 210, 211
retainer bar assembly, 301 caution decals, 13
speed graph, 158 CD-ROM, how to use, 6
BARS, metric unit of pressure, 18 CE compliant
batch mode definition, 342
canceling, 58 lights, types of, 315
definition, 58, 131 chain stitch
deleting a panel before panel cutter, 166 definition, class, and type, 248
determining system measurements, 133 machines, 36, 343, 346
errors, 166 checklist, safety and maintenance, 393
material replenishment, 230 cleaning
notification of low or no jobs in schedule, 132 air isolator pads, 317
notification of material change, 159, 230 annual, 286
notification of needle setting change, 380 between presser foot and needle plate, 288, 303
observing jobs in process, 160 daily, 285
placing machine in, 70 database, 100
requesting a manual stop, 159 fan filters, 303
setting up machine, 133 front retainer drive, 300
sewing, 156 monthly, 286
taking machine out of, 65 precompression and outfeed rollers, 305
training, 132 recommended supplies, 303
verifying machine status, 64 retainer bars, 301
before you call for help, 8, 198 safety procedures, 283, 284
belt, 300 schedule, 285
belt, timing, 300 stop code 20, 205
break-in period, 59 thread tension discs, 303
bulb touch screen, 304
replacing, 315 weekly, 286
types of, 315 with compressed air, 30, 303
bulletin, service, 306 work area, 305
C clear guards, 15
cabinet clock, setting, 186
electrical, 39 cloning a product, 96
key for locking, 39 clothing, recommended, 28
machine, 40 Code of Federal Regulation, 20
main, 39 CompactFlash
cabinet door guard, 15, 39 available memory, 224
calling for help, 6 card, 51
cam, lubrication, 306 card release button, 51
canceling batch mode, 58, 65 caution when inserting, 51
card. See CompactFlash. icons, 373
carriage location, 51
transferring information, 193, 195

Paragon M 412
 Index

troubleshooting, 323 CD-ROM, 6

warning when inserting, 193 CompactFlash, 51
compressed display only icons, 50, 369
air, 30, 241, 303 display screen, 50
materials, 277 disposing of needles, 31
computer double guide bar, lacing lower thread, 244
available memory, 224 duplicating a product, 96
CompactFlash card, 51
E
does not turn on, 323, 328
e series machines, 35
initializing, 46
Easy Zero, 210
location of, 38, 39
EC compliant, 315
security, 34
editing a product, 94, 96
will not turn on, 44
electrical
console, operator, 39
cabinet door guard, 15, 39
contents, manual, 2
disconnect device, 17
Continuous pattern, 77
interlock system, 19
corrections to manual, 8
multi-tap transformer, 13, 37
counter
power, turning on, 59
hours of machine operation, 40
switch, main, 17
machine yield, metric, 188
troubleshooting, 30, 322
creating a job schedule, 132, 146
turning on, 56
Customer Service Department, 7
electronic manuals, 6
D emergency procedures, 62
daily cleaning, 285 emergency stop buttons
danger warning, 13, 28 how to operate, 16, 23
database, updating, 187, 193 location, 16, 48
date and time testing, 23
current, 182 with panel cutter, 23
setting, 186 enabling pneumatic regulator, 24
db files, 193, 195 end guard, 14
decals error icons. See fault icons.
ordering, 13 E-Stop button. See emergency stop buttons.
other languages, 13 eyelet
warning, 13 for all patterns, 239
deleting a panel from panel cutter queue, 166 for continuous patterns, 241
deleting a product for Pattern Link patterns, 241
from a job schedule, 100 for rear loopers, 245
from the database, 100 for Tack & Jump patterns, 241
detector, breaking thread, 49
F
determining a problem, 321
fan filters, cleaning, 303
disabling, pneumatic regulator, 24
fault
disconnecting
air pressure, 325
air supply, 18, 24, 62
axis, 325
electricity, 17
icons, 51
disk
thread break, 49

413 Quilting Machine

 Index

fault icons safety reminder, 15

description, 51, 369 securing, 21
where they appear, 60, 351 guide rods, lacing lower thread, 242
Federal Regulation Code, 20
H
Federal Standard No. 751a, 248
handling needles, 31
feed
hazard warning
axis fault, 325
air pressure, 62
monitoring axis, 190
conditions, 5
feedback addresses, 8
E-Stop buttons on panel cutter, 23
files
main cabinet, 39
backing up, 193
help
loading, 195
before you call, 8, 198
types of, 75, 193
customer service, 7
fine-tuning, 247
how to get training, 6
floater bar, 276
how to give your opinion, 8
G on-line assistance, 8
General Services Administration, 248 on-site assistance, 8
getting started pattern development, 7
basics, 59 Technical Training Center, 6
quick start, 56 translation, 213, 223, 341
what to know before working with batches, 132 website, 8
what to know before working with job helpline call
schedules, 132 making the call, 6
what to know before working with products, 77 toll free, 7
glossary of terms, 341 high voltage area
green indentifying, 13
background on icons on User Configuration main cabinet, 15, 39
screen, 143 history, of Gribetz International chain stitch
background on presser foot icon, 387 machines, 35
background on Splash screen, 60 home position, 210
background on toggle icon, 181 hours when help is available, 7
background on user configuration icon, 381 how
crop-outs on panel tracker, 157, 160 a chain stitch is formed, 248
highlighted line on Job Schedule, 152 machine works, 57
highlighted line on Look Ahead screen, 161, 162 to add a job to schedule, 150
start buttons, 62 to create a job schedule, 132, 146
guards to delete a product from database, 100
end, 14 to delete a product from job schedule, 100
hinged panel, 14 to determine a problem, 321
infeed enclosure, 15 to give feedback, 8
interlocked, 14, 15 to load files, 193
location, 14, 21 to modify a product, 94
main cabinet, 15 to sew multiple products, 131
panel, 14
I
rear sliding doors, 15
icons

Paragon M 414
 Index

arrows, 92 J
background changes color, 60, 181, 381, 387 jobs
backgrounds change color, 143 adding to panel cutter queue, 166
dual touch, 141, 202 adding to schedule, 150
how to activate, 50, 63 caution when deleting products, 100
how used in manual, 4 creating a job schedule, 132, 146
Loop Take Time, 220 deleting products from schedule, 100
not responding to touch, 50, 216, 322, 328 low in schedule, 132
on menu screen, 63 modifying jobs in queue, 162
Search, 92 moving in job schedule, 152
toggle, 201 observing jobs in process, 160, 161
types of, 50, 369 searching for a job in job schedule, 151
identifying product type on screen, 77 selecting in job schedule, 152
indicator lights, 43, 49
K
infeed enclosure guard, 15
key
information
main cabinet, 15, 39, 316
additional items, 1, 2
measurements, 133
calling for help, 6, 7
keyboard, where needed, 192
screen, 224
initialize machine, 46 L
installation labels, warning, 13
determining system measurements, 133 languages, translating, 213
loopers, 260 leak, isolator pads, 317
manual, 1 lights
material replenishment, 238 error, 49
needles, 256 replacing, 315
preparation for, 1 thread detector, 49
safe clearance area, 29 types of, 315
trimmers and retainers, 273 loading
instructions CompactFlash card, 193
fine-tuning machine, 247 files, 193, 195
for pre-installation of machine, 1 patterns, 195
hazard, 13 lock
scheduling a class, 6 guards, 21
working with batches and job schedules, 169 interlock system, 19
working with patterns and products, 109 Loop Take Time position, 253
interlock system main cabinet, 39
connection, 19 screen, 216
guards, 15 security functions, 216
location, 22 Loop Take Time
securing, 22 activating, 387
interlocked guards, 15 default setting, 224
international languages, 213 icon on Main Run screen, 387
introduction, to manual, 1 icon to access procedure, 220
isolator pads, 317 icon to start automated procedure, 388
preparation for, 266

415 Quilting Machine

 Index

setting, 266 preparing for, 30

skipped stitches, 335 schedule, 285
looper screen, 198
assembly, 260 manual
thread holder, 265 additional publications, 1
tools for installing, 263 automatic lubrication system, 306
lubrication bag closing attachment, 234
cam, 306 CD-ROM, 2, 6
maintaining automatic system, 306, 309 contents, 2
protecting against rust, 306 corrections to, 8
recommended lubricants, 306 electronic, 6
reservoirs, 306 other languages, 213
schedule, 311 panel cutter, 134
sealed bearings, 306 part number, 2
testing automatic lubrication system, 309 material
M adjusting tension, 276, 277
machine depletion of, 228
counter, 188 jams, deleting a panel in batch mode, 166
initializing computer, 46 puckers, 336, 337
linking several machines with autoschedule, 53 tension, 335, 336
model number, 8 wrinkles, 336, 337
options, 52 metric
orientation, 38 BARS, 18
recorded stops, 203 machine counter, 188
serial number, 8 measurements, 133
series versions, 35 setting system in, 212
specifications, 37 stitch length, 279
speed, 37, 103, 158, 387 mode
stops during Loop Take Time, 268 operating, 58
stops during operation, 49, 159, 230 panels and windup, 132, 151
stops for material or needle change, 159 model number, location of, 8, 41, 224
stops while viewing Look Ahead screen, 161 modem
turning on, 59, 62 cancel session, 187
verifying mode status, 64 connection location, 40, 51, 187
magic bar, 276 definition, 51
main cabinet icon on Tools screen, 182
guard door, 15 initiate connection, 187
key, 39 recommended telephone line, 40, 187
main electrical power switch security, 220
disconnecting, 17 session, 187
location, 17 modifying
turning on, 59 products, 94
maintenance tacks, 91, 104, 389
electrical, 30 monthly cleaning, 286
for isolator pads, 317 multiple products, 131
multi-tap transformer, 13, 37, 39

Paragon M 416
 Index

N location of, 21
needle bars mode, 151
correct position for maintenance, 242 moving in job schedule, 162
placement, 249 securing, 21
needles toggle icon, 165
axis fault, 327 toggle to wind-up mode, 149
disposing of safely, 31 Paragon
handling, 31 M series machines, 2002, 35
monitoring axis, 190 M series machines, 2003, 35
parts of, 256 standard machines, 1996, 35
setting axis, 210 parts, ordering, 1
size, 256 passageways, minimum clearance area, 29
notification of idle time, 203 passcode
notification of minimum jobs, 132 getting, 198
numbers, on panel tracker, 160 locked functions, 216
O malfunction, 324
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 20 setting, 214
ode files, 193, 195 patents, 2, 15, 34, 35, 76, 131, 253
operator console, 39 Pattern Development and Styling Studio, 7, 53
optional features, 52 Pattern Link
organization of manual, 2 cloning, 126
OSHA, 20 correct position of floater bar, 276
over travel limit, 279 how product is made, 102
overwriting products, 105, 193 icons specific to product, 103
identifying products, 77
P overwriting current product, 105
panel cutter software, 53
adding a panel while in batch mode, 166 types of patterns, 53
adding jobs in queue, 166 using only middle needle bar, 144
controlling from quilter, 58 view steps in product, 102
deleting jobs in queue, 166 warning when modifying, 105
determining distance from quilter, 132, 133 patterns
instruction manual, 134 loading, 77, 195
observing jobs in queue, 161 railroad, 76
panel tracker on Main Run screen, 66, 71 types of, 75, 76
turning on when connected to a quilter, 56, 60, personal safety
327 definition, 27
using emergency stop buttons, 23 items for protection, 28
viewing control status, 191 what not to do, 28
panel guard, 14 phone number for help, 6
panels physical limitations, 27
adding before panel cutter, 166 picture, how used in manual, 3
adding to job schedule, 162 pneumatic disconnection device, 18
change number of cut panels, 149 pneumatic regulator
deleting before panel cutter, 166 disabling, 24
deleting from job schedule, 162 enabling, 24

417 Quilting Machine

 Index

location, 45 decals, 13
location of, 18 emergency stop buttons, 16
pneumatic supply valve, 45 indicator lights, replacing, 315
Point & Sew, 37 screen, system off, 62
power valve, pneumatic, 18
air, 24 regulations
amps, 17 European, 342, 343
converting, 13, 37 federal, 20
disconnecting, 17 OSHA, 20
electrical, 17 requirements
location of main switch, 17 lubrication, 306, 310
location of pneumatics, 18 power, 37
specifications, 17, 37 reservoirs, lubrication, 306
turning on, 59 retainers
precompression roller, 277 correct position of main shaft when setting, 274
preparing for installation, 273
maintenance, 30 when to use, 273
operation, 30 review
product answers, 395
adding to job schedule, 150 questions, 9, 25, 32, 54, 73, 129, 177, 225, 246,
cloning, 96 281, 318
duplicating, 96 revision level
icon, background color, 77 changes, 200, 214
naming, 78 location of, 224
overwriting, 105
S
saving time when creating, 96
safety
sewing multiple, 131
checklist, 59, 393
protection
decals, 13
from hazardous areas, 14
disposing of needles, 31
personal safety items, 28
handling needles, 31
PSI, 18
location of emergency stop buttons, 16
publications, additional, 1
materials, 20
puckering material, 337
minimum clearance area, 29
Q pamphlet, 1
quick start, 56 personal, 27
R regulations, OSHA, 20
rebooting machine caution, 62 securing work area, 29
red, 181 stopping the machine, 16
background on icons on User Configuration types of features, 11
screen, 143 video, 1
background on Product Information icon, 377 safety features
background on Product Selection icon, 71 caution decals, 13
background on Splash screen, 60 electrical disconnect device, 17
background on toggle icon, 181 emergency stop buttons, 16
buttons, 48, 61 explanation, 11

Paragon M 418
 Index

guards, 14 passcode not working, 324

interlock system, 19 serial number, location of, 8, 41, 224
isolation and lockout system, 20 service
location of, 12 bulletin, 306
pneumatic disconnect device, 18 contacting, 7, 8
securing guards, 21, 22 sewing
securing interlock system, 22 start, 47
testing emergency stop buttons, 23 stop, 48
types of, 12 Single Product Mode, 58
warning decals, 13 sliding door guards, 15
sales, contacting, 52, 53 software
schedule Autoschedule, 53
cleaning, 285 how to order, 53
inspection, 285 Pattern Link, 53
job, adding, 150 Point & Sew, 37
job, creating, 146 revision level, location of, 224
lubrication, 311 solenoid air valves, 306
screens special symbols, how used in manual, 5
cannot access, 324 specifications
how used in manual, 4 lubrication, 307, 308, 313, 314
scrolling machine, 37
down in list, 370 power, 37
for stop codes, 203 speed
Help screen, 223 graph, 158, 387
through selection of products, 92 increase or decrease, 158
through View System Log screen, 192 machine maximum, 37
to find a job, 151 modifying for Pattern Link, 103
to first page in list, 370 Splash screen, identifying errors, 60
to last page in list, 370 start button, 47
up in list, 369 stitches
warning, 99 how created, 248
Search icon, 92 irregular, 335
securing modifying from Pattern Compensation
guards, 21 screen, 279
interlock system, 22 size, 37
work area, 29 skipping, 335
security tension, 275
guards, 21 too long, 333
icons that can be locked, 216, 218 type of, 248
interlock system, 19 stop codes
isolation and lockout system, 20 break time, 205
locking functions of machine, 216 entering a reason for idle time, 203
lockout and tagout, 20 looper maintenance, 205
main cabinet, 39 lunch, 205
no access to screen, 324 machine cleaning, 205
passcode, 34, 198, 214 other, 205

419 Quilting Machine

 Index

setting time periods, 205 automatic lubrication system, 309

shift change, 205 emergency stop buttons, 23
thread replenish, 205 thread, 229
unplanned splice, 205 text, use of special text in manual, 6
stop machine thread
for emergency situations, 48 adjusting tension, 275
for material or needle change, 159 break, 49, 333
for normal situations, 48 cone, 41
supplies damage to machine, 300, 305, 333
additional, 1, 2 detector, 49, 183
cleaning, 303 Equistitch, 34
tool kit, 255 holder, 255, 258
switch, main, 17 holder on looper, 265
symbols looper, 41
caution, 5 pusher, 258
how used in manual, 5 rack, 39, 52
icons, 4 setting tail length, 88
international, 72 snags or frays, 256, 259
note, 5 spool, 41
warning, 5 stitches per inch, 37
T supply, 239
tables, how used in manual, 4 take-up, 39, 298
tack tension discs, 275
modify, 91, 103, 104, 389 testing, 229
type, 91, 103, 104, 389 types of, 228
Tack & Jump threading
additional steps when creating patterns, 78, 355 bottom thread, 242
pattern, 77 for Class III, IV, and Pattern Link patterns, 257
tension discs, 241 guide rods, 242, 245
video, 1 hook, 255, 258
tagout and lockout, 20 looper, 263, 264, 265
technical support helpline, 6 material handling pack, 239
Technical Training Center, 6 needle, 239, 258
telephone number for helpline, 6 proper loop formation, 228
tension tension discs, 239, 243
bow bar, 277 thread detectors, 240
discs, 241, 275 top thread, 239
floater bar, 276 time and date, changing, 186
magic bar, 276 timing, 300
material, 52, 276, 277, 280, 335, 336, 337 pulley, 300
precompression roller, 277 recommended tools, 255
thread, 275 toggle icon
thread detectors, 49 lock security features, 217
when splicing material, 135, 235 on User Configuration screen, 181, 201
testing thread detector, 183
units, English to Metric, 212

Paragon M 420
 Index

toll free helpline, 7 when mounting needles, 257

tool kit, recommended items, 1, 2, 255 when naming products, 78
tools and supplies, 1, 2 when rebooting machine, 62
training, 6 when replacing lights, 315
transformer, 13, 37, 39 warranty, voiding, 30
translation website address, 8
help, 223 weekly cleaning, 286
of manual, 213 wind-up
ordering, 52 change number of yards (meters), 149
trimmers mode, 148, 151
correct position of main shaft when setting, 274 optional attachment, 52
installation, 273 toggle icon, 165
when to use, 273 toggle to cut panels mode, 149
turning on power, 44 wrinkling material, how to avoid, 277, 337
U Y
URL for information, 2, 8 yearly cleaning, 286
V yellow
valve background on icons on User Configuration
pneumatic disconnect, 18 screen, 143
pneumatic supply, 45 background on Product Identification icon, 132
solenoid, 306 background on Product Information icon, 377
stem, isolator pad, 317 background on Product Selection icon, 71
vibration, 317 background on Product Yield Counter, 385
video decals, 13
safety, 1 highlighted information on Help screen, 222
Tack & Jump - minimizing tails, 1
visual aids, how used in manual, 3
voiding warranty, 30
W
warning
decals, 13
during Loop Take Time procedures, 266
electrical, 30
electronic parts, 285
high voltage area, 39
icon, 5
lubrication, 292, 306
material levels, 228
over travel limit, 279
overwriting products, 105, 193
residual air pressure, 62
when cloning, 96, 99
when deleting a product, 100
when editing products, 96
when inserting CompactFlash card, 51, 193
421 Quilting Machine
 Index

Paragon M 422
 Index

423 Quilting Machine

 Index

Paragon M 424